Et10412+o&m+manual+english 25.04.15

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD.
TRANSFORMER (T1) DIVISION

MUMBAI 400 042, INDIA
Tel : 0091 22 67558200
Fax : 0091 22 67558307
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR
80 MVA, 220/13.8/6.9 kV
HV TRANSFORMER
CGL W.O. ET10412
CLIENT
: Black & Veatch on behalf of Minera Escondida Ltd.
SUBSTATION : BHPB Escondida Water Supply Project

EQUIPMENT
: HV POWER TRANSFORMER
ORIGINATED BY
APPROVED BY
DATE: 16/02/2015
CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;

POWER TRANSFORMER DIVISION (T1) : POWER SYSTEMS
Kanjur Marg (East), Mumbai 400 042, India
===============================================================
INDEX
1.
Introduction
1.1. Purpose of O & M Manual
1.2. Instruction Guide Guide to Important Drawings
1.3. General Safety Measures
1.3.1.Overview
1.3.2.Basic Safety Practice
1.3.3.Transformer Specific Safety Practice
1.4. Contact Details
1.5. Health, Safety and Environment considerations at site
2.
General Transformer Features

2.1. Technical Characteristics
2.2. Mechanical Features
2.3. Transformer Grounding
2.3.1.Transformer Grounding
2.3.2.Temporary Grounding of Transformer Body
3.
Packing, Transport, Handling & Storage

3.1. Packing
3.1.1.Overview
3.1.2.Packaging of transformer
3.1.3.Condenser bushings
3.1.4.Oil
3.1.5.Radiators
3.1.6.Fabricated Items
3.1.7.Control Cabinets
3.1.8.Instruments
3.1.9.Marking
3.2. Transport & Handling
3.2.1. Overview
3.2.2. Road Transport

===============================================================
3.2.3. Rail Transport
3.2.4. Water Transport
3.2.5. Loading
3.2.6. Shipping Documents
3.3. Receiving Main Unit and Accessories
3.3.1.Checking Shipping & Consignment Documents
3.3.2.Unpacking & Inspection
3.3.3.Standard Receiving Tests
3.4. Storage of Main Unit and Accessories
3.4.1. Overview
3.4.2. Storage of Transformer
3.4.3. Storage of Accessories
3.4.4. Storage of Oil Drums
3.4.5. Periodic Inspection during Storage
3.5. Safety Measures during Transport, Handling and Storage
4.
Assembling & Installation

4.1. Installation Equipments & Tools
4.2. General Installation Topics
4.3. Locating Transformer on a Plinth
4.3.1.Moving a Transformer on Wheels
4.3.2.Moving a Transformer on Steel Rods
4.4. Recommended Steps for Assembling & Installation
4.5. Installation of Transformer Main Unit
4.6. Installation of Radiators
4.7. Installation of Cooling Fans
4.8. Installation of Bushing Turrets
4.9. Installation of Condenser Bushings
4.10. Installation of Other Bushings
4.11. Installation of Conservator and Pipes
4.12. Installation of Current Transformers (CTs)
4.13. Wiring on the Transformer
4.14. Installation of Other Items
4.14.1.Gaskets for Liquid Filled Transformers

===============================================================
4.14.2.Breather Installation
4.14.3.OTI and WTI
4.14.4.PRD
4.14.5.Plate Valves and their Assemblies
4.15. Oil Filling Procedure
4.16. Dos and Donts during Assembling and Installation
5.
Pre-commissioning checks
5.1. Overview
5.2. General Guidelines
5.3. Mechanical Checks
5.3.1. Location on Foundation
5.3.2. Bushings and Terminal Connectors
5.3.3. Valves and Pipe-work
5.3.4. Radiators and Cooling Systems
5.3.5. Leak Test
5.4. Tests on Transformer and Accessories
5.4.1.
Oil Sampling and Testing
5.4.2.
Ratio, Polarity and Vector Group Test
5.4.3.
Winding Resistance Measurement
5.4.4.
Insulation Resistance (Meggar) test
5.4.5.
Insulation Resistance Test
5.4.6.
Measurement of Magnetising Current
5.4.7.
Magnetic Balance Test
5.4.8.
Power Factor Measurement (Tan-Delta) of Transformer Windings & Bushings
5.4.9.
Tests on Auxiliary Instruments
5.4.10. Tests on Tap Changer

5.4.11. Checking of Fans and Pumps
5.4.12. Checking of Marshalling Box
5.4.13. Checking of Oil
5.4.14. SFRA Test
5.5. Instruments used for Pre - Commissioning Tests
5.6. Start Up Instructions

===============================================================
6.
Commissioning
6.1. Repeating Pre-Commissioning Checks
6.2. Operational System Tests
6.2.1.Relay Settings
6.2.2.Alarm Circuits and Contacts
6.2.3.Trip Circuit and Contacts
6.2.4.Temperature Settings
6.2.5.Rating of Pressure Relief Device
6.2.6.System Voltage, Frequency & Phase Sequence Check
6.2.7.Oil Sampling and Checking
6.3. Transformer Energization
6.3.1.Minimum Settling Time after Final Oil Filling
6.3.2.First Energization on No Load
6.3.3.Loading the Transformer
7.
Maintenance
7.1. Introduction
7.2. Safety during Maintenance
7.3. Periodic Inspection and Checks during Service
7.3.1.External Cleaning
7.3.2.Transformer Body
7.3.3.Gaskets
7.3.4.Oil
7.3.5.Bushings
7.3.6.Conservator and Magnetic Oil Gauge
7.3.7.Tap Changer
7.3.8.Dehydrating Breather
7.3.9. Cooling System
7.3.10. Temperature Indicators
7.3.11. External Circuits and Control Equipment
7.3.12. Buchholtz Relay
7.3.13. Explosion Vent
7.4. Preventive Maintenance Inspection Chart

===============================================================
8.
Trouble shooting
8.1. Indication Signals of Malfunction or Abnormality
8.2. Trouble Shooting Chart
8.2.1. Trouble Shooting Flow
8.2.2. Trouble Shooting Flowchart for Abnormal level of Fault Gases
8.3. Trouble Shooting Process
8.4. Emergency Response for Unexpected Events
8.5. Energizing Transformer after Fault
9.
End of life Disposal

9.1. Planning for disposal
9.2. Human safety
9.3. Environment safety
10.
Transformer Drawings and Catalogue

10.1. Transformer Details
10.2. List of Approved drawings
10.3. List of Reference Drawings
10.4. Brochures for Accessories and Fittings
11.
TMDS (SMART MONITOR)

11.1. Operation and Maintenance Manual
12.
GAS GUARD
12.1. GAS-Guard Site Preparation Guide
12.2. GAS-Guard Installation Guide
12.3. GAS-Guard Operation and Maintenance Guide
12.4. GAS-Guard Software User's Manual
13.
Neutral Grounding resistor / transformer

13.1. Installation And Maintenance Instructions
14.
Oil discharge Instruction

14.1. Oil Discharge Procedure

===============================================================
SECTION 1
Introduction

===============================================================
1.1
Purpose of O & M Manual
Every product comes with a user manual

and a transformer is no exception. The
main purpose of this Operation and
Maintenance manual (O&M manual)
Is to educate and familiarize the end user
about the product, its installation
procedure, operating procedure and
maintenance activities.
1.2
Instruction Guide Guide to

important drawings
All the relevant drawings including Outline

general arrangement drawing (GA) etc.
have been attached at the end of manual
for ready reference.
1.3
1.3.1
General safety measures

Overview
Always be alert to emergencies. If an

accident should occur, quickly utilize the
safety equipment, emergency tools and
equipment at hand. Before you begin a
project, ensure that at least two people
know first aid procedures and that they
have the proper first aid kits at hand.
Ensure that all protective equipment
required for the job is available to all
workers and ensure that it is used
correctly. This equipment may include
helmets,
breathing
apparatus,
eye
protection, gloves, foot protection etc.
Ensure that all electrical circuits to be
worked on have been traced and deenergized. Ensure that all safety grounds
have been correctly applied to protect
personnel
against
the
accidental
application of power to these circuits (refer
to chapter 2 for more information on
temporary grounding.)
Being a high voltage product, safety to life

and property is of utmost importance.
Keeping this in mind, relevant caution and
safety instructions have been provided at
relevant places, the reason being that
safety instructions specific to specific
tasks have been covered at respective
places.
DO NOT assume that someone else has

turned off the power, check for yourself.
Use the padlock and key interlock system
where available to protect yourself and
others.
1.3.2
DO NOT walk under equipment that is

suspended from a crane.
Basic safety practice
Every operator must have a safety

program and he has to know how to use it
in the event of an accident.
Ensure that safety equipment and tools
are always close at hand, and suitable fire
extinguishing equipment and qualified
personnel are available. Make sure that
the equipment used is suitable for fire
involving oil filled electrical installations.
Make sure that it is correctly charged and
that you know how to use it.
DO NOT work under equipment that is

raised and insecurely blocked.
DO NOT walk holding a ladder or any

other long object near a transformer or
overhead lines under voltage.
Before lifting any object by any means,
ensure that its weight can be handled
correctly. Use the appropriate lifting or
handling tools.
DO NOT work on or adjust moving
equipment. DO NOT work on or adjust
mechanical equipment unless its motive
source has been deactivated.

===============================================================
1.3.3
Transformer specific safety

practice
must be taken to prevent objects from

falling into the transformer.
DO NOT walk on a transformer or its parts

unless the unit has been de-energized.
Anyone going inside a transformer must

wear clean clothes and clean syntheticrubber boots. Never stand directly on any
part of the insulation.
DO NOT walk on a transformer under

vacuum. Never perform any electrical
tests on a transformer under vacuum. Do
not apply vacuum when it is raining or
when the transformer is unsupervised.
When pressure tests are being performed
or when vacuum is being applied, the
pressure must be equalized between the
main tank and the (On) Load Tap Changer
compartment if these compartments are
separated by terminal panels which might
not be able to withstand pressure
differences. Find out which parts will not
be able to withstand a complete vacuum.
Before removing any cover plate or
transformer fitting, ensure that the
overpressure inside the transformer is
zero and that the oil level is lower than the
opening in question.
In the event of a sudden change in the
weather bringing penetrating rain or snow,
provisions must be made for closing the
tank quickly and pressurizing it with dry air
in order to preserve the insulation.
To allow anyone entering a transformer
the air has to support life with a sufficient
oxygen level (19.5%).
Correct operation of all protective circuits

and protective devices for the transformer
should be checked on a regular basis.
Neglecting of these circuits or devices, or
overriding of the functions of these circuits
or devices could allow minor problems to
develop into a major problem. This may
result in a total loss of the transformer,
damage to other equipment and injury of
personnel.
A pressure relief device incorporates
heavy spring in compression, DO NOT
dismantles such a device, unless suitable
safeguards have been implemented,
otherwise personnel injury may occur.
Recommended commissioning checks
must be performed before the first
energization of the transformer.
1.4
Contact details
Customer Services Dept.

Crompton Greaves Ltd;
Power Transformers division (T1)
Kanjur Marg (East), Mumbai- 400042
Tel.: +91 22 6755 8000/25782451
Extreme precautions are to be taken to

protect the insulation of the transformer
from any damage and to prevent the
ingress of foreign objects and moisture
during the checking and erection of the
transformer.
Whilst the transformer is open, no one
may be allowed on top of it, unless this
person has emptied his/her pockets, has
checked himself/herself for the presence
of objects such as watch, rings etc. and
has removed them. These precautions

===============================================================
1.5
Health, Safety & Environment

considerations at site
1.
In view of the hazards associated

while working with transformers all
personnel who work or support the
work
must
demonstrate
a
responsible attitude.
2.
The personnel
working must
undergo orientation, of the HSE
requirements through the employer.
3.
Categorization of Risk & Hazards

must be done before carrying out
related activity.
4.
Prohibit entry where there

potential Risks & Hazards.
5.
Documentation of preventive actions

/ remedial actions in case of high
risk areas.
6.
7.
is
Storage of accessories (including

high risk material) as per guidelines
given in the Manual/MSDS.
Disposition of hazardous waste as
per guidelines given in MSDS.
12. Ensure personnel are not permitted

to enter confined spaces i.e spaces
which have the risk of encountering
hazardous conditions like fire,
fumes, and vapors, deficiency of
oxygen,
drowning,
and
high
temperature.
13. Ensure use of weather proof hand
lamps, scaffolding, man lift, bucket
crane, crane, belts and ropes
wherever required.
14. Transformer Oil is capable of
catching fire ensure extinguishers
are available during work.
15. Use
appropriate
clothing
considering nature of work and
climatic condition at site.
16. Ensure availability of assistance in
case of emergency like first aid box,
details of nearest medical care
facilities.
17. Any other statutory requirements as
per customer or local authority to be
followed.
8. Documentation for Permit To Work.

9. Inspection
of
tools/
tackles/
instruments and safety equipment
for suitability before start of work.
10. Review of Calibration status for
testing/measuring instruments.
11. Ensure Use of personnel protective
equipment
like
safety
harness/Safety
shoes,
Helmet
goggles.

===============================================================
SECTION - 2
General Transformer Features

===============================================================
2.1. Technical characteristics

A transformer is essentially an
electrical product. The technical
characteristic which are of utmost
importance are MVA rating, kV
rating & impedance of the
transformer. Please refer Rating &
Diagram plate for details specific
for the transformer. The other
technical aspect is the insulation
level for which the transformer is
designed. The transformer being a
tailor-made
product,
every
transformer differs from any other
transformer as far as electrical
characteristics and features are
concerned.
2.2.
Mechanical features
By looking at the transformers
around us, we find that majority of
the transformers resemble each
other. This tells us that though the
electrical features may differ,
mechanical features do not differ
much. The point made here is that
the transformer has a body (tank),
and is mounted with accessories
such as radiators, fans, breather,
conservator, breather, Buscholz
relay, bushings etc. as applicable.
To know the mechanical features
specific to the transformer, please
refer General Arrangement (OGA)
drawing along with the drawings of
the accessories enclosed at the
end of the manual.
2.3.
Transformer grounding
2.3.1. Transformer grounding

Parts that are to be grounded are as
shown in the figure 2.1. Please refer
General arrangement drawing before
proceeding. The generic items are as
shown in the schematic and the
corresponding parts are as follows:
1. Breather
2. Conservator and parts
3. Tap changer
4. Bushing
5. Cable box
6. Current transformer
7. Lightning arrester
8. Current transformer
9. Marshalling kiosk and OLTC Motordrive unit
10. Oil-air cooler
11. Radiators and mounting structures
12. Fan
13. Oil-water cooler
14. Pump
2.3.2. Temporary
transformer body
grounding
of
Temporary
groundings,
used
while
personnel are working on de-energized
transformers, must always be applied in
accordance with the approved safety and
operation practices issued by the employer.
In addition, they must be in accordance with
the instructions for the specific grounding
equipment used.
Temporary grounding is required for a
number of reasons:
Induced voltage from adjacent energized
lines.
Fault current feed-over from adjacent lines.
Lightning strikes anywhere on the circuit.
Switching equipment malfunction or human
error.
Accident initiated contact with adjacent
lines.

===============================================================
Figure 2.1 Parts to be grounded

======================================================================
SECTION 3
Packing, Transport,
Handling and Storage

======================================================================
3.1
Packing
3.1.1
Overview
Oil in Tanker/ container: Oil transported in

clean oil tanks/ containers
The main unit is dispatched oil filled or Dry air

filled.
Flexi bags in Container: Oil can also be filled

in flexi bags transported in containers.
3.1.5
Radiators
The packing type depends on:

Radiators are packed in crates.
Dimension/
Weight
constraints
during
transportation and handling
Customer specification
Legal obligations concerning mode of transport
The parts/accessories detached from main unit
assembly for transportation are listed in the
Outline drawing. These are transported separately
in suitable crates.
Preserve packing lists enclosed
package to facilitate onsite check.
3.1.2
with
each
Packaging of Transformer
The transformer body is not packed (unless

otherwise specified). Shock recorders are
provided if specified.
Bushings mounted on transformer during dispatch
are guarded with transport hoods made of
steel/wood. Valves fitted on main units are to be
properly locked and protected by providing valve
guards.
All dismounted parts are packed separately (see
below).
3.1.3
Condenser bushings
3.1.6
Fabricated Items
All fabricated items like headers, cooler pipes,

conservators, cable boxes etc are packed in
wooden cases..
3.1.7
Control Cabinets
RTCC, Marshalling box and Thermo-Junction

box are individually covered and packed in
wooden case. Sometimes Marshalling box and
Thermo Junction box may be mounted on the
main unit.
3.1.8
Instruments
Instruments line Winding Temperature Indicator,

Oil Temperature Indicator, Dissolved Gas
Analyzer and relays etc are individually covered
and packed in wooden case
3.1.9
Marking
For ease of identification, fabricated items are

punched marked.
a) Work Order Number (W.O. No.)
b) Serial Number
c) Item Number
Condenser bushings are packed in wooden

crates, as per the OEM instruction.
3.1.4
Oil
Oil filled Dispatch: Oil is transported filled in the

transformer tank. Oil is filled to fully cover the
core and winding assembly..
Dry Air Filled Dispatch: Oil is packed in sealeddrums of standard size.

======================================================================
3.2
Transport & Handling
3.2.3
3.2.1
Overview
Transformer is transported to loading railway

station either by a rail network or road tractortrailers. Rollers of transformer are removed
before leaving works.
In many cases, a transformer has to travel long

distances before reaching its final destination.
During this journey many handling operations are
needed for loading, transportation, unloading and
transfer to other carrier types. All necessary
precautions need to be taken during transit to
assure safe handling of the transformer.
Transformers may be transported by road/ rail/
sea depending on size of transformer, destination,
delivery time and the route limitations. Detached
parts are packed/crated and normally dispatched
along with the main body of the unit, so that all the
parts are received at the destination station with
the unit.
3.2.4
Rail Transport
Water Transport
Ocean going ships for high seas and barges for

inland navigation routes are used for water
transportation. Special care is to be taken for
prevention of rusting of parts and ingress of
moisture like use of anti corrosive paints, silica
gel packing, and sealing using polythene covers
etc.
3.2.5
Loading
3.2.5.1 Lifting and Jacking

During transportation, make sure that the
Transformer body is blocked and secured on all
sides. This should be done to prevent the
Transformer body from shifting its position.
3.2.2
Road Transport
Transport by road necessitates availability of good

condition roads and route permit.
Route survey to cover following aspects is to be
done:
Width of road: Adequacy of passage at all
places.
(ii) Bridges and Culverts: Adequacy to take the
moving load.
(iii) Encumbrances En-route: Presence of
telephone, telegraph, traction and electric
utility wires, subways etc across the roadway
(iv) Sharp bends
(v) Road Worthiness: Check for road condition,
locality, presence of schools and other public
places
(vi) Operational Constraints: Of Tractor-trailor
Before lifting the complete transformer it should

be ensured that all cover bolts are tightened.
Use lifting points provided on the tank for the
purpose of lifting. Simultaneous use should be
made of all such lugs or lifting bollards in order
to avoid any unbalance in lifting. It is advisable
to use a spreader between slings so that the lift
on the hooks is in the vertical direction. The
slinging angle is not to exceed 60. Safe loads of
wire ropes and the multiplying factors to be used
corresponding to the lifting angles are furnished
in
(i)
Necessary clearance from local authorities, for

movement shall be ensured.
Fig. 1.
When using jacking for lifting, only the Jacking
pads provided for the purpose of jacking should
be used. Jacks are also not to be left in position
with load for a long time.
The transformer should always be handled in
the normal upright position. During the handling
operation care must be taken to prevent
overturning or uneven tilting.
3.2.5.2 Lashing
The transformer is lashed on all four sides by
wire ropes or chain of adequate size and
Tightened using turn buckles with locking facility.
Tightness of lashing is to be checked after short
movement.

======================================================================
3.2.6
Shipping Documents
Contents, route, destination of each shipment,

invoices of shipment, bills of loading etc and
packing list accompanies the shipment.

======================================================================
3.3
Receiving Main Unit and

Accessories
3.3.1
Checking Shipping and Consignment

Documents
On receiving the transformer unit, check the

consignment against packing list enclosed. Also
ensure all consignment documents including
various bills etc are in order before proceeding
further.
3.3.2
Unpacking and Inspection
A thorough external examination shall be made

immediately on arrival of the transformer at site. If
any damage is suspected, open delivery is to be
taken and a claim made against the carriers in
accordance with the terms of contract. The
manufacturers and under-writers are also to be
informed about the details of inspection done
jointly in carriers.
Packages are to be opened carefully so that the
tools used for opening do not cause damage to
the contents.
3.3.2.1 External Inspection
1) Preliminary Inspection: Check for signs of
damage on the exterior like damage to blocking,
impact on covers, paint scraping etc.
The gas pressure varies in proportion to gas

temperature. Check the gas pressure upon arrival
against gas pressure and temperature at the time
of dispatch. Consult Manufacturer in case Main
tank received with zero pressure.
When the transformer is dispatched filled with oil,
oil level in main tank at the time of receipt is to be
verified visually through the dispatch oil gauge on
the tank. Any shortage, theft or damage is to be
duly recorded and reported to Carrier,
Underwriters and manufacturer.
3.3.2.2 Inspection of Accessories
Refer Packing list and check off each inspected
accessory. Below checks important:
1) Oil Drums: Drums containing transformer oil,
which have been dispatched separately, shall be
examined carefully for leaks. All drums are
dispatched filled up to their capacity and any
shortage should be reported.
2)
Bushings: Oil level shall be checked (in
Condenser bushings). The porcelain portion is to
be checked for any crack or chipping. The
terminals should be checked for any bends.
3) Instruments: Fragile instruments like oil
level gauge, temperature indicators, etc. are to
be inspected for breakage or other damages.
2) Check of Impact Recorder

An Impact recorder is installed if specified. The
impact recorder shall be returned to the
Manufacturer. Please refer the outline drawing for
the locations
Type of Impact
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Levels of Acceleration
2g
2g
1.5g
Any shortage, theft or damage is to be duly

recorded and reported to Carrier, Underwriters
and manufacturer..
3.3.3
Standard Receiving Tests
1) Core Grounding Megger test

Refer Section 5.4.4.2 The Core Frame and Tank
Isolation should be verified upon receiving.
The Manufacturer shall be consulted in case the

acceleration is exceeding the above limits.
3) Check of Gas Pressure/ Oil leak
Inspect the dry air pressure system (if given).

======================================================================
3.4. Storage of main unit and accessories
3.4.1 Overview
In case when the transformer is not immediately
commissioned, ensure below guidelines for
storage:
Storage area should be adequate and should
be easily accessible for inspection.
The surface on which it is to be stored is
strong and leveled.
Surrounding area of storage place is not
polluted and water does not accumulate
in/around this area.
3.4.2
Storage of Transformer
The preferred method of storage is to store

transformer under oil with all the accessories fully
installed. Heaters in the control cabinet should be
connected to a power supply and energized to
prevent condensation.
The transformer main tank may be stored in Dry
air for storage till six months. Storage in oil is
advised for storage above to six months.
While in storage, the gas pressure, oil samples,
breather condition are to be checked frequently.
Wherever feasible, the transformer should be
fully assembled; vacuum filled with oil and made
operation ready in case of storage is exceeding
six months.
3.4.3
Storage of Accessories
After receiving the accessories at site those

should be inspected and kept ready for
immediate erection. If erection work is not to
be done immediately then those accessories
should be repacked into their own crates properly
and packing list should be retained.
All packings should be kept above ground by
suitable supports so as to allow free air flow
underneath. The storage space area should be
such that it is accessible for inspection, water
does not collect on or around the area and
handling/transport would be easy.
Also note the following points:
Equipment meant for indoor use, such as

control panels should be stored indoor
All fragile material should be stored in a
closed room.
All openings should be blanked off with
suitable blanking plates.
Crate should be positioned as per markings
on the crate.
Do not stack crates one along the other
except those for radiators. However, for
radiators also maximum three crates could be
stacked.
Heaters for Control Cabinets, etc., shall be
kept energized.
Refer specific storage instructions given in
respective leaflets for accessories. Those
should be strictly followed.
Refer Table-A for further details.
3.4.4 Storage of Oil Drums,if applicable
Store drums containing oil either in a shed or

covered with tarpaulin.
The drums must be stored in a place free
from fire and explosion hazards.
Keep bungs tight. Protect the drums from
weather and contact with water.
Drums should not be stored standing on ends.
Store drums horizontally with bungs at 45

deg. This will ensure that bungs are under
a positive oil pressure
3.4.5 Periodic Inspection during Storage
During storage period the main unit and
accessories
should be
inspected
regularly
as specified in Table-A.
Observations, readings and dates should
be noted in separate register. In case a
fault or abnormality is observed, CGL
should be contacted. Check at regular
intervals especially
when weather
changes such as heavy rains storm etc..
Carry out periodic inspection for possible
external fault/ damage rusting or leakages
of main unit and accessories periodically.
Condition of silica-gel on oil filled unit

======================================================================
should
be
inspected
periodically.
Oil
samples and should be tested periodically.
TABLE-A
Instructions for Storage of Accessories and Inspection During Storage
Sr.
Accessories
No.
1.
All condenser
bushings
Storage
Storage
Position
Location
Into their
Protected from
own crates Rain
Precaution
Cover with
Tarpaulin
Special
Instruction
Refer
Manual for
Bushings
Inspection
Checks
Physical
damage
2.
Porcelain bushings
and Pin/Post
insulation
-do-
-do-
3.
Radiators
-do-
-do-
4.
Conservator (COPS)
-do-
-do-
Into their
own
crates
Protected from
Rain
Space
heater
should be
connected
to electric
supply to
be kept ON.
Space
heaters
ON. Should
be free of
dust and
condensati
on
-do-
-do-
5.
TJ box, Marshalling
box (if supplied loose)
and RTCC panel
6.
OLTC Drive
Mechanism (if
supplied loose)
-do-
-do-
7.
Buchholz Relay, MOG,

Breather, Pressure
relief device, Valves,
Hardware items paint,
Oil operated relays,
small brackets.
Clamps, pipes for bleed
valves and other small
items.
-do-
-do-
Physical
damage
All
openings
must be
blanked off
Damage
and rust
Damage
and rust
Refer
respective
Instruction
Manual

======================================================================
Sr.
Accessories
No.
8.
Pipe work
Storage
Position
Uncrated
Storage
Location
Protected from
Rain
9.
Fan assembly & Pumps
-do-
-do-
10.
-do-
-do-
11.
Air insulated cable

boxes/ disconnection
chambers
Gaskets
12.
Oil drums
In its own
crate
Precaution
Special
Instruction
-do-
Inspection
Checks
Physical
damage
Refer
respective
Instruction
Manual
Physical
damage
Into a closed
room
Store in stress
free condition.
Do not fold.
Do not roll
Physical
damage
No crates
Oil leakage
Physical
damage
GRA PH SH O W IN G V A RIA T IO N O F PRESSU RE V / S

T EM PERA T U RE O F GA S FO R GA S FILLED U N IT
D U RIN G T RA N SPO RT O R ST O RA GE
lb/ in2
0.35
Gauge Pressure kG/CM
5
4.5
A2
0.3
4
3.5
3
0.25
0.2
P E R M IS S IB L E
RANGE
A1
2.5
2
1.5
0.15
0.1
1
0.05
0.5
0
- 0.05
- 30
- 20
- 10
10
20
30
40
50
TEMPERATURE IN C.
E X A M P LE :
F O R 40 C
TEMPERATURE
(D E P E N D IN G U P O N
THE PRESSURE OF
G A S A T T H E TIM E O F
F IL LIN G
---M IN IM U M
P R E SS U R E O F G A S
2
C A N BE 0.18 5K G /C M
A T P O IN T A 1.
M AX IM U M
P R E SS U R E O F G A S
2
C A N BE 0.32 KG /C M
A T P O IN T A 2.

======================================================================
STORAGE OF OIL DRUMS, IF APPLICABLE
AIR RELEASE HOLE
45
OIL DRUMS
OIL FILTER HOLE
FLOOR
3.5
Safety measures during transport,

handling and storage
Safety measures/precautions should be given the

due importance during transport/ handling/
inspection/ storage. Any mishap during the
process will result in delay in erection,
endangering human life, endangering equipment
life.
Ensure that the transformer is evacuated and

purged with breathable air. Ensure minimum
25% oxygen level in air before allowing
personnel entry. Continuously purge dry air
through the tank.
Follow warning and precautions stated on
accessories
Earth the transformer tank for the period of
mounting works
Before entering the tank, make sure there is
air inside. Also take appropriate measures to
secure air during work.
When transporting or carrying the tank, use
equipment corresponding to the lifting weight.
When lifting parts, lift them leveled. Attach

guide ropes so that they do not hit
surrounding objects.
Never leave the secondary circuit of Current
Transformer open.
When connecting conductive parts inside the
transformer, tighten them with specified
torque.
Do not loosen bolts that maintain oil
tightness.
Do not leave tools/ screws etc inside the tank
Close the inspection holes and other
openings immediately after work inside the
transformer finishes preventing moisture
ingress.

SECTION 4
Assembling & Installation

4.1
Installation equipment & tools

1)
1/2 Nos. mobile crane having a free vertical lift suitable for lifting HV bushing and
lifting capacity 3 tones each.
2)
Steel/Manila/Nylon ropes and D shackles for lifting 3 tones weight.
3)
Filter machine of capacity 6000 liters per hour or more in excellent working condition. It
must be capable of heating transformer oil upto 80C (heating should be indirect) and
must be equipped with in-built high vacuum degassing chamber filter elements. The
following accessories should also be provided.
a) Non-collapsible hose
nipples/adapters.
pipes
of
adequate
length
and
size
provided
with
Hose pipes should be of oil resistant material, natural rubber should not be used.
4)
b) 3 Nos. flanges each of sizes 25, 50 & 80 mm pipe suitably threaded for connecting
the hose pipes and provided with holes for fastening on main unit valves.
c) The incoming electricity supply capacity must be adequate to operate the
machine with all its heaters ON.
Vacuum pump of capacity 1500-2500 LPM with booster of 60-900 cub-m/hour and
-3
capable of an ultimate vacuum of 1 x 10 milli-bar, along with the following accessories :
a) Non-collapsible hoses with suitable flanges for connecting to main tank.
b) Condenser for condensation of moisture.
c) MacLeod gauge for measuring up to 10
vacuum pump.
-3
milli-bar vacuum to confirm efficiency of
5)
Storage tank for transformer oil of adequate capacity provided with 50 mm bottom draincum-filter valve and another 50 mm top valve. The tank should have an air tight
inspection cover at the top and must be provided with a breather and oil level sight
windows. Tank must be painted with oil resistant paint from inside and must be cleaned
thoroughly before storing the oil. Capacity of the storage tank should be equal to the
total oil quantity of complete unit.
6)
Tarpaulin for covering main unit during filtration.
7)
Adequate number of aluminum trays for salvaging oil leakages while connection of pipes.
8)
2 complete sets of fixed ended spanners metric sizes 4-36.
9)
2 complete sets of ring ended spanners metric sizes 4 to 36.
10) 1 complete set of Allen keys.

11) Set of screw drivers, centering tummies, flat ended tummies, pipe wrenches, pliers,
hammers, ladders, hole punches and other tools normally required for such work.
12) 6 mm thk 3 ply nylon ropes of 15 meters length.
13) Oil test set in good working condition having 2.5 mm gauges for adjusting the sphere
gap.
14) 2.5/5 kV megger, preferably motor driven and capable of reading up to 50,000 meg.
ohms.
15) 500 volt megger, hand driven, capable of reading up to at least 50 meg. ohms. OR
digital testers with adjustable voltage
16) 2 Nos. multimeters, preferably digital type having the following ranges :
AC voltage:0 - 2.5, 0 - 25, 0 - 100, 0 - 250, & 0 - 1000
AC current:0 - 100 mA, 0 - 1A, 0 - 10A
17) Single/3 phase supply with DP ICTPN switches.
18) 2.5 mm single core copper leads (approximately 30 meters).
19) 3 litres of Surface cleaning agent..
20) Muslin cloth and waste cloth in sufficient quantities, as may be required at site.
21) Hot air blower for drying porcelain bushings.
22) Vacuum Hose pipes for oil connections should be of oil resistant material. Natural rubber
should not be used. Should withstand full vacuum. Necessary adapters for connecting
to filter machine outlet; filter m/c inlet, filter valves on main unit, Buchholz relay pipe,
oil filling pipe on conservator etc.
23) Instruments for checking humidity
24) Adequate length of 10 mm I/D PVC pipe suitable for vacuum with suitable adapters
for connecting this pipe to std. 25 mm or 50 mm flanged valves.
25) Pulling winches/pulleys
26) Steel ropes
27) Steel plates
28) Grease
29) Wooden sleepers.

30) Hydraulic/mechanical screw jacks with locking arrangement capacity of each should
be minimum 50% of the total weight of main unit with oil.
31) Power pack system to operate all the jacks simultaneously.
32) Measure tapes.
33) Level bottle/Level tube (plastic).
34) Stainless steel bottles for oil samples.
35) Dry Air generator or cylinders with regulator and pressure gauges.
36) Welding machine (for attending damages of Fabricated parts if required.)
37) Gas cylinders with nozzles. Torch for gas cutting ox Acetele (for attending damages of
Fabricated parts if required.)
38) Pressure/vacuum equalization pipes and valves
39) Adapters :
80 mm to 25 mm - 3 nos. each
40) Valves: 25 mm flanged type with position indicators and locking devices.
50 mm flanged type with position indicators and locking devices.
41) Adapters suitable for valve and pressure gauge.
42) Bushing lifting equipments as specified in the instructions on bushings.
43) Capsule vacuum gauge range 0-50 mbar with least count of 1 mbar.
44) Tube: 5I/D transparent tube to use as oil gauge shall be capable of withstanding full
vacuum.

4.2 General installation topics
center bolt may also be provided to easily turn the

rollers by 900 on itself). The wheels are quite
heavy. Therefore, the smaller the distance they
have to be lifted, the easier the installation will be.
Although power transformers are designed and

manufactured to National or International Standards,
every transformer ends up being designed for a
specific site, as well as for a specific electrical
network. Hence they usually are of a completely
unique design. For this reason, every transformer
installation is a unique event as well.
Once the wheels have been attached, use the

jacks to raise the transformer just enough to
remove the blocking.
People involved in the installation have to study the

specific design and have to use their experience
alongwith this Operation and Maintenance (O&M)
manual for the installation.
The transformer may be now rolled into position.
A well-prepared installation is the first condition to

make it a successful event. Furthermore the
installation of a transformer requires specialized
equipment as well as services. These services may
be sourced internal in your organization or may be
sourced from the service department of CGL.
Accurate scheduling is required in order to make
efficient use of these sources. We assume in below
text that the transformer is correctly positioned on its
foundation according to the instructions in the
previous chapter and that all necessary transformer
components and accessories are available for
installation.
4.3 locating transformer on a plinth
The instructions below are meant as a guideline to
position a transformer on plinth and its accessories
safely and with a minimum of risk for damages.
4.3.1 Moving a transformer on wheels
Transformers supplied with wheels can be moved in
directions at right angles to the tank base. Usually
these movements are executed on ground level on
special tracks
Assembling the wheels:
Jack up the transformer.Raise the transformer the
height required just to install the rollers. Block the
transformer with suitable timbers or support blocks
(for safety purposes) placed near the jacking steps
under the lateral skids or stiffeners.
Attach the wheels to the mounting pads located
under the tank using the necessary four bolts (a
Gently lower the transformer until it is resting on

the rollers.
Moving at right angles

Place a jack under each of the jacking steps, and
ensure that the surface under the jacks is solid
and suitable for the weight to be lifted. Raise the
transformer the height required just to clear the
rollers above the ground. Block both ends of the
transformer by placing suitable timbers or support
blocks (for safety purposes) placed near the
jacking steps under the lateral skids or stiffeners.
Unbolt each roller and turn 90deg. Bolt each roller
into the new position using all available bolts.
Raise the transformer slightly, and remove the
blocking.
Lower the transformer gently until it is resting on
the rollers.
The transformer may now be moved in the new
direction.
To remove the wheels, Follow the guidelines to
assemble the wheels in opposite order.
4.3.2 Moving a transformer on steel rods
A transformer is moved by "skidding" whenever
lifting and moving by crane is impossible or
unpractical. Transformers with a skid base are made
to be skidded in directions at right angles to the tank
base using steel rods. Transformers with a flat base
can be moved in any direction.
The estimated force to start horizontal movement is
15-20% of the weight to be moved.

Steel rods must all be the same diameter, evenly

and closely spaced. Refer to the table below for the
minimum required number of rods in relation to the
weight being moved.
Use at least three sets of rods side by side. The
rods must be of sufficient width to suit the
transformer being moved. Do not use a single row
or two rows of rods.
Rods are preferably iron-pipe profiles, double extra
strong IPS pipe.
If rods are to be used with timbers, the timbers
must be steel faced. Each set of rods must have
its own set of timbers.
Ensure that the supporting surfaces are firm

enough to support the weight of the
transformer
Assemble the necessary tools (such as

jacks, "tow and drag" winches etc...),
support blocks, rods, greased turning plates
or greased skids etc, required for all
events of the movement.
Connect appropriately sized cables to the haulage

eyes located near the transformer base. Only pull a
transformer by the correct attachment points.
Haulage eyes are mentioned on the general
arrangement drawing. Utilize a spreader bar if
required to limit the strain on the haulage eyes.
Raise the transformer using four hydraulic jacks.
Place the rods on the steel faced timber (or on the
rails in the event of using a transfer cart with
embedded rails) and roll them under the
transformer. The longitudinal skid members serve as
stops for positioning the rollers. When all of the
rollers are in place, carefully lower the transformer
onto them.
Move the transformer into the next position.
Table NO.
Minimum number of rods required

per set under the transformer
Remarks:
The table above assumes the use of 3 300 mm
(3 - 12 inch) wide steel faced timbers
The table above gives the number of rods per set
under the transformer.
Different steps in moving a transformer on steel
rods:
The first step is to prepare the route for moving the
transformer:
The truck bed, the railcar deck or the
transfer car bed must be jacked up and
blocked so that it is level and firm.
Once the transformer is situated on its foundation:

Remove the haulage cables.
Jack the transformer to remove timbers
and/or rollers from under the transformer.
Set the transformer onto its foundation.
4.4 Recommended steps for assembling &
installation
Below sequence is recommended during installation
and energization of transformer though the steps
followed depend on the situation and are different
from case to case.
1. Installation and preparation of the transformer
tank
2. Inspection of availability of all parts and
equipment
3. Installation of main accessories:-Conservator,
radiators, pipes, pumps, bushing turrets and
bushings. When all metal parts have been
installed the risk for damaging bushings while
installing these parts is minimized.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Cable boxes
Oil treatment (if necessary)
Vacuum processing and initial oil filling
Topping up the oil
Installation of remaining accessories: fans,
measurement devices, control cabinets, wiring
on the transformer. When the transformer has
been completely filled there is no more risk to
spill any oil on electrical accessories.
9. Pre-operational tests and checks.
4.5 Installation of transformer main unit
Once transformer has been located on the plinth,
ground the transformer tank before proceeding for
the installation of accessories.
To install certain accessories, the transformer tank
will have to be opened. Depending on the specific
shipping or storage conditions:
Oil has to be (partially) drained and the removed
oil has to be stored in dry and clean containers.
I nert gas has to be replaced with breathable dry
gas.
Try to open only one manhole or hand hole at a
time to prevent cross breathing of the tank (which
lets in moisture) while opening a transformer. OR
Open two covers and pass dry air through the
transformer.
Do not open a transformer if bad weather
threatens, and try not to open the tank during
periods of high humidity. Temporary weather
shields may be necessary as a last resort.
Besides following the above measures, always
limit the exposure time of core and windings to 24
hours. This is the total allowable time the active
part may be exposed to atmospheric conditions. If
exposure time exceeds 24 hours, the vacuum
pulling process has to be extended.
4.6 Installation of radiators
Every transformer uses custom designed radiator
assemblies to provide proper cooling for the specific
design.
The transformer might be shipped:
completely assembled including radiators: no

special installation or filling is required
when partially filled with oil: the radiators have to be
filled with oil by the transformer tank one by one.
Note that small amounts of oil may leak out of
closed throttle valves, make sure that an oil can is
placed underneath the throttle valves. Connect the
radiators as soon as possible.
with an inert gas and without any oil: the radiators
should be filled during the vacuum filling process of
the main tank.
Refer Figure 4.1 for radiator assembly.
In case, there are separately mounted radiators,
please refer OGA drawing to find out the location of
A frame on which radiators are to be mounted.
4.7 Installation of cooling fans
If the transformer has air cooling then, cooling fans
are mounted once the radiators are installed.
Please note that if unit coolers are used, then the
main unit does not have radiators nor any fans.
There is one consolidated unit of radiator fins and
fans called unit cooler. Each unit cooler has pumps
to be mounted separately
So, if main unit has unit coolers, then radiators, fans
and pumps are not mounted but unit coolers are
installed directly on the unit. In this case, please
refer OGA drawing to ascertain the location of the
unit coolers.
Cooling fans are used where additional forced air
capacities or up ratings have been specified. Their
operation is automatically controlled by temperature
measurement devices (manual control is possible).
When the oil temperature or winding temperature
reaches the temperature setting, it switches the fans
on.
The fan units are usually attached to the radiators,
but may sometimes be mounted on brackets affixed
to the main tank. We refer to the General
Arrangement drawing for more details on the
amount of fans used, the type and mounting
positions

4.7.1 Mounting instructions

1. Unpack the fans and check them for damage.
2. Mechanically mount the fans on the radiators or
on the brackets. If anti-vibration pads are used,
careful stress-free mounting is required to prevent
overstressing during operation.
3. Connect the fans to a temporary power supply
and check for abnormal vibration.
4. Wire or plug the fans into the appropriate junction
box and check for the right air flow. Correct direction
of fan rotation is given with an arrow on the fan
housing.
5. Remove drain plugs from the holes in the fan
motors to allow condensation to escape.
A typical fan mounting arrangement is shown in
Figure 4.2
4.8 Installation of bushing turrets
Due to shipping size restrictions, it may have been
necessary to remove the bushing turrets from the
transformer
during
transportation.
These
compartments are dismantled as an assembly and
blind flanged. If there are CTs in the turrets the
same are to be inspected to ensure free of damage
before installation of turret.
For transformers shipped without oil it is important to
open only a minimum number of compartments on
the transformer at the same time in order to
minimize exposure time of core and windings.
Therefore remove blanking plates one by one and
install one bushing turret at a time.
4.9 Installation of condenser bushings
Condenser type bushings incorporate a capacitive
voltage grading system to carefully control the
electric field inside the bushing. This allows a
minimum partial discharge design that is very
important in many applications, especially when
voltage ratings increase. Most condenser bushings
are oil-filled and the internal parts are oil
impregnated. Condenser bushings often incorporate
a capacitive tap, where the final capacitive foil (the
ground layer) is brought out through a special test
tap. This test tap may be used for monitoring
purposes as well as for testing the bushing. The test
tap must be directly grounded or fixed to the ground

over the monitoring device
Before proceeding with the installation of bushing,
please keep the bushing drawing handy.
Check the General Arrangement drawing to find out
Which bushing type is used. Also find out how the
lead connection is to be made. This is different for
different bushings. The connection for draw-lead
type bushing differs from that of draw-rod type of
bushing.
Some of the bushings may come with a corona
shield that is usually manufactured from spun
aluminum and is quite delicate. The shield must not
be bended. The coronal shields are usually shipped
separate from the bushings, in well-padded
packaging. Ensure that the shield is properly
attached to the bushing and all mounting bolts are
tightened prior to installing the bushing.
For mounting purposes, please follow the steps as
listed below:
1. Unpack the bushing keeping it tilted with the top
side higher than the bottom side to avoid air bubbles
penetrating the insulation at the bottom.
2. Check the bushing carefully (for oil leaks as well).
Check the center tube and remove the plastic
sealing plugs if present.
3. Remove the outer terminal cap on the top of the
bushing.
4. Clean the porcelain using clean rags.
5. If the terminals are dirty, clean them with clean,
dry rags..
6. Remove the blind flange on the transformer tank
(cover), pull out the draw lead and check for
damage, remove the shipping gasket and clean the
gasket surface.
7. Sling the bushing at the correct angle according
to Figure 4.3
9. Attach a strong cord or wire to the terminal stud
and pull it through the central tube of the bushing.
10. Slowly draw the draw lead cable in the bushing
while the bushing is placed into position. Fix the
bushing flange into position and mount the upper
terminal stud and cap (refer to the specific
documentation for the bushing).

11. Tighten the top terminal arrangement and the

flange bolts with the correct torque according to
the specific documentation.
12. Ground the bushing for personnel safety as well
as to ensure that the transformer will not be
damaged due to lightning.
4.12 Installation of current transformers

Turret mounted current transformers are installed
along with the installation of bushings and turrets.
However, for the CT details refer the Rating and
Diagram Plate Drawing..
4.10 Installation of other bushings

These bushings are low-voltage bushings are
normally of oil communicating type.
In case of outdoor current transformer, kindly consult

appropriate drawing to understand the arrangement.
4.13
If the transformer main unit is already pre-installed

with the bushing, just check the bushing physically
for any damages in the transit.
Otherwise, follow the same steps to mount the
bushings in similar fashion.
4.11 Installation of conservator and pipes
1. Unpack all components, check them and clean all
gasket surfaces.
2. Mount the conservator support(s).
3. Mount the conservator on its supports (bolts are
not to be tightened at this time).
4. Mount the oil pipes on the cover, including new
gaskets (bolts are not to be tightened at this time):
The oil connection between tank and conservator.
The oil connection between bushing turrets and
the oil pipe (if any).
The oil connection between the tap changer head
and its conservator.
5. Mount the vertical oil pipes and their components
including new gaskets (bolts are not to be tightened
at this time):
The oil drain valve(s) (LTC and main conservator).
The pipe to the silica gel breather and the
breather itself.
If all components are in place, tighten the bolts on
the pipe connections in the same sequence as you
have mounted them. Then tighten the bolts on the
conservator support(s).
If the oil (vacuum) filling process cannot follow
immediately, insert dry air or nitrogen (dew point < 510C) into the transformer and keep a slight positive
pressure ( 0.2 bar) to prevent moisture ingress.
Refer Figure 4.4 before installation of Conservator
& pipes.
Wiring on the transformer
The wiring on the transformer is always completed

and checked during assembly in the factory.
However, the connection between transformer and
remote control cabinets is only made as a temporary
base for testing.
During disassembly for shipment of the transformer,
some parts with an electrical connection must be
disconnected. This will result in free cable-ends (or
free plug-ends) that can be situated on the
dismantled part or on the transformer. Free cable
ends will be coiled and protected by plastic bags or
another protection and tied to the transformer tank
or assemblies. The wires of free cable-ends are
marked with the same terminal number as the
terminal to which they have to be connected during
the final wiring on site.
Current transformer circuits have been shortcircuited before and during transportation for safety
purposes.
This short circuit wire has to be removed at the time
of final wiring and/or testing.
4.13.1 Mounting instructions
After mechanical installation of the parts that are to
be electrically connected:
1. Remove the protection on the cable-end and
check the wire marking with the wiring diagram.
2. Clean wire ends (and contact-pins of cable plugs,
if any).
3. Fix the cable in the cable channel.
4. Introduce the cable into the cable gland.
5. Check with the wiring diagram.
6. Connect the wires to the right terminal.
7. Tighten the cable gland.

Once again, make sure that the right connection has

been established.
4.14 Installation of other items
Usage:
Prior to replacing a cover of an inspection opening,
the gasket should be examined to make certain that
it has not been damaged and that it has sufficient
thickness to reseal the joint.
4.14.1 Gaskets for Liquid Filled Transformers:

4.14.2 Breather installation
The gaskets used on our liquid filled transformers
are flat Synthetic Resin Bonded Cork or Flat Nitrile
or Nitrile O rings. All are suitable for sealing oil,
water and gases.
Gaskets are of two types, retained and non retained.
The retained gasket is preferred for cantilever loads
and where dimensional tolerances must be held.
The gasket stop assures the correct compression of
the gasket, the proper dimensional positioning of the
mating parts and a uniform pressure over the entire
surface of the gaskets.
Non-retained or flat gaskets are normally full width
gaskets with the bolting holes equal distance from
the edges of the gasket. Non-retained gaskets
should
be
uniformly
compressed.
The
recommended compression for the various gasket
materials is:
Synthetic Resin Bonded Cork
43% Compression,
Nitrile Rubber 33% Compression
Gasket Installation:
The gasket surfaces must be thoroughly clean.
Remove all oil grease, varnish, old gasket cement,
dust and dirt by scraping surface and wiping out with
a cloth wetted with a solvent. Cut the gasket to
conform to the surfaces to be sealed. If the gasket
is not a one piece gasket, scarf the ends of the
gasket so that the length of the overlap will be equal
to four times the thickness of the gasket material.
The mitering should be done with a fine toothed saw
and a miter box to assure a clean uniform cut and to
obtain full gasket thickness at the lap joint. Dovetail
joints may have been used at the factory. A special
tool is required to make this joint. A scarf joint may
be used if this tool is not available.
O Rings:
Breathers are dispatched loose. Assemble them as

shown in Outline drawing. Check oil seal if
necessary fill oil up to the level marked in oil cup.
Also ensure breathing hole in oil cup is not
obstructed. Check color of silica gel.
Color (when dry) is BLUE,
changes to PINK (with moisture)
OR
Color (When dry) is ORANGE,
changes to COLORLESS (with moisture)
4.14.3 OTI and WTI
The Bulbs of these Instruments should be fitted on
thermometer pockets welded to cover or on main oil
outlet pipes of tank top. Before mounting the bulbs,
thermometer pockets must be cleaned from inside
and transformer oil must be filled up to half depth of
the pocket.
Precaution should be taken so that capillary tubing
is not damaged, pulled or stressed for routing and
supporting the capillary tube.
Oil must be filled into all thermometer/RTD pockets
wherever those are specified.
4.14.4 PRD
Pressure Relief Device (PRD):
a) Mount PRD as per leaflet of PRD and as shown in
Outline drawing.
b) Check contact operation
4.14.5 Plate valves and their assemblies
Radiator isolating valves are plate type.
valves to tank as per Figure 4.5
Fix these
Clean the groove and then apply a very small

amount of Grease at the top of the groove, before
applying the O ring.
10

the vacuum and calculate the leak rate as per

formula given below:
4.15 Oil filling procedure

i) Erection Sequence:
Complete all erection work except those requiring
opening of Main Unit. Radiators and Conservator
mounting should be completed.
Change in pressure (millibar)

Leak rate = ---------------------------------------- x Vol.ltrs.
Time in seconds
The leak rate observed at various points of time
should not exceed the limits given below:
ii) Planning & arranging facilities:

Time in Hours
Make all necessary arrangements for oil filtration,
evacuation, etc. so that once the bushings erection
is completed, evacuation and oil filling will follow
immediately.
iii)
Controlling exposure:
Erect the bushings and complete the main Buscholz

relay piping. Transformer exposure time should not
exceed 12 hrs. It is advisable to start erection early
in the morning on a day when rain is not forecast. It
is good practice to inject dry air through one of the
opening in order to reduce ingress of ambient air
during installation.
iv) Immediate evacuation:
Drain oil to the level required for erection of
bushings. As soon as bushing erection is complete,
start evacuating the main unit. For this, it is
necessary to keep the vacuum pump connected to
the main unit in advance. Also, the efficiency of the
vacuum pump should
be
checked in advance
and necessary maintenance carried out before the
bushing erection.
Ensure Main tank and OLTC chamber are
equalized prior to application of vacuum.
v) Concentrate on potential leak points:
There is a possibility of excess leakage of air
through the various gasketted joints, through
the drain plug/air release plug of radiators,
the bushing air release plug and cap.
vi) Ascertaining Leak rate under vacuum:
Create vacuum of 70 millibar inside the tank
and hold the vacuum by shutting the valve
between tank and vacuum hose. Note down
-------------------
Allowable Leak Rate

MBAR Liter/Sec
--------------------------
After 1st hour
100
End of 3rd hour to end of 4th hr
75
End of 7th hour to end of 8th hr
50
End of 11th hour to end of 12th hr
25
If the leak rate is high, it indicates that there is

excessive leakage. Then all gasketted joints should
be attended to.
As soon as 25 millibar-litre/second leak rate is
achieved,
pull vacuum further to achieve 1.3
millibar or less.
vii)
Oil filling up to tank oil level gauge:
Transformer shall be filled under 1.3 mbar vacuum

with purified and degassed oil through top filter valve
up to tank oil level gauge. Estimate time required
for oil filling to enable reduce the oil filling rate in last
half hour. The oil filling rate shall be less than 6
kilolitres per hour.
The temperature at the filter outlet shall be
maintained below 65C. As soon as oil level mark
on tank oil gauge is reached, close top filter valve,
switch off vacuum pump and break vacuum
through breather by opening the valve. Refer
Figure 4.6
viii)
Hot oil circulation:
Connect bottom filter valve of tank to inlet point of

filter machine. Connect top filter valve of tank to
outlet of vacuum filter machine and start oil
circulation. The filter outlet temperature should be
limited to 65C. Continue filtration for two passes.
Refer Figure 4.7
11

Drain out oil as quickly as possible after oil

circulation, if possible, use a pump to avoid
excessive drop in temperature of the transformer.
ix)
Creating vacuum and maintaining:
Refer Figure 4.6 Pull vacuum 1.3 mbar or less.

Maintain 1.3 millibar or less vacuum as given
below :
System voltage
-------------------
Duration in hours
----------------------
Upto and including 145 kV
24
Above 145 kV & including 245 kV
24
Above 245 kV & including 420 kV
36
x)
Oil filling under vacuum:
Fill oil upto tank oil level gauge as described in

(viii.).
Measure dielectric absorption factor using 1 or 2 kV
meggar and/or tan delta as given below:
Resistance at 60 seconds
Dielectric absorption factor = -----------------------------Resistance at 10 seconds
Above value shall be at least 1.3. or
Measure tan delta using 30 volts source.
Tan delta shall be max. 0.5 % at 20C.
If the temperature at the time of measurement is
higher than 20C then extrapolate the value.
If the above values are not within limits, repeat
hot oil circulation vacuum and oil filling as above.
xi)
Oil filtration :
(After oil filling operation) :

Carry out oil filtration as given in (viii.) (Hot oil
circulation) for two passes. Take oil sample. Check
BDV and water content.
Electric strength:
BDV kV (Min)
Upto 145 kV (rms)

Above 145 kV transformer (rms)
50 kV
60 kV
Water Content ppm (max) :

Upto 72.5 kV
72.5 kV upto 145 kV
Above 145 kV transformer
25 ppm
20 ppm
15 ppm
If BDV of oil sample is equal to or greater than the

above value and water content is equal to or less
than the above value, then the oil sample is O.K.
otherwise carry out filtration for two more passes.
Check again oil sample. If the oil sample is not
O.K. then check if anything is wrong with filter
machine.
The above process cycle is for a maximum exposure
of 12 hours. If the exposure is excess of 12 hours,
repeat heating and vacuum cycle, if required. In
any case exposure should not exceed 36 hours.
xii)
Oil filling in Main unit with separately
mounted radiator (Refer Outline drawing):
After the unit processing is complete as per
procedure given above, for filling oil in coolers and
main unit adopt following procedure. (Refer
Figure 4.7 & Figure 4.8)
a)
Keeping top & bottom valve between tank &

coolers close, fill previously filtered oil at
ambient temperature in each cooler bank
through valves on bottom header. Precautions
should be taken to open valves on radiator as
well as air release plug on headers. Close air
release plug after filling the oil.
b) Each bank should be filled separately.

c) Immediately after filling oil, each bank should be
filtered separately. For this, oil should be taken
from storage tank, fed to filter machine and
output of filter connected to top filter valve of
cooler bank and drain out from valve on bottom
header to storage bank.
d) Take oil sample from each bank and check for
BDV and water content. Values of BDV and
water content should match as given earlier.
Continue filtering for such duration, till BDV and
water content are achieved.
12

xiii)
Air release :
Release air from cover, header, radiator, buchholz

relay, cooler pipe and any other air release plug
provided on Transformer after
observing the
standing time, given below. Ensure complete air
release before applying voltage.
Air release for main unit and separate cooler banks
with pump:
Adopt the same procedure given above but have
additional air release as given below.
Run the pumps in pipe work for 8 hours. Pumps in
both pipe work should be run individually for 8 hours
so that reverse flow blocking device should get
operated. After the pump operations observe the
standing time as given below.
After observing the standing time, release air from
cover, radiator, buchholz relay, cooler pipes, header
and any other air release plug provided on
transformer. Ensure complete air release before
applying voltage.
xiv) Standing Time:
The Standing Time given below shall be strictly
adhered to, after topping up oil in conservator &
before aplication of voltage. Air release shall be
done after observing the Standing Time.
xv) Dew Point Measurement.
During field installation, parts of a transformer may
be subjected to exposure. Dew point measurement
is one of the methods to measure the humidity
inside the transformer tank.
4.16 Dos and Donts during assembling and
installation
2. Replace Nitrogen gas completely with air if it was

filled in main unit for transport/storage.
3.
Make sure that nothing is kept inside the

pockets before one enters inside main unit.
Also take off the wrist watches and shoes.
4. List up all the tools and material to be taken

inside and check it after coming out to make it
sure that no tools is left inside.
5. There must be a protective guard for lamp to be
taken inside.
6.
Keep inspection covers open for supply of fresh

air, when working inside.
7. When one person is working inside, second

person must be outside for emergency.
8. Use fix spanners and tie them to the wrist of
the person or somewhere outside the tank.
9. Be careful during connections where bolted
joints (jumper connection) are involved. So
that, nuts/washers etc., are not dropped inside
the tank.
10. Attach the caution tags "DO NOT OPERATE
THE SWITCHES" while working on energized
unit.
11. Make sure that the fire-fighting equipment
are available at the oil- treatment equipment as
well
as work place and adjacent to the
transformer.
12. Transformer tank as well as oil treatment
equipment shall be connected with permanent
earthing system of the station.
13. Check air cell in conservator
Strictly follow the below mentioned Dos and Donts

to avoid any kind of mishap, accidents and damage
pertaining to goods as well as human life.
4.16.1 Dos
14. Attend the leakages on the bushing.
1. IMP. : Insulating oil and insulation for windings

and connections are inflammable. Watch for fire
hazards.
16. Check the oil in transformer for di-electric

strength and moisture content and take
suitable action for restoring the quality.
15. Examine the bushings for dirt deposits and

coats, and clean them periodically.
13

17. Check the oil level in oil cup and ensure air
passages are free in the breather. If oil is less,
make up the oil.
18. If inspection covers are opened or any gasket
joint is to be tightened, then tighten the bolts
evenly to avoid uneven pressure.
19. Check and clean the relay and alarm contacts.
Check also their operation, and accuracy and if
required change the setting.
20. Check the pointers of all gauges for their
free movement.
21. Clean the oil conservator thoroughly before
erecting.
22. Check the OTI and WTI pockets and replenish
the oil, if required.
23. Fill the oil in the transformer at the earliest
opportunity at site and follow storage
instructions.
24. Check
the door seals of Marshalling
Box/Thermojunction Box. Change the rubber
lining if required.
25. Ensure proper tightness of top terminal cap
of condenser bushings to avoid rain water entry.
26. Check oil level in condenser bushing, any
discrepancy should be reported to Manufacturer.
7. Do not Smoke on or near the transformer.

8. Do not use Fibrous cleaning material, as it
can deteriorate oil when mixed with it.
9. Do not leave off circuit tap switch handle
unlocked if any.
10. Do not use low capacity lifting jacks on
transformer for jacking.
11. Do not change the settings of WTI and OTI
alarm and trip frequently. The setting should
be done as per the site condition.
12. Do not leave any connection loose.
13. Do not meddle with the protection circuits.
14. Do not leave Marshalling Box/Thermojunction
box doors open, they must be locked.
15. Do not switch off the heater in Marshalling
Box/Thermojuntion Box except to be periodically
cleaned.
16. Do not leave a ladder unlocked, when the
transformer is ÒN' in service, in case it is
provided.
17. Do not store transformer for long after
reaching site.
It
must be erected and
commissioned at the earliest.
4.16.2 Donts
1. Do not take any fibrous material such as cotton
waste inside while repairing.
2. Do not drop any tools/materials inside.
3. Do not stand on leads/cleats.
4. Do not weld, braze or solder inside the tank.
5. Do not weld anything to tank wall from outside.
6. Do not weld anything to conservator vessel if
bag is inside.
14

Figure 4.1 Radiator Assembly
RADIATOR ASSEMBLY
BRACING
LUG
VALVE HANDLE
TOP
BOTTOM
DRAIN PLUG
VALVE HANDLE
RADIATOR MOUNTED ON
PIPE WITH FLANGE
RADIATOR MOUNTED ON
HEADER WITH WELDED STUD
HEX. FULL NUT

SETSCREW
HEX. FULL NUT
VALVE
VALVE
WELDED STUD
GASKET
GASKET
RADIATOR
PLAIN WASHER
RADIATOR
PLAIN WASHER
DETAIL 'X'
DETAIL 'Y'
CAUTION NOTE NO.1 : RADIATOR LEAKAGE

RADIATORS IF DRAGGED ON THE GROUND OR ANY OTHER SURFACE, INVARIABLY GET STRUCK
SOMEWHERE CAUSING BENDING OF FINS, STRAINING WELDS, WHICH MAY LEAD TO OIL LEAKAGE.
IN ORDER TO PREVENT DAMAGES OF SUCH NATURE, IT IS SUGGESTED TO HANDLE THE RADIATORS
USING FORK LIFT FOR CARRYING TO THE TRANSFORMER AND RHEN RAISING IT TO THE POSITION
USING
15

Figure 4.2 Fan Mounting Arrangement
16

Figure 4.3 Lifting of Bushing
Figure 4.4 Conservator & pipe assembly
17

Figure 4.5 Plate valve assembly
18

80 M.M. DIA. PLATE TYPE VALVE ASSEMBLY

CAP SCREW
CAP WITH INDICATOR
PLATE TYPE VALVE

80 M.M. DIA.
GASKET
PLAIN WASHER
HEX. FULL NUT
PLATE TYPE VALVE

80 M.M. DIA.
GASKET
PLATE TYPE VALVE

80 M.M. DIA.
GASKET
Figure 4.6 Oil filling arrangement
19

Figure 4.7 Arrangement for hot oil circulation and filteration
20

Figure 4.8 Vacuum arrangement
21
VACUUM
PUMP
OIL STORAGE
TANK
VACUUM
FILTER
FILTER VALVE ON TANK
SHUT-OFF VALVE BETWEEN

BUCHHOLZ RELAY AND TANK
CONSERVATOR
BOTTOM VALVE BETWEEN

TANK AND COOLER
TRANSFORMER
VACUUM
GAUGE
AND SEPARATELY MOUNTED COOLER BANK
ARRANGEMENT FOR OIL FILLING UNDER VACUUM OF MAIN UNIT
BOTTOM HEADER
RADIATORS
TOP HEADER
BREATHER
SEPARETELY MOUNTED
COOLER BANK
TANK TOP
SAMPLING VALVE
TANK AND COOLER
TOP VALVE BETWEEN
VALVE ON
TOP HEADER
VALVE ON
BOTTOM HEADER

22

===============================================================
SECTION - 5
Pre- Commissioning Checks

===============================================================
5.1
Overview
Now that installation of transformer with all

its accessories & fittings is complete, we
need to conduct some pre-commissioning
checks to ensure safe & successful
energization.
In case of substantial time lag between
installation
and
commissioning
of
transformer, it is recommended that
transformer installation be fully completed
with assembling of all accessories and oil
filling for Safety and Completeness. It will
also
allow
easy
check
before
commissioning.
Mechanical
and
Electrical
precommissioning checks are essential to
ensure entire Transformer Functionality.
Pre-Commissioning checks involve a

thorough check of transformer and
accessories as well as external checks
on
installation
system.
5.2
General Guidelines
The transformer tank, all external metal
parts and accessories should be
permanently grounded according to the
correct safety and operation practice
and in accordance with instructions for
the specific equipment being used. Tank
should be earthed at atleast two points.
All bushings have to remain grounded
until final energization of the unit (except
to perform the electrical tests).
All cables that are connected to the
transformer should be adequately
grounded.
Check all the gasketed joints to ensure
that there is no leakage of transformer
oil at any point.
Release trapped air through air release
plugs and valves fitted for the purpose
on various fittings likeheaders, radiators
and oil communicating bushings,
buchholz petcock etc.
Check direction of rotation of fan blades
to ensure air blast to radiators.
5.3
Check direction of Oil pump by

switching on the pump and the oil
flow indicator to indicate the pump
on condition. If stand-by pump
provided check all the pumps. Each
pump should be operated for at least
8 hours at least and subsequently the
air is again released from all points.
Ensure conservator is filled upto the
filling oil level mark on plain oil gauge
side and corresponding to the pointer
reading on MOG side.
Ensure that silica gel in the breather is
active and color is blue and oil in the
breather cup.
Check that the thermometer pockets on
tank cover, header, etc., are filled with
oil. Oil filling is not required in case of
dry type probe arrangement.
CTs secondary terminals must be
shorted and earthed, if not in use. Also
check
that the CT terminals
in
Marshalling Box/Thermo Junction Box
are connected to WTI CT terminals, as
indicated in the rating and diagram plate
and open the shorting link of the
terminal block.
Check for tightness of all external
electrical connections.
Clear off extraneous materials like tools,
pieces of cloths, waste, etc.
Check alarm/trip contacts of all
accessories, instruments flow meters,
differential pressure gauges etc.
In the case
of
water cooled
transformers, the pressure gauge
readings on both water and oil sides to
confirm that the water pressure is less
than the oil pressure. The oil and water
flow should not be less than that
specified.
Mechanical Checks
5.3.1 Location on Foundation

Locate the transformer on the plinth
precisely and anchor the unit with anchoring
bolts. Confirm position with Outline
Drawing.

===============================================================
5.3.2 Bushings and Terminal Connectors
Check bushings for any crack or
breakage of porcelain
Oil level in condenser type bushings
should be up to the level marked on oil
gauge on side of top cap. Also check
tightness of top cap for condenser
bushing
Check for the arcing horn gap on
bushings, if provided
Ensure that all bushings and bushing
turrets are correctly air bled. Check for
leaks, especially on bolted flanges and
the bushing top terminals.
Ensure that capacitive test taps on
condenser type bushings are correctly
grounded or connected.
Check for sufficient voltage clearances.
Confirm correct position of turrets with
Outline Drawing.
5.3.3 Valves and Pipe-Work
Check that all bolted joints are correctly
tightened and that there are no leaks.
Make sure that all valves (including
radiator valves) are in the operation
position.
Ensure that all venting openings are
closed.
5.3.4. Radiators and Cooling systems
Check oil pumps, fans and their control
system. Check for leaks. Observe
operation for at least two hour.
Check if all condensation release plugs
are removed on electrical motors.
Overcurrent motor protections.
Check and set temperature controllers.
Check the flow indicators for the correct
flow direction.
Other trip and alarm functions as per
specification.
Remote control function (if present).
5.3.5
Leak Test
The simplest method for testing for leaks is

by gas pressure. The gas space in the unit
should be pressurized at 5 PSI with dry
nitrogen. The gas pressure should be
monitored for a period of approximately 24
hours. A change in pressure does not

necessarily indicate a leak. Any temperature
increase or decrease in the transformer will
result in a subsequent increase or decrease
of the gas pressure in the unit. Ambient
temperatures and tank pressure should be
monitored for a 24 hour period.
If there is a significant drop in pressure
during the 24 hour period, without any
accompanying significant decrease in
ambient temperature, the tank must be
checked for leaks. Re-pressurize the tank at
5 PSI if necessary.
Using a solution of liquid soap and soft
water, brush all weld and threaded joints
above the oil level, all bushing gasket
flanges, and all hand hold cover gaskets.
Any leaks in the gas space above the liquid
will be shown in the form of soap bubbles.
Paint welds with chalk dust dissolved in
alcohol. Apply the chalk dust below the
liquid level to check for leaks of liquid from
the tank.
All soap solution must be rinsed off or wiped
off with a clean wet rag before removing
pressure.
5.4
Tests
Accessories
on
Transformer
and
Refer to Rating and Diagram Plate and all

other instruction plates before tests. Refer
section 5.5 on instruments for electrical tests
before commencing below tests.
5.4.1
Oil Sampling and Testing
Oil Sampling
Oil takes up moisture readily and its
condition should always be checked before
use. Water and water-saturated oil are both
heavier than dry oil and sink to the bottom of
any container. Samples shall, therefore, be
taken from the bottom. Samples should not
be taken unless the oil has been allowed to
settle for 24 hours

===============================================================
Samples from Tank: Dirt from the draw-off
valve or plug should be removed. To ensure
that the valve is clean, some quantity of oil
should be allowed to flow into a separate
container before collecting samples for
testing. Samples shall be collected either in
glass bottle (refer IEC 60567) or in stainless
steel bottle. Oil must be taken from both top
and bottom sampling valves and while
drawing the sample the corresponding top
oil temperature must be furnished.
Test oil sample for BDV, PPM, Resistivity,
Tan . It is a good practice to conduct DGA
before commissioning to serve as a record
for future.
Sample from Oil Drum: The drum should
first be allowed to stand with the bung
vertically upwards for at least 24 hours. The
area around the bung should be cleaned. A
clean glass or brass tube long enough to
reach to within 10 mm of the lowermost part
of the drum should be inserted, keeping the
uppermost end of the tube sealed with the
thumb whilst doing so. Remove the thumb,
thereby allowing oil to enter the bottom of
the tube. Reseal the tube and withdraw an
oil sample. The first two samples should be
discarded. Thereafter, the samples should
be released into a suitable receptacle.
Sample from Diverter switch of OLTC: Oil
of diverter switch should be checked for
BDV at the time of commissioning and
subsequently yearly or 5000 operations,
whichever is earlier. Refer OLTC Manual for
detailed instructions
For further details on oil tests, refer
section 4.14
5.4.2
Test
voltage on the low voltage side at all tap

positions.
Polarity and inter-phase connections are
checked while measuring the ratio. This
can be checked by the voltmeter method.
The primary and secondary windings are
connected together at one point. A low
voltage three phase supply is then applied
to the terminals. Voltage measurements are
then taken between various pairs of
terminals and vector group is verified.
5.4.3 Winding Resistance Measurement
Kelvin Bridge meter or automatic winding
resistance measurement kit (ohm meter,
preferably 25 A kit) should be used for the
measurement of resistance. Tapped winding
resistance shall be measured at all tap
positions. Absolute steady reading should
be obtained for minimum 1 minute.
Pre-commissioning values are to be
compared with factory values after applying
temperature correction factors.
5.4.4
Continuity Impedance Test
The continuity impedance test is meant to

check the impedance and all internal
connections, including the continuity of the
current for the windings and all tap
connections.
Test to be conducted at Principal tap. Apply
3-phase 415V or preferably single phase
230V to the transformer HV side with LV
side shorted. Calculate ohmic value i.e. V/I
and convert to percentage impedance.
Where practical, measure frequency and
convert value by direct proportion.
Ratio, Polarity and Vector Group
The ratio should be checked on all taps and

between all the windings and the results
should tally with factory test reports as
well as the rating and diagram plate
details. Ratio shall be checked by applying
a single phase 230-300 V supply on the
high voltage side and measuring
the
Test to be done for each pair of windings

taken at a time for a 3 winding transformer.
Compare the values with respect to precommissioning values. Any deviation
beyond 1-2% needs further analysis.

===============================================================
5.4.3.1
Insulation Resistance Test
5.4.4.2
Core Grounding Meggar Test
The purpose of the insulation resistance test

is to detect internal movement of parts that
may have shorted out some of the insulation
on the core and on the windings and leads,
as well as to check for excessive moisture
contamination. Compare values obtained
with the factory test figures.
This test is used to determine the status of

the core clamping structure. 2500 Volts
meggar is used for this test. Insulation
resistance is measured between:
(i) Core to Frame
(ii) Frame to Tank
(iii) Core to Tank
Note:
Tested values should be more than 10 M

at 20 C.
Insulation resistances measured without

oil filling on a dry air-filled transformer
are not comparable with the measured
values in the factory.
5.4.4.1 Winding Insulation Meggar Test

The insulation
resistance
between
windings and between windings and earth
should be measured with 5000/2500/1000
volts megger and the values should be
compared
to the test report values. If
there is much variation, the same should
be intimated to the manufacturer.
IR at 600 sec
The Polarization Index = --------------------IR at 60 sec
should be 1.3
It is preferable to have a motor operated
megger and the readings taken after one
minute from starting.
Prechecks:
Before measuring
the insulation
resistance, it should be made sure that
the bushings are cleaned thoroughly
with clean cotton cloth. They should
also give reading of infinity before
connecting up.
No external lines, lightning arrestors,
etc, should be in circuit.
Ensure that the lead wires of the
megger do not have joints.
5.4.5 Measuement of Magnetising Current

A single phase low voltage supply is given to
the HV winding of the 3 phase transformer
and current readings of the phases are
taken using low range A.C. ammeters.
Reading should be recorded for future
reference.
5.4.6
Magnetic Balance Tests
Apply single phase 230V supply to each

phase of a star connected winding, and
measure voltage induced in other phases.
When centre phase is applied the other
phase voltage should be 30 to 70%. When
extreme phase is applied, centre phase
voltage to be 50 to 95%.
5.4.7
Power Factor Measurement of
Transformer Windings and Bushings
(a) For Transformer windings,
measurements shall be done after opening
the jumpers and isolating the transformer
from other equipment and the ground.
(b) The test kit should be suitable to work in
charged switchyard environment i.e.
induction suppression unit should be
provided.
(c) Test modes shall be selected as below :
Bushings

===============================================================
UST mode between HV and test tap.
Windings
(i) Between two windings UST mode
(ii) Between winding to Earth-GSTg mode
with other winding (s) guarded.
The contacts of WTI and OTI for alarm and

trip are checked and set at required
temperatures depending upon ambient
temperatures and loading conditions.
5.4.9
Notes
While carrying out the test, all 3 phases
of the same winding are to be shorted to
compensate/nullify the effect of winding
reactance.
The bushing porcelain and test tap are
to be properly cleaned before the
commencement of test.
Pre-commissioning values are to be
compared with factory values after
applying temperature correction factors.
Tan Delta/ Power Factor values should
be more frequently monitored if faster
deterioration trend is observed.
5.4.8 Tests on Auxiliary Instruments
5.4.8.1 Oil and Gas Operated Relays
(Buchholz relay)
Check whether the gas operated relay is
mounted
as per suppliers catalogue.
Confirm that the relay does not operate
when pumps are switched on in forced oil
cooled transformers. Check the operation of
the alarm and trip contacts to the relay
independently by injecting air through the
top
cocks using a hand pump. The air
should be released after the tests.
5.4.8.2
Magnetic Oil Level Gauge :
The float level of the oil level indicator is

moved up and down between the end
position to check the mechanism
does
not stick at any point. If the indicator has
got signaling contacts, they should be
checked at the same time for correct
operation.
5.4.8.3
Tests on Tap Changer
The sequence of operation of the tap

changers shall be checked for :
(a) Manual Operation.
(b) Local Electrical Operation.
(c) Remote Electrical Operation.
(d) Group Operation, if applicable.
5.4.10
Checking of Fans and Pumps
It shall be checked that the specified number

of fans are mounted on radiators as per
general arrangement drawing. IR values and
settings for operation of fan motors and oil
pumps are checked. Check also that the
direction of rotation of fans and pumps is
correct.
5.4.11
Checking of Marshalling Box
The wiring from various accessories to

marshalling box shall be checked.
5.4.12
Checking of oil
The oil samples from the actual oil being

used in the transformer shall be tested for oil
properties and DGA analysis shall be
performed. This data will be useful as a
reference signature in future.
5.4.13
SFRA test
SFRA (Sweep frequency response analysis)

test shall be performed and the results
compared with factory test results, if any.In
any case this record will be useful as a
signature for future.
Temperature Indicators

===============================================================
5.5 Instruments used for Pre - Commissioning Test
Use the instruments with valid calibration certificates for conducting the tests at site
Sr.
Test
Measuring Instrument Required
Least Count
Instrument Range
Accuracy
No.
1)
2)
Ratio, Polarity, vector

group and Magnetic
balance
Resistance
3)
Insulation Resistance
V-I method
or Bridge
Megger
4)
Excitation Current
Ammeter
0-200 mA
0.5%
1 mA
5)
6)
Impedance
Oil BDV
BDV Meter
2.5 mm
gauge
0-100 kV
2.5 mm
2%
0.1 mm
2 kV
Go - No go
7)
8)
SFRA
Capacitance and tan delta
5.6
Voltmeter
0 to 500 V
2%
5V
0-100
2%
1 x 10
0-50,000 M
5%
5 M at the
lowest scale
-6
Start up Instructions
Step
No.
Description
Test equipment/
Controls
Inspection/
Action
Acceptance Norms
1)
Oil
BDV tester
BDV
BDV 60 kV
2)
Air release plugs
Spanner
Release air
All air expelled
3)
Circuit
breaker
incoming/outgoing
Alarm/trip circuit
Verify
correctness
Satisfactory operation
of breaker
4)
Breathers
Visual check
Oil level in cup
At designated level
5)
Thermometer
pockets
Visual check
Oil
pocket
To maximum
6)
Earthing pad
Spanner size M12
Tightness
To be light at earthing
terminal and the earth
7)
Heater switch in
control
Visual check
Switch ON
Switch ON
8)
Incoming breaker
Remote control to close

the incoming breaker
Energise from
incoming side
keeping lowest
voltage top
No abnormal humming
9)
Outgoing breaker
Remote control to close

outgoing breaker
Synchronise
Load current as per

load shared
inside

===============================================================
SECTION - 6
Commissioning

===============================================================
6.1
Repeating
Checks
Pre Commissioning
The transformer is ready for commissioning

after completion of installation with all its
accessories and Pre-commissioning checks
and tests as per Section 5.
Pre-operational tests need not be repeated if
transformer is commissioned within 4 weeks
of conducting Pre-commissioning checks
and tests.
If energisation is done 4 weeks after
installation and testing, air venting and all
Pre-commissioning checks and tests are to
be repeated on transformer and accessories
as in Section 5.
6.2.3
Trip Circuits and Contacts
Trip contacts on the transformer or its

accessories
immediately
place
the
transformer out of service in case of any
abnormal situation that can damage the
equipment/ environment. Check breaker
tripping by closing all trip contacts.
Commonly used Trip contacts are:
Buchholz Relay
Oil Surge Relay
Pressure Relief Device (PRD)
Sudden Pressure Relay
Winding Temperature Indicator and Oil
Temperature Indicator (WTI & OTI)
.
6.2 Operational System Tests
6.2.4
Before transformer energization, some

operational tests are to be performed on the
system including network, protection system
and remote control facilities.
Confirm settings (alarm/ trip) of Winding

Temperature Indicators and Oil Temperature
Indicator are as marked in the Schematic
Control drawings.
6.2.1
Relay Settings
Recheck all relay settings associated with

switchgear
and
other
transformer,
associated equipments in the installation
system.
Refer
technical
documents/
specifications
supplied
by respective
vendors.
6.2.2 Alarm circuits and Contacts
Alarms provide a warning for an abnormal
condition on the transformer or its
accessories. All alarm indications should be
checked by closing alarm contacts.
Following are commonly used alarms:
Buchholz Relay
Winding Temperature Indicator and Oil
Temperature Indicator
Oil Level Alarms
Oil flow indicator.
Oil Level Gauge
Temperature Settings
Temperature Values in Schematic

Settings
Control drawings
6.2.5 Rating of Pressure Relief Devices

Confirm rating of all overpressure
relief devices are as marked in
drawings.
6.2.6 System Voltage, frequency & Phase
Sequence Check
Check incoming and outgoing system
voltages, frequency and phase
sequence again before energizing the
transformer.
6.2.7 Oil Sampling and Checking
Repeat procedure of Oil sampling and
testing as in section 5 to confirm oil is
as per norms before energization.

===============================================================
6.3 Transformer Energization
Post Energization Checks
If the ambient temperature is < -20C,

special precautions should be taken before
energization. Refer IEEE Std C57.12.00.
After energization, conduct a general

surveillance of transformer and other
substation equipments for any abnormalities
such as :
6.3.1
Minimum Settling Time after Final

Oil Filling
The transformer oil should be stabilized after

final oil filling i.e, allowed to stand for atleast
24 hours. Release air from all venting points
before energization.
Transformer with forced oil circulation using
pumps
Have the pumps run for at least 2 hours and
wait for:
minimum 8 hours if high voltage _ 245 kV
minimum 24 hours if high voltage > 245 kV
Transformers without forced oil circulation
using pumps
Wait for :
minimum 16 hours if high voltage _ 245 kV
minimum 48 hours if high voltage > 245 kV
6.3.2
First Energization on No-Load
The transformer is first energized under noload condition. Set the tap changer to obtain
correct voltage ratio.
Ensure
drive
mechanism of no-load tap changer is locked
to prevent mal operation under voltage.
After energization, check the secondary and
no-load current. A noise-peak mayl be heard
immediately after energization. It shall
subside within an hour.
Abnormal noise/ humming/ vibration

from transformer or accessories
Monitor temperature of oil, recording to
be taken at regular time intervals (every
hour) until stabilization
Monitor temperature of winding hot
spots, recording to be taken at regular
time intervals (every hour) until
stabilization
Monitor ambient temperature
Operate and check performance of LTC
through all positions within rated
voltages (if applicable)
Operate and check performance of
cooling pumps and fans (if applicable)
Check Oil leaks
After few hours of no-load energization,

switch of the transformer and
Check Buchholz relay for air/ gas
collection
Abnormalities noted above to be
investigated and corrected.
Transformer can now be re-energized and
loaded gradually.
6.3.3
Loading the Transformer
Set the tap-changer at right tap position

and check secondary voltage. If an
Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) is
provided,
the
tap
changer
will
automatically run to the right tap
position.
In case of parallel operation, ensure
voltage ratio and voltages match at all
taps, principal and extreme tap
impedances match, vector groups and
phase sequence on all transformers is
the same.
Close incoming breaker and gradually
raise the load on the transformer.

===============================================================
Post Loading Checks
Note transformer voltages and load

currents, ambient temperature, oil
levels.
Record temperature of oil and winding
hot spots at regular time intervals until
stabilization. Also note loading.
Monitor condition of accessories like
breather, fans, pumps, bushings etc
It is recommended to collect oil for DGA
24 hours after loading.
In case of parallel operation, current
should be carefully monitored between
both units to make sure that one unit is
not carrying a larger portion of the load
under parallel operation. The units
should be monitored for an additional
period of at least one week to make
sure that there is no abnormal
temperature rise on either.

===============================================================
SECTION - 7
Maintenance

===============================================================
7.1
Introduction
If a transformer is to give long and troublefree service it should receive a reasonable

amount of attention and maintenance. A
rigid system of inspection and preventive
maintenance ensures long life, trouble free
service and low maintenance cost.
Maintenance consists of regular inspection,
testing and reconditioning where necessary.
The principal objective of maintenance is to
maintain the insulation in good condition.
Moisture, dirt and excessive heat are the
main causes of insulation deterioration and
avoidance of these will in general keep the
insulation in good condition.
7.2
Safety During Maintenance
Maintenance activity is to be undertaken on

the transformer following all safety
precautions and under supervision.
Follow below safety measures:

Always
ensure
transformer
is
grounded during inspections.
The transformer is disconnected and
isolated from both incoming and
outgoing ends. Connect discharge
rods on transformer terminals to remove
static and induced charges and earth
the same.
Confirm that all possible remote
operations have been changed to
Manual mode.
Place locks/ warning cards stating
breakers should not be operated
during inspection period.
Disconnect supply to control cabinet.
Before entering the tank, ensure air is
present
inside.
Also
make
arrangements for ventilation while
working inside. Use dry air circulation
and oxygen meter.
Use only explosion proof lamp-s
inside the tank and verify insulation
condition of electrical cord.
Do not allow persons to get close to
the bushings in air while power is on.
This can cause an electric shock. Before
getting close to the bushing in air,
disconnect transformer from both ends,

discharge the line terminals and earth
the terminals.
Do not remove the cap of bushing
test terminal or cover of voltage
measuring terminal. This may cause
an electric shock or deteriorate the
performance of moisture-proof seal.
In case of accident inside the
transformer, do not get close to the
transformer.
Do not climb the transformer under
energized condition or immediately
after shutdown. High temperature
sections can prove hazardous.
Do not leave open the secondary circuit
of the current transformer.
Do not use fire around the transformer
or insulating oil as this can cause fire/
explosion due to insulating oil or
decomposed gas leaks.
Before inserting manual handle into the
manual
shaft
of
motor-driven
mechanism, change operation mode to
local from remote.
Do not touch movable section (main
driving axle, gear etc) in the motor
driven operating mechanism when
power is on.
Do not touch circuit sections inside
marshalling box when power is on. Keep
the marshalling box doors closed when
transformer is in operation.
Do not touch cooling fans even when
they are not rotating. They may start
rotating from an internal signal without
warning.
Do not operate any valves when the
transformer is in operation. It may
prevent free flow of oil and consequently
raise oil temperature.
Do not stop all coolers when the
transformer is in operation.

===============================================================
7.3 Periodic Inspection
during Service
and
Checks
Transformer Logbooks: It is recommended

to record readings and observations during
inspections in a logbook. This serves as
reference for planning future maintenance
activity and investigation during breakdown.
Unusual Service Conditions: If a
transformer is relocated to another site from
its initial installation location with a different
environment
and
different
system
configuration (like in parallel), The original
parameters like temperature rise, loading
limit etc may not be met. The permissible
performance characteristics should be
reworked.
7.3.1
External Cleaning
time, the transformer valves should be

sealed with gaskets and covered with
suitable plates. This also applies to the
radiator-cooler openings.
All breathers and small openings in pressure
relief valves (and pressure vacuum bleeders
on sealed tank system and inert gas system
units) must be kept clean and in operating
condition.
All ground buses and wiring leads to ground
must be kept in good condition. Proper relay
operation
depends
on
low
ground
resistance. Ground resistance must be
measured annually.
7.3.2
Use an oil solvent to thoroughly remove all

oil that appears on the outside of the tank or
on the gaskets. This oil, later showing up on
the painted surface, often gives the false
impression of a leak.
The bushing porcelains must be kept free
from dust and dirt and have to be inspected
at least once a year. Abnormal conditions
such as sandstorms, salt deposits, dust, or
chemical fumes require regular cleaning to
avoid accumulations to the external surface.
Accepted methods of hot line washing or
cleaning with solvents may be used.
Keep the heat radiating surfaces of the
transformer clean. External surfaces of
forced oil heat exchangers should be
periodically cleaned as a particular dusty
location may dictate. Transformers near the
seacoast or in corrosive atmosphere areas
should be painted regularly to prevent
corroding or rusting of metal parts. If it
becomes necessary to remove a radiator or
air cooled oil cooler, first close the valves,
top and bottom, and bolt them in the closed
position. Next, drain the oil from the radiator
by removing the drain plug from the bottom
header and the vent plug from the top. After
draining the oil, remove the radiator. If the
radiator/cooler is removed for any length of
Transformer Body
Leaks & Painting: The transformer tank

and other parts should be inspected
periodically for any rust or and oil leak.
Rusted portions, if any, should be
cleaned thoroughly and repainted with
proper paints. Transformer should be
completely painted at proper intervals. If
any leak is found, it should be
investigated. If it is due to defective
welding, the same should be rectified
after consulting the manufacturer.
Leaking joints can be rectified by
tightening the bolts to the correct
pressure or by replacing the gaskets.
Refer Table 7.1 and Table 7.2 for
maximum recommended torque are
given here on the basis of the material
properties.
Groundings: Check the transformer
grounding
connections
and
all
groundings of accessories.
Valves: In case leakage is detected on
the driving shaft, re-tighten the
compression gland. Use only graphitefree sealing material when changing
packings.

===============================================================
Table 7.1 : Maximum recommended
Torque for Bolts marked 4.8 on the head
Bolt size
Unplated
Torque N-m
Zn Plated
Galvanised
20
25
M12
36
40
M16
90
110
M20
175
210
M24
300
360
M30
600
720
M36
1050
1260
Table 7.2 : Maximum recommended

Torque for Bolts marked 8.8 or higher on
the head or of Stainless Steel
Unplated
Torque N-m
Zn Plated
Galvanised
Torque N-m
M10
35
40
M12
60
70
M16
145
170
M20
280
340
M24
490
590
M30
970
1160
M36
1700
2040
7.3.3
Bolt size
Torque N-m
M10
Bolt size
Recommended Torques for bolts/studs

only for gasketed joints
Gaskets
Gaskets sometimes shrink during

service. It is, therefore, necessary to
check the tightness of all bolts fastening
gasketed joints. The bolts should be
tightened evenly round the joints to
avoid uneven pressure.
Leaking gaskets should be immediately
replaced.
7.3.4
Unplated
Torque N-m
M10
20
M12
30
M16
50
M20
70
M24
100
Oil
Oil Level and Quantity

The oil level should be checked at frequent
intervals and any excessive leakage of oil
investigated. There may be slight loss of oil
by evaporation; this need cause no concern
if the tank is topped up at regular intervals.
Oil for topping up should comply with
IS 335 / IEC60296. New insulating oils and
preferably oil from the same source as the
original oil should be used.
All leaks should be repaired as quickly as
possible so as to avoid possible trouble
caused by low oil level.
Oil Inspection
Samples of the oil should be taken at regular
intervals preferably yearly and tested for
DGA and other oil parameters
If oil fails to meet standards, it should be
reconditioned by suitable means i.e, filtration
or the oil be changed.
Note: Vacuum filtration only improves BDV,
moisture content and dust/dirt/suspended
materials etc from oil. This process does not
improve any other parameters of oil.

===============================================================
7.3.5
The bushings should be inspected for

any cracks or chippings of the porcelain
at regular intervals and kept free from
dust and dirt. In location where special
and abnormal conditions prevail, such
as sand storm, salt deposits, cement
dust, oil fumes etc., bushings should be
cleaned at more frequent intervals.
Oil level in oil filled bushings should be
checked periodically.
7.3.6
Gauge
Bushings
Conservator and Magnetic Oil
Conservators are so arranged that the

lower part acts as a sump in which any
impurities entering the conservator will
collect. A valve/plug is fitted at the
lowest point of the conservator for
draining and sampling.
The inside of the conservator should be
cleaned every two to three years. A
removable end is generally provided for
this purpose.
The oil level indicator should be kept
clean. Generally the oil level is visible
through a transparent material. In case
of breakage immediate replacement is
essential. When conservator is stripped
for cleaning, the mechanism of the oil
gauge should be cleaned.
7.3.7
Tap Changer
General guidelines given below. Refer

manufacturers catalogue for further details.
Do not allow dirt to accumulate

between contact rings of notching
controller.
Do not use oil/ grease on contacts
rings on notching controller.
Check the operation of anticondensation heater
If the contacts of contactors are
silver faced, no touching up be ever
done, if any is worn out, it should be
replaced. Copper contacts may be lightly
touched up with a file when they become
rough. The pole faces of electromagnet
must be kept clean.
Do not oil/grease the contact
surface of radial multi-contact switches,
unless a special contact lubricant is
used. The space between the rings
should be cleaned occasionally. If
necessary, a few drops of Benzene be
used.
Selector Switch: The contacts do not
make/break current. As such, the wear
is only due to mechanical movement of
moving contacts. These may be
inspected once in 2/3 years.
7.3.7.2
No-Load Tap Changer
Perform switching operation on each tap

and repeat 10 cycles. This is to be done
atleast twice in a year.
7.3.8
7.3.7.1 On-Load Tap Changer
Motor Driving Mechanism
Diverter Switch: The maintenance

primarily consists of servicing of diverter
switch contacts, checking the oil level in
the diverter switch chamber, and
replacement of diverter switch oil when
the same becomes unsuitable for further
service.
Dehydrating Breather
Silicagel is blue in color in its active

stage but gradually turns pale pink as it
becomes saturated with moisture. The
gel should then be replaced or
reactivated. The saturated gel can be
regenerated by heating up to 110-130C
for 8 to 10 hours or 150-200C for two to
three hours and can be used again.
The frequency of inspection depends
upon local climatic and operating
conditions.
The level in the oil seal must be
maintained at the level marked in the
cup.

===============================================================
7.3.9
Cooling System
Radiators: Maintenance includes replacing

damaged elements, cleaning the outer
surface to remove settled dust, cleaning
inner surface by oil flushing for removing
sludge and repainting if required.
Fans
Fan blades are cleaned to remove dust;
bearings of the fan motors should be
lubricated occasionally.
During extended periods of reduced
transformer loading, the fans tend to
remain non-operational. Operate the
fans on a periodic basis (biweekly for 1
hour) to ensure satisfactory operation.
Unit Coolers and Heat Exchangers: Refer

manufacturers catalogue.
7.3.10
Temperature Indicators
The level of oil in the pockets holding

thermometer bulbs should be checked
and the oil replenished, if required. The
capillary tubing should be fastened
down again if it has become loose.
Dial glasses should be kept clear and if
broken, replaced.
Recalibrate with standard thermometer
immersed in hot oil bath if readings are
found to be incorrect.
7.3.11 External
equipment
circuits
and
control
alarm contacts, thermometer contacts,

etc.
Check the heaters in the control
cabinets.
Also check temperature settings. These
settings can be lower than the ones
indicated on the schematic diagrams but
never higher.
Evidence of water or liquids in control
cabinets and in air-filled cable boxes.
7.3.12
Buchholz Relay
Routine
operation
and
mechanical
inspection tests should be carried out at one
and two yearly intervals respectively.
During operation if gas is found to be
collecting and giving alarm, the gas should
be tested and analysed to find out the nature
of fault. The internal faults can be identified
to a great extent by chemical analysis of
collected gas.
7.3.13
Explosion Vent
The diaphragm, which is fitted at the open

end of the vent should be inspected at
frequent intervals and replaced, if damaged.
Failure to replace the diaphragm quickly
may allow the ingress of moisture which will
contaminate the oil. If the diaphragm has
broken because of a fault in the transformer
an inspection must be carried out to
determine the nature and cause of the fault.
Check:
Control circuit voltage.
Excess heating of parts - evidence by
discoloration of metal parts, charred
insulation, or odor. If connections
appear to be blackened or corroded, the
same can be cleaned or replaced.
Freedom of moving parts (binding or
sticking is not allowed).
Excessive noise in relay coils.
Excessive arcing in opening circuits.
Proper functioning of timing devices,
sequencing of devices, relief device

===============================================================
7.4 Preventive Maintenance Inspection Chart
Sr. Periodicity
No.
1)
--
Item/Area
Maintenance Required
Porcelain insulator such as

bushing, lightning arrester,
supporting insulator
Cleaning should be done

periodically. Interval depends on
actual condition at site
Special
Tools
--
2)
5 Yearly
Radiator
Oil flushing inside
Oil filter machine
3)
5 Yearly
Paint
Repainting
--
4)
10 Yearly
Gasket
Change
--
5)
5 Yearly
Conservator
Cleaning
--
6)
Yearly
Buchholz relay
Operation and mechanical

inspection tests
7)
Yearly
On Load Tap changer
As per suppliers catalogue
8)
--
Condenser Bushings
Test set
Consumables
Required
Water
Warning
Safety
arrangement for
hot line washing
Transformer oil
--
Emery Paper
--
--
Transformer oil
Caution
--
-Outermost coat is
Polyurethane
Gaskets in
contact with oil
are Nitrile based
Use teflon for plugs
No welding
allowed on tank
Take care of COPS

bag
--
--
--
As per catalogue

===============================================================
SECTION 8
Trouble shooting

===============================================================
8.1 Indication signals of malfunction or
abnormality
A structured and objective oriented trouble
shooting is required when a transformer is
tripped on some protective relay or when
routine electrical tests shows some
deviation.
Below table shows major indication signals
of malfunction.
Location
Signal
1)
Main Tank Buchholz Relay
Alarm/Trip
2)
OLTC Buchholz Relay
Alarm/Trip
3)
WTI
Alarm/Trip
4)
OTI
Alarm/Trip
5)
6)
MOG
PRD/Diaphragm
Alarm/Trip
Tripped/Operated
7)
Overcurrent Relay
Trip
8)
Differential Relay
Trip
9)
Earth Fault Relay
Trip
10)
Whether there is gas collection in buchholz

relay of transformer.
If yes, colour of gas. Quantity of the gas in
3
cm
Test results of Buchholz Relay Gas
Yes/No
Whether there is gas collection in the OLTC

Buchholz relay
If yes, colour of gas.
3
Quantity of the gas in cm
Test results of OLTC Buchholz gas
Yes/No
11)
Colourless/Dark
Inflammable/Non-inflammable, its nature
and composition.
Colourless/Dark
Inflammable/Non-inflammable

===============================================================
8.2
Trouble shooting chart
8.2.1
Having received some indication of

abnormality
in
functioning
of
transformer,
detailed
trouble
shooting steps are requisite for the
fault diagnosis.
Symptom
Differential relay and
Buchholz relay or
pressure relief device
operate
simultaneously
Buchholz relay and
operate
simultaneously
Only differential relay
operates
Over-current, ground
arrestor and other
relays operate
Abnormal operation in
the system or other
recording device
The table below depicts the

flowchart
of
trouble
shooting
procedures.
Possible Cause
Item to be checked
Shut down of
the transformer
Only Buchholz relay

(trip) operates
Only Buchholz relay

(alarm) operates
Trouble shooting flow
Internal fault in
the transformer
Electrical tests
and DGA
Excessive inrush
current when the
transformer is
energized
Faulty operation
of relay or device
Threshold values of
relays
Level of inrush current
Trapped air or
build up of gas
Gas analysis
Any sudden drop in oil
temperature
Choking in breather
If heavy current is
flowing through the
windings
Whether OLTC is
interrupting heavy
short-circuit current
The duration and value
of short-circuit current
External fault
such as system
short-circuit
Wiring continuity and

condition
Contacts
Oil-stop valve position
between tank and
conservator

===============================================================
Symptom
Buchholz relay and
operate
simultaneously
Possible Cause
Shut down of
the transformer
and the tap
changer
Operation of
incomplete tap
changing relay
Either Buchholz relay
or pressure relief
device operates
Incorrect stopping
positions because of
incomplete tap
changing of out-of-step
tap positions
Shutdown of
the transformer
and the tap
changer
Drive motor not

operating
Drive motor
operates but
incomplete tap
changing takes
place
Excessive drive
torque
High oil level of OLTC

conservator
Item to be checked
Electrical tests,
including measurement
of insulation resistance,
voltage ratio, exciting
current, and winding
resistance
Gas analysis Operation
of relays
Any external short
circuits
Faulty
Faulty
diverter operation Whether trip due to
simultaneous start of
switch of relay
or
both pumps
device
Faulty divertor
switch
Simultaneous
start of pumps
Oil leakage from main tank to OLTC

compartment
Faulty operation of oil level auge
Integrity of all
circuits and
contacts
Malfunctioning
of pressure relief
device
Operation of any circuit breakers
Incorrect voltages
Motors, pilot switches and relays
Control circuit
Closing and opening positions of switch
contacts
Time setting for relay
Tap position where excessive torque

occurs
Torque value when using the manual
crack handle on the drive mechanism
and the number of times the handle must
be turned
Oil level of main tank and OLTC and oil
temperature
Operation of oil level gauge

===============================================================
8.2.2
Trouble shooting flow chart for

abnormal level of fault gases.
Possible Cause
Item to be Checked
Local overheating of oil

and insulating materials
1)
2)
3)
4)
Partial discharge and

arcing
Deterioration caused by
aging
Oil
leakage
between
OLTC compartment and
main tank
Perform the gas dissolved gas analysis. In particular,

reaffirm that there are combustible gases detected by
repeating the analysis. Also perform consecutive analysis
at regular intervals to monitor changes in combustible gas
concentration.
Check the condition of the load being placed on the
transformer.
There should be no overloading, over
excitation or irregularity in the oil temperature.
Check that the transformer has suffered no system faults,
such as external short circuits, ground lightning strikes, or
operation of protective relays.
Check the condition of ancillary equipment for the
transformer, such as overheating of oil pumps. In the case
of pump, check the motor current.
Check that the oil level of the divertor switch compartment

is correct for the oil temperature.
2)
Drain oil from the divertor switch compartment, and check
the insulating cylinder, and gasketed joints for leakage.
External facts (caused by Check the history for the tank, such as whether it was welded
welding
and
use
of recently. Date of oil replacement, etc.
contaminated
oil
for
example)
8.3
1)
Trouble shooting process

Having followed the trouble shooting
steps and having identified the fault,
the actual flow of activities is as
shown in the next page

===============================================================
TRANSFORMER TRIPPED
MALFUNCTIONED
UNFIT FOR USE
ROUTINE TESTS SHOW

DEVIATION FROM PAST
BENCHMARKS
ANALYSIS OF
DATA
SELECTED
TESTS
MONITOR
FAILURE INDICATION
DATA COLLECTION
NO
YES
PROBLEM
YES
RETURN TO SERVICE
NO
DAMAGE IS
OBVIOUS
TESTING
SELECTED TESTS
YES
REPAIR
FOCUSSED
TESTS
ANALYSE TEST
RESULTS
TESTING
SCRAP
INTERNAL INSPECTION
ANALYSIS
FIELD
REPAIR
NO
FACTORY
REPAIR
YES
PROBLEM
FOUND
YES
YES
PERFORM CORRECTIVE
ACTION
NO
NO
FURTHER
TESTING
DISASSEMBLY
ANALYSIS

===============================================================
8.4
Emergency response for

unexpected events
In case of any emergency
concerning potential threat to
human life and/or towards loss or
damage to assets and properties,
following steps are to be followed.
1) Do not panic.
2) De-energize the transformer.
3) Trip the circuit breaker to trip the
transformer from line.
4) Switch on the fire fighting system in
case any fire is detected. Also keep
all fire fighting equipments ready
and call fire fighting personnel.
5) Do not go near the transformer or
touch any parts until authorized
service personnel do not arrive.
8.5
Energizing transformer after fault.

Follow all the steps that are followed
during pre-operational checks and
energizing of transformer.

===============================================================
SECTION - 9
End of life disposal

===============================================================
9.1
Planning for disposal
9.3
Environmental safety
When the transformer has reached

the end of its useful life, it is
important to ensure that it is
disposed of activity is done in a safe
and secure way without damage to
environment. Once the decision is
reached to scrap the transformer,
the following steps may be followed.
9.3.1
The oil from the transformer is

removed in a safe way and stored in
containers for reprocessing. Ensure
that there is no spillage of oil into
the environment or water drainage
systems.
9.3.2
The core laminations and the

copper windings shall be separated
out
carefully
for
further
processing/scrapping.
9.3.3
The insulation components are

soaked in transformer oil and are
potentially inflammable. Hence they
should be incinerated in controlled
conditions, avoiding leakage of
hazardous
fumes
to
the
atmosphere.
9.3.4
Particular attention shall be paid

while
handling
transformers
contaminated with PCB if any.
Agencies having experience in
disposal of PCB in line with the local
protocols should be contacted.
Important: Since these events

may occur many years after the
writing of this manual, it is
important for the user to consult
latest the safety and regulatory
requirements at the time of
disposal.
9.1.1
Assessment of physical condition, to

decide the location and method of
dismantling.
9.1.2
Identifying major materials which

can be separated out and the
cost/benefit of the operation.
9.2
Human safety
9.2.1
Ensure that the persons are

equipped with all the tools and
protective equipments to safeguard
them from injury during the
dismantling process
9.2.2
The dismantling operation shall be

carried out in a location which is
approved by the local authorities
9.2.3
Ensure that the persons are well

aware of the general construction of
the transformer components, to
avoid injuries due to heavy objects
and sharp edges.

10.1 Transformer Details

Sl.
No.
Description
Details
1)
Transformer type
POWER
2)
Applicable standard
IEC 60076
3)
Rating (MVA)
80 MVA
4)
Voltage ratio (kV)
220 / 13.8 / 6.9 kV
5)
No of phases / frequency
3 ph / 50 Hz
6)
Vector group
YNyn0d1
7)
Type of cooling
ONAN / ONAF
8)
Tapping details
+10% to -10% in steps of 0.625%

10.2 List of Approved Drawings
Sl.
No.
Description
Drawing No.
1)
Outline and General arrangement
T61B010412F
2)
Foundation detail
T63B062422Q
3)
Transport Outline
T64B082421Q
4)
Rating and Diagram plate
T62B080933H
5)
245kV/1600A RIP Bushing (HV)
2751377 - 10
6)
73kV/2000A Oil Communating Bushing (HVN)
2751362 BBBr1
7)
24kV/3150A Bushing (LV & LVN)
H - 0385
8)
24kV/5000A Bushing (TV)
H - 0382
9)
Valve Location Plate
T62B082423Q
10)
Schematic Wiring Diagram of Transformer Cooler

Control
T30B110412E
11)
LV Cable Box
T60B082424Q

10.3
List of Reference Drawings
Sl.No.
Description
Drawing No.
1.
Buchholz Relay Pipe Work
T57B086189Q
2.
List of Fittings
T62B088768Q
3.
Tag Identification Drawing
T57B086192F
4.
Pipe Work Assembly
T57B086187F
5.
Safety Hand railing
T57B086214H

10.4 List of Brochures

1)
Operating Instruction for OLTC MR GERMANY
Leaflet
2)
Installation and Maintenance Instructions of

Temperature Indicators (WTI/OTI) perfect control
make.
Leaflet
3)
Transformer Temperature Indicator (WTI/OTI)
Leaflet
4)
Tech. Specification on Temperature Detector (RTD

System) Perfect Control Make.
Leaflet
5)
Pressure Equalizing Between OLTC & tank
T005-0497
6)
Plate Valve Assembly
T010-0497
7)
Gas and Oil Actuated Relay
T016-0497
8)
Silica gel Breather
T020-0799
9)
Magnetic oil level gauge
T025-0497
10)
Gas Collecting Device
T029-0897
11)
Constant Oil Pressure System (COPS) Conservator
T034-0201
12)
Long Term Storage of Gas Filled Main Unit &

Accessories
T035-0998
Smart Monitor
Operation and Maintenance Manual
www.siemens.com.br/energia/tlm
SM Operation and Maintenance Manual | April 2012
ndice
1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................. 1-1

1.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1
Data processing structure .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2
Monitored Variables ...................................................................................................1-3
1.1.3
Storage strategy ......................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2
MODELS AND CORE MODULE..................................................................................................... 1-6
WEB PAGE .................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1
GENERAL SCREENS ...................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1
Login ...........................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2
Home........................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.3
General Functions ...................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2
EQUIPMENT MENU ................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.1
Equipment selection...................................................................................................2-4
2.2.2
Main variables.............................................................................................................2-5
2.2.3
All variables.................................................................................................................2-6
2.2.4
Charts ........................................................................................................................2-10
2.2.5
Duvals triangle .........................................................................................................2-13
2.2.6
Diagnostics................................................................................................................2-14
2.2.7
System Events...........................................................................................................2-17
2.2.8
Notes .........................................................................................................................2-22
2.2.9
Maintenance .............................................................................................................2-22
2.2.10 Maintenance - History ..............................................................................................2-24
2.2.11 Parameters ................................................................................................................2-24
2.3
E VENTS MENU .......................................................................................................................2-30
2.4
CONFIGURATION MENU ..........................................................................................................2-31
2.4.1
User ...........................................................................................................................2-31
2.4.2
Change Password .....................................................................................................2-33
2.4.3
Status ........................................................................................................................2-34
2.4.4
Loaded modules .......................................................................................................2-34
SENSORS .................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1
TEMPERATURES ........................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1
Pt100 (ambient temperature).................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1.1 Technical data............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1.2 General procedures and maintenance ......................................................................3-1
3.1.2
Pt100 (oil temperatures) ............................................................................................3-1
3.1.2.1 Technical data............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2
LOAD CURRENT........................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.1
SIMEAS T .....................................................................................................................3-2
3.2.1.1 Technical data............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3
COOLING GROUP CURRENT ........................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.1
MCR-SL-S .....................................................................................................................3-4
3.3.1.1 Technical data............................................................................................................. 3-4
HARDWARE ................................................................................................ 4-1

4.1
IM151-8 PN/DP CPU INTERFACE ............................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1
Technical Data ............................................................................................................4-3
4.2
ET200S I/O SYSTEM ............................................................................................................... 4-3
Siemens 2012. E T TR TLM.
4.3
SIMATIC MICROBOX IPC ......................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.1
Technical Data ............................................................................................................4-5
4.3.2
Basic software ............................................................................................................. 4-5
II
Important Information
Safety Notices
Security warnings in general are disposed prominently by the text and may or may not be preceded by
markings, depending on its level of criticality.
Indicates critical point in the installation and / or system configuration.
Do not install or operate the equipment without first carefully reading the operating manual.
Updated Information
Updated information about the product is found or can be requested via:
Internet http://www.siemens.com.br/energia/tlm
Fax: +55 11 4585-1278
Smart Monitor customer support:
Email: monitoramento.transformadores.br@siemens.com
Phone: +55 11 4585-1100
About the manual
This manual describes the Smart Monitor and all its functions. The availability of the functions described
is linked to the presence of appropriate sensors and the project itself.
Product disclaimer:
The customer expressly understands and agrees that Siemens and its subsidiaries, affiliates, directors, employees,
gents, partners and licensors shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, consequential or
exemplary damages, including but not limited to, lost profits, goodwill, use, data or other intangible losses (even if
Siemens has been advised the possibility of such damages), resulting from: (i) the use or misuse of the Smart
Monitor system, (ii) the cost the acquisition or replacement of goods and services resulting from any goods, data,
information and services obtained or transactions resulting from the use of the system, (iii) the failure or damage
of any transformers their property, or (iv) any problem with the Smart Monitor system. The liability of Siemens and
its subsidiaries, affiliates, directors, employees, agents, partners and licensed for any direct damage caused by its
proven guilty will be limited to 10% (ten percent) of contract value.
General Description 1-1
General Description
1.1 Introduction
Smart Monitor expert system primarily aims to aid the user with the registration and assessment of
relevant data pertaining to early detection of incipient fault formation inside the transformer. The system
helps prevent major and catastrophic failures by providing vital lead time in order to plan Smart Monitor
recommended actions or even, at its extreme, transformer replacement, at a minimum overall cost which
can include system disturbance cost, energy not served cost, failure cost, etc.
1.1.1 Data processing structure

Smart Monitor is a transformer expert system, based on multiple engineering models (mathematical
formulations to assess transformers physical parameters) which are implemented using the logic
structure for data flow and analysis illustrated in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Generic structure of data processing.

According to Figure 1-1, the data flow process is:
Phase 1 Data input

On-line data incorporated into Smart Monitor database and integrated with off-line values previously
configured on the system (transformer profile, parameters, limits, etc.).
Phase 2 Calculation
The data is processed by the engineering models applicable to the specific monitored variables. For more
details about all available models on the system go to item 1.2.
Phase 3 Data Assessment
Objective data analysis performed based on acquired data processed by the engineering models in order to
assess possible deviations from normality and to determine the significance of such deviations.
Smart Monitor also correlates the present value of a given variable (or acquired parameter) to its historical
behavior which is duly stored into the database.
Phase 4 Diagnostic
In case a deviation is detected and a significant level of importance is also attributed to the parameter by
Smart Monitor expert knowledge, then the user is notified of such an occurrence. Before sending an alarm
message, however, Smart Monitor implements a historical investigation of all possible correlated variables
which could influence the observed deviation and also makes that correlation available to the customer.
Phase 5 Recommendation
On detecting an incipient disturbance or deviation from normality and its relative importance, Smart
Monitor also generates a set of recommendations (e.g. on detecting a high rate of rise of combustible gas
formation inside the transformer main tank Smart Monitor immediately recommends confirmation
through a complete off-line Dissolved Gas Analysis to be carried out by the customer), particularly with
respect to maintenance and operation criteria, to mitigate the problem.
Phase 6 Prognostic
Smart Monitor notifies the user about the implications of keeping the current operation conditions,
particularly on keeping the faulty variable at the current level or rate of increase.
Phase 7 Trend
When applicable, the statistical behavior of variables is compared to their acceptable limits. The system
then informs possible trends which will lead to future alarms in case the current conditions are retained`.
1.1.2 Monitored Variables

This section describes the individual values monitored by the Smart Monitor, expert system and their
significance in gaining in-depth knowledge about the transformer operating conditions. The sensors or
IEDs required for each of them are optional. The software is configured to include them and the
respective engineering models.
Dissolved gas in oil
The main sources of dissolved gases in the transformer oil are thermal and electric in nature and
generally relate to a minimum level of disturbance. Usually, fault gases are associated to continuous gas
generation (relative increase) and to certain absolute levels that are indicative of a problem. Results are
confirmed by laboratory investigations.
Moisture in oil
Excess of moisture in oil leads to accelerated ageing of the isolation materials, reducing their isolation
capability. Usually, the mechanical resistance of the isolation is reduced as its water content increases.
Also, the thermal deterioration rate is proportional to the water content. It has been demonstrated that
the water contained in the paper may escape under the form of steam bubbles. These bubbles may move
with the oil flow, or get trapped inside the windings, in both cases breaking the isolation.
Temperatures (ambient, top and bottom oil) and load current
The load capability of power transformers is limited principally by the winding temperature. But the true
limiting factor is the hottest winding section, since the winding temperature isnt uniform over its extent.
This section is called winding Hot Spot and it is located around the top of the winding. The Hot Spot
temperature may be determined by a mathematical model with ambient temperature, top and bottom
temperatures and the load current as inputs.
The isolation temperature is the main cause of transformer ageing. The cellulose isolation undergoes
despolymerization, caused by temperature and time. As the cellulose chain becomes smaller, the
mechanical properties of the paper, like traction resistance and elasticity are degraded. Its possible that
the paper becomes fragile and is incapable to withstand the short-circuit forces and the normal
vibrations. This is points to the end of the life of the solid isolation, thus determining the end of
transformer life.
The hot spot monitoring allow taking advantage of cold ambient temperature, to extend the transformer
lifetime, providing the capacity of urgent overload.
Oil flow
The knowledge of oil flow on the pump pipe is necessary to assure the correct cooling of the circulating
oil inside the transformer.
Cooling system current
The measurement of fans and pumps current is necessary to verify the correct operation of each fan and
pump group.
Measurement of voltage or current at the tap of the bushing
Bushing failures usually occur in a sequence of small defects which impose the loss of intermediary
capacitive layers, frequently caused by short-circuit between two conductive aluminum sheets. This
progression is irreversible and provokes the elimination of one capacitive layer thus causing an increase in
the overall capacitance of the bushing. By monitoring the voltage or current on the capacitive tap
(voltage or test tap) of the bushings, it is possible to verify the variation on the capacitance relative
deviation between the phases and identify a possible fault.
Oil Level
The knowledge of oil level is necessary to calculate the total volume of the transformer oil. By comparing
this measured oil volume to the calculated (determined by the oil temperatures), possible oil leaks on the
transformer tank can be detected.
1.1.3 Storage strategy

In order to optimize the memory usage on the servers (hard disk) and avoid large amount of
inconsequential data Smart Monitor does not store every data point received (frequency recording).
Instead, it defines a threshold for each variable above/below which this variable should be stored (event
recording).
The limit defined for each variable is shown on the table below:
Table 1-1 Standard threshold of monitored variables

Variable type
Standard threshold
Voltage
1% of nominal voltage (kV)
Overvoltage
1 kV
Load current
5% of nominal current (A)
Temperature
2 C
Relative capacitance deviation
0,1 %
Power
10% of nominal power (MVA)
Individual gases (C2H2, H2, etc)
1 ppm
Combined gases
5 ppm
Moisture in oil (relative saturation) 1%

Moisture in oil
1 ppm
Ageing rate
0,1 p.u.
Oil level
5%
Oil volume
100 liters
Air/oil flow on cooling groups
10%
Tap changer position
1 position
Tap changer number of operation 1 operation
1.2 Models and Core Module

Core Module, responsible for the execution of the mathematical models performs data handling in the
Smart Monitor expert system. The Core Module also generates the charts, makes the variables available
on the pages, calculates variables which are not handled by any model, issues system self-diagnostics
and manages all diagnostics and system events.
The models are responsible for the calculation of the relevant variables, evaluation of trends and
correlation between the input parameters (online and offline), issuing diagnostics and recommending
actions when an abnormality is detected. Data treatment will be done by mathematical models that
allow the correlation between several input parameters, inferring diagnostics and indicating
recommended actions when an anomaly is detected. Based on the scope of the project the following
models are available with Smart Monitor.
Table 1-2 Models available on Smart Monitor.
Model
Main Functions
Bushing relative
Evaluation of bushing insulation condition, based on online and statistical learning.
capacitance deviation
Insulation moisture
Evaluation of oil moisture condition and estimated moisture in paper, including trend analysis.
Load Guide
The system calculates the future expected hot spot with the user defined values and actual operations
conditions, assisting in equipment load management.
Thermal
Hot spot evaluation by ANSI / IEC and Siemens methods.
Ageing and life

expectancy
Evaluation of relative loss of life and relative ageing by ANSI, IEC or ABNT methods.
Cooling System
Checks the adequate cooling system operation by monitoring the load current of the fan groups and
oil/water flow (depending on the cooling system)
Conservator oil
volume
Allows the incipient fault indication before reaching the lowest acceptable level, comparing the
estimated insulating oil volume in the conservator based on the transformer temperatures distribution
with the calculated volume based on the oil level sensor indication.
Cooling Control
Only by defining the desired transformer operation temperature, this model controls the cooling system
calculating the future hot spot as a function of the current loading. Also factored in is the number of
hours of fans and pumps usage, in order to balance the wear of each group (rotational use).
Additionally, the system executes periodical cooling groups exercise.
LTC Monitoring
Monitoring of average and maximum power on each tap change in order to detect alteration on the
motor drive torque. Acceptable limit for each tap position is defined based on learning of tap transitions.
It also calculates the wear of contacts.
Combined dissolved
gas-in-oil
Dissolved gas-in-oil ratios, trends and limit values evaluation, based on an online statistical learning.
Three-gas online
Chromatography
Evaluation and indication of incipient faults using standardized methods, including the Duvals triangle.
Evaluates ratios, trends and limit values, based on an online statistical learning.
Eight-gas online
Chromatography
Evaluation and indication of incipient faults using standardized methods, including the Duvals triangle.
Evaluates ratios, trends and limit values, based on an online statistical learning. Includes the evaluation
of the CO2/CO concentration ratio, for enhanced troubleshooting.
Web Page 2-1
Web Page
In this section, all available pages of the Smart Monitor website are detailed with comments to ease the
system usage. All functions available in the Smart Monitor Software are presented and some may not be
available with the purchased software configuration due to its scope. Smart Monitor web pages are not
automatically refreshed and if necessary the function key F5 can alternatively be used..
When entering or modifying parameters of the system, the exclamation signal (!) may come
up at right of a data field, indicating an improper or out of limits value.. In this case, enter an
appropriated value to proceed.
2.1 General Screens

2.1.1 Login
Selection of the
languages available
for SM web site
To open this initial windows, open
a new web browser tab, type
Smart Monitor IP address or DNS
name (if available within the
intranet) and enter.
After typing Login and Password,

click here to connect to Smart
Monitor.
Figure 2-1 Login

Internet Explorer must be 6.0 or higher and Java plug-in available for charts.
Web Page 2-2
If a user does not have a Login and Password, the customer system administrator must be
contacted. Usually SIEMENS provides a initial system administration login/password and then various
users can be created (refer to 2.4). If the customer system administrator does not have a Login and
Password, contact the vendor at Siemens.
2.1.2 Home
Home page provides information for each monitored equipment, the latest active diagnostic and system
event. These messages remain active until they are acknowledged. Diagnostic messages relates to the
transformer condition or status. System Events relates to autodiagnostic of Smart Monitor software and
hardware issues, including sensors or IEDs, communication, cabling and panel (like open door
microswitch or an opened circuit breaker). If there are no active diagnostics and/or system events, No
occurrence caption shall be displayed under the Description column. In case the equipment is on
Maintenance mode (see item 2.2.9 for more details), system indicates Maintenance under Description.
From this page, the user can access the diagnostic/event of any equipment or use the menu on top of
the page to access other pages.
Smart Monitor
status
Click on the menu

items to access the
respective page
Click on the text in column

Description to access the
diagnostic/event page
Figure 2-2 Home.
Web Page 2-3
The operation status can indicate:

Online: Smart Monitor service is running normally.
Offline: Smart Monitor service is stopped. Turn off the SM microbox (microcomputer) and
restart. Wait 5 minutes and if the status remains the same, contact Siemens for support.
No service: The service used to publish the Smart Monitor page is not communicating with the
system data bank. Turn off the SM microbox (microcomputer) and restart. Wait 5 minutes and if
the status remains the same, contact Siemens for support.
Maintenance: The selected equipment was set to Maintenance mode. If the maintenance has
been finished, change the maintenance mode (refer to section 2.2.9).
2.1.3 General Functions

The screen below illustrates details of the system which are available during navigation:
Click here to log off from

Smart Monitor website
Click here to print the

currently displayed
page
Connected user name
Figure 2-3 General Functions.
Click here to access

Smart Monitor manual
Web Page 2-4
2.2 Equipment Menu

After selection of the monitored equipment, the left side Menu becomes available.
2.2.1 Equipment selection

This page shows the Substation and the transformer Denomination. A brief description of the equipment
nameplates data and main characteristics - are displayed for surely identify the transformer.
Menu
After selecting the substation and
transformer denomination, the
rated nameplate and main
characteristics are displayed for
surely identify the unit
Click Confirm to proceed.
Figure 2-2 Equipment selection

Note: Smart Monitor is intended to monitor only one transformer at a time although this page includes the
Substation and Transfomer Denomination with scroll down box. The reason is due to the software code
which is exactly the same for TMDS multiple transformers and substations monitoring , only preparing
a different configuration.
Web Page 2-5
Main variables
The screen provides a picture of the equipment with current values of the main variables super imposed
over the transformer picture. This page is automatically updated every minute. The automatic log off
after 5 minutes dont apply here.
Figure 2-3 Main variables.
Web Page 2-6
2.2.2 All variables

All Variables page shows directly measured and calculated variables by the engineering models, and
displays the the last value stored in the system database.
Figure 2-4 All variables.

The variables are joined in groups to ease the visualization. The following table lists all variables that can
be monitored by the system with an indication of its group. The table also lists the origin of each
variable. This page can be easily configured for each project according to customer preference and of
course according to the available sensors and models.
Web Page 2-7
Table 2-1 All variables.

Group
Variable
Voltage
Phase-to-ground voltage - HV
kV
Bushing sensor
Voltage
Phase-to-ground voltage - LV
kV
Bushing sensor
Voltage
Phase-to-ground voltage - Phase A - HV
kV
Bushing sensor
Voltage
Phase-to-ground voltage - Phase B - HV
kV
Bushing sensor
Voltage
Phase-to-ground voltage - Phase C - HV
kV
Bushing sensor
Voltage
Phase-to-ground voltage - Phase A - LV
kV
Bushing sensor
Voltage
Phase-to-ground voltage - Phase B - LV
kV
Bushing sensor
Voltage
Phase-to-ground voltage - Phase C - LV
kV
Bushing sensor
Overvoltage
Overvoltage HV
kV
Bushing sensor
Overvoltage
Overvoltage - LV
kV
Bushing sensor
Overvoltage
Overvoltage phase A - LV
kV
Bushing sensor
Overvoltage
Overvoltage phase B - LV
kV
Bushing sensor
Overvoltage
Overvoltage phase C - LV
kV
Bushing sensor
Overvoltage
Overvoltage phase A - HV
kV
Bushing sensor
Overvoltage
Overvoltage phase B - HV
kV
Bushing sensor
Overvoltage
Overvoltage phase C - HV
kV
Bushing sensor
Capacitance
Relative capacitance deviation - HV
Bushing model
Capacitance
Relative capacitance deviation - LV
Bushing model
Capacitance
Relative capacitance deviation phase A - HV
Bushing model
Capacitance
Relative capacitance deviation phase B - HV
Bushing model
Capacitance
Relative capacitance deviation phase C - HV
Bushing model
Capacitance
Relative capacitance deviation phase A - LV
Bushing model
Capacitance
Relative capacitance deviation phase B - LV
Bushing model
Capacitance
Relative capacitance deviation phase C - LV
Bushing model
Current
Current HV
Current transducer
Current
Current LV
Current transducer
Current
Tertiary Current
Current transducer
Power
Power
Temperatures
Smart Monitor local panel temperature
RTD sensor
Temperatures
Core temperature - Measurement 1
RTD sensor
Temperatures
Core temperature - Measurement 2
RTD sensor
Unity
MVA
Origin
SM Core Module
Web Page 2-8
Temperatures
Top oil temperature - Measurement 1
RTD sensor
Temperatures
Top oil temperature - Measurement 2
RTD sensor
Temperatures
Bottom oil temperature - Measurement 1
RTD sensor
Temperatures
Bottom oil temperature - Measurement 2
RTD sensor
Temperatures
Ambient temperature
RTD sensor
Temperatures
Hot spot temperature HV - Calculated
Thermal model
Temperatures
Hot spot temperature LV - Calculated
Thermal model
Temperatures
Tertiary Hot spot temperature - Calculated
Thermal model
Temperatures
Hot spot temperature HV - Measured
FO Direct measurement
Temperatures
Hot spot temperature LV - Measured
Temperatures
Tertiary Hot spot temperature - Measured
Temperatures
Water temperature
RTD sensor
Gas in oil
Hydrogen - H2
ppm
Gas sensor
Gas in oil
Methane - CH4
ppm
Gas sensor
Gas in oil
Acetylene - C2H2
ppm
Gas sensor
Gas in oil
Ethylene - C2H4
ppm
Gas sensor
Gas in oil
Ethane - C2H6
ppm
Gas sensor
Gas in oil
Carbon Monoxide - CO
ppm
Gas sensor
Gas in oil
Carbon dioxide - CO2
ppm
Gas sensor
Gas in oil
Oxygen - O2
ppm
Gas sensor
Gas in oil
Nitrogen - N2
ppm
Gas sensor
Gas in oil
Total Dissolved Combustible Gases (TDCG)
ppm
Gas model
Gas in oil
Gas in oil
ppm
Gas sensor
Moisture
Oil moisture (relative saturation)
Moisture
Oil moisture
Moisture
Gas/moisture sensor
ppm
Moisture model
Moisture in paper at hot spot
Moisture model
Moisture
RSoilper_calc
Moisture model
Moisture
Woil_calc
Moisture model
Moisture
Wcell_cold_bot_insul
Moisture model
Moisture
Wcell_cold_top_insul
Moisture model
Moisture
Wcell_bot_cond_insul_surf
Moisture model
Moisture
Wcell_top_cond_insul_surf
Moisture model
Moisture
Wcell_ bot_ cond_ insul
Moisture model
Moisture
Wcell_top_cond_insul
Moisture model
Web Page 2-9
Moisture
Wcell_avg
Moisture model
Moisture
GPAOIL
bar
Moisture model
Moisture
Temp Bubble
Moisture model
Ageing
Relative aging rate - IEC
p.u.
Thermal model
Ageing
Relative aging rate - ABNT
p.u.
Thermal model
Ageing
Relative aging rate - IEEE
p.u.
Thermal model
Ageing
Aging hours
Thermal model
Loss of life
Accumulated aging rate - IEC
p.u.
Thermal model
Loss of life
Accumulated aging rate - ABNT
p.u.
Thermal model
Loss of life
Accumulated aging rate - IEEE
p.u.
Thermal model
DECT
TAP position
Position indicator
Oil level
Oil level of main tank conservator
Oil level indicator
Oil level
Oil volume calc. as function of oil level
liters
Oil level model
Oil level
Oil volume calc. as function of temperature

distribuition in the tank and conservator
liters
Oil level model
LTC
Oil level of LTC conservator
Oil level indicator
LTC
TAP position
Position indicator
LTC
LTC motor current
Current transducer
LTC
LTC oil temperature
RTD sensor
LTC
Operations number of LTC
LTC model
LTC
LTC oil moisture
Moisture sensor
Cooling
Air flow - Fan group 1
Flow sensor
Cooling
Flow sensor
Cooling
Flow sensor
Cooling
Flow sensor
Cooling
Flow sensor
Cooling
Flow sensor
Cooling
Current - Fan Group 1
Current transducer
Cooling
Current transducer
Cooling
Current transducer
Cooling
Current transducer
Cooling
Current transducer
Cooling
Current transducer
Cooling
Hour counter - Fan group 1
SM Core Module
Web Page 2-10
Cooling
SM Core Module
Cooling
SM Core Module
Cooling
SM Core Module
Cooling
SM Core Module
Cooling
SM Core Module
Cooling
Oil flow - Pump 1
Flow sensor
Cooling
Oil flow - Pump 2
Flow sensor
Cooling
Oil flow - Pump 3
Flow sensor
Cooling
Oil flow - Pump 4
Flow sensor
Cooling
Oil flow - Pump 5
Flow sensor
Cooling
Oil flow - Pump 6
Flow sensor
Cooling
Hour counter - Pump 1
SM Core Module
Cooling
SM Core Module
Cooling
SM Core Module
Cooling
SM Core Module
Cooling
SM Core Module
Cooling
SM Core Module
2.2.3 Charts
In the Charts page, the user can select as many variables as needed, using a scrolling menu of all
variables. In order to ease the visualization not more than 3 variables should be selected at a time.
Selecting more than 3 can be useful only for downloading the values to a .csv file.
Web Page 2-11
Select the period

Click the onscreen icon
double arrow to
generate the chart
Selection of other
transformers
Selection of
variables
Click on the link

to open the values
table
Figure 2-5 Charts

To select (or unselect) multiple variables for the chart, hold down the Ctrl key before toggling the
mouse left button over the item. Variables from other monitored transformers can be selected for
comparision purposes. Select the period and click the onscreen button double arrow to generate the
chart. . Every time the selections of variables or period are changed, it is necessary to click the onscreen
button double arrow to update the chart selections.
To zoom a portion of the chart, hold the left button of the mouse, drag the desired region and then
release the button. To zoom in, drag from the left to the right and to zoom out, drag from the right to
the left.
Values Table link opens a window with all values selected for the chart in a tabular format. From there, it
is possible to export the data in a .csv file by clicking on the link Export shown below. Before
downloading the file, the operational system software will open a window to choose the local, directory
and file name.
Figure 2-6 Data table.
Web Page 2-12
Web Page 2-13
2.2.4 Duvals triangle

This feature is only available for Smart Monitor configurations with dissolved gases in oil device capable of
measuring the Duvals triangle key gases (CH4, C2H2 and C2H4). The red dot indicates the region of fault
based on current gas concentrations and grey dots the previous concentrations.
Duvals Triangle can only indicate the type of an ongoing fault, for any concentration of its key
gases. The diagnostic of an incipient fault need additional analysis, like concentration of gases,
trends, transformer fingerprints for comparison, etc. Do not make conclusions based only on Duvals
triangle.
Figure 2-7 Duval triangle
Web Page 2-14
2.2.5 Diagnostics
This page shows all the Diagnostics issued by the system for this transfomer. Diagnostics are related to
the transformer condition while system events are related to the monitoring hardware and software.
Each engineering model of Smart Monitor analyses accordingly the data available by filtering the raw
data from sensors/IEDs, storing values, performing statistics, learning from previous collected data, trend
calculations, comparison with proven or standardized limits and correlation with other variables. The aim
of the models is to indicate a possible fault or a developing fault as early as possible. In order to detect
these incipient faults sometimes is not possible to avoid false positives. By default, clicking on
Diagnostics link on the side menu, the system will show only the active diagnostics (not yet
acknowledged by any user). To view all diagnostics - active and acknowledged - issued by the system
click on the onscreen Enable filters button and select the box All Diagnostics.
Figure 2-8 Enable diagnostic filter.
Select the period
Figure 2-9 Performing diagnostics filtering
Web Page 2-15
Select the desired period and click the onscreen icon double arrow to perform the search.
To detail each diagnostic, click on View link to open a new window. Here we can find the description of
the diagnostic event, the prognostic or further analysis, recommended actions and if applicable, the
detected trend.
Figure 2-10 Diagnostic presentation.

To include comments to the issued diagnostic, just type the desired text in the white box and click on the
button Save Comments. There is no limit for the number of added comments.
It is recommended to acknowledge the diagnostic just after the issue has been properly addressed, the
measurement values returned to normal conditon and comments have been inserted. Dependign on an
Web Page 2-16
expert technician analysis, some condfigured values can be changed because it can be normal for this
transformer fingerprint.
In case the conditions for a diagnostics persist after the acknowledgement the system will
issue the same diagnostic with values which could be newly calculated.
Generate Report button allow to Open or Save a report of this specific diagnostic.
Choosing Open, the system will open a new window to display the report in .html format, with all the
diagnostic information, including the added comments. To print it, click on the Print link.
Figure 2-11 Diagnostic report
Web Page 2-17
2.2.6 System Events

System Events are related to the monitoring hardware and software and are generated by the Smart
Monitor Core Module. It can be triggered by any problem with sensor/IEDs integrated to the monitoring
system, malfunction of the computers or inconsistence of the calculations of the engineering models.
This page allows access to System Events issued for the selected equipment only (to visualize System
Events from all monitored equipment go to item Table 2.2).
By default, clicking the link System Events link on the side menu, only the active system events will be
shown. Active are those whose condition/alarm still persist. To visualize all system events - active and
inactive -, toggle the Enable filters button and then select the box All Events. Afterwards, select the
desired period and click the onscreen icon double arrow to perform the search.
Unlike Diagnostics, the system events do no require acknowledgement. It will automatically turn inactive
as the issue has been solved.
Figure 2-12 Enabling System Events filtering.

The list of all events includes one line for the date/time when the system event turned active
and another line for the date/time when it was released (inactive). Hence, when All events is
selected, take care of not interpreting a released event as active.
Web Page 2-18
Figure 2-13 System events.

To help the user to identify the root cause of the problem, the system indicates the origin of the event
detected on the column Origin shown above:
Table 2-2 Available System Events on Smart Monitor and recommenedd actions.
LTC sensors
Bushing sensor
Origin
Description
Recommended actions
Bushing monitoring device

- Action alert
This event is obtained directly from the bushing sensor and is related to the bushing
conditions. For more details, refer to the sensor manual

- Warning alert
conditions. For more details, refer to the sensor manual.

- Information alert

- System fault
This event is obtained directly from the bushing sensor and is related to the sensor
Communication failure
with bushing monitoring
device
Ensure that there is communication between local and central panel. In case this
communication is faulty, this event will come up among others. If the communication
is established, verify if the bushing sensor is on and the LEDs of the respective module
on ET200s are blinking. If not, check the wiring and the power supply.
Communication Failure
TM100
is established, verify if TM100 sensor is on and the LEDs of the respective module on
ET200s are blinking. If not, check the wiring and the power supply.
Output overflow - Oil level

indicator LTC
Output overflow - Motor
current sensor - LTC
Wire break - Oil level
indicator LTC
Wire break - Motor current
sensor - LTC
Turn the respective circuit breaker off and insert an ammeter in series with the ET200s
module that is causing the event. Be careful not to short-circuit the module terminals.
Turn the circuit breaker on and measure the current. If it is out of 4-20mA range, the
sensor may be defective. If it is within this range, the ET200s module may be
defective.
is established, verify if TM100 sensor is on and the LEDs of the respective module on
Load Current sensor
Output overflow - Load

current sensor HV
current sensor LV
current sensor - Tertiary
Wire break - Load current
sensor HV
sensor LV
sensor - Tertiary
Web Page 2-19
Turn the circuit breaker on and measure the current. If it is out of 4-20mA range, the
defective.
Verify if the sensor is on and the wiring between the ET200s module and sensor is ok.
If so, turn the respective circuit breaker off and insert an ammeter in series with the
ET200s module that is causing the event. Be careful not to short-circuit the module
terminals. Turn the circuit breaker on and measure the current. If it is below 4mA, the
sensor may be defective. Otherwise there may be a fault on the ET200s module.
Open circuit breaker - 24V

DC power supply
Breakers
Open circuit breaker - AC

power supply
Open circuit breaker - Gas
in oil monitoring device
Open circuit breaker Bushing monitoring device
Make sure there is communication between local and central panel. In case this
is established, try to close the circuit breaker. If it goes off again, make sure there is no
short-circuit on the wiring from the circuit breaker and all components on the circuit
are functional.
Gas in oil sensor
Open circuit breaker Light, heater and fan from

local panel
Hydran sensor alarm System failure
This event is obtained directly from Hydran and is related to the sensor conditions. For
more details, refer to the sensor manual.
Hydran sensor alarm - Gas

high
This event is obtained directly from Hydran and is related to the gas in oil conditions.
For more details, refer to the sensor manual.
Hydran sensor alarm - Gas

high-high
This event is obtained directly from Hydran and is related to the gas in oil conditions.
For more details, refer to the sensor manual.
Hydran sensor alarm Moisture in oil
This event is obtained directly from Hydran and is related to the moisture in oil
Helium low pressure Siemens Gas-Guard
Verify the pressure of helium cylinder. If it is around 150 psi, it should be replaced.
with gas in oil monitoring
device
is established, verify if the gas sensor is on and the LEDs of the respective module on
Output overflow - Hydran

sensor
Turn the circuit breaker on and measure the current. If it is out of 4 - 20mA range, the
defective.
Wire break - Hydran sensor
Web Page 2-20
Cooling system
sensors
Control cubicle signals
Oil level indicator
Smart
Monitor
IM151-8
Power relay - Siemens GasGuard
is established, verify that the power supply of the gas sensor is ok.
Programmable relay Siemens Gas-Guard
This event is obtained directly from Gas Guard and can be related to the sensor or gas
in oil conditions. For more details, the sensor manual shall be verified.
Verify if the IM151-8 is connected.
Local panel door open
Verify if the local panel door is open. Make sure there is communication between local
and central panel. In case this communication is faulty, this event will come up among
others. If necessary, verify wiring and status of micro-switch responsible for this
alarm.
Output overflow - Oil level

indicator - Main tank
defective.
Wire break - Oil level

indicator - Main tank
High Pressure
This event is related to the protection system of the transformer.
Low Pressure
OLTC blocked
Protection - Buchoolz Alarm
Protection - Buchoolz - Trip
Protection - Tank pressure

relief - Trip
OLTC Overpressure
Transformer Overpressure
Empty Tank
Output overflow - Current

sensor of fan group 1, 2, 3,
4, 5 or 6
defective.
Output overflow - Air flow

sensor of fan group1, 2, 3,
4, 5 or 6
Output overflow - Oil flow

sensor of pump1, 2, 3, 4, 5
or 6
Wire break - Current sensor
of fan group 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or
6
Wire break - Air flow sensor
of fan group1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or
6
Web Page 2-21
defective.
Wire break - Oil flow sensor

of pump 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
Output overflow - Hot spot

temperature HV, LV or
Tertiary
Temperature sensors
Output overflow - Core

temperature - Spot1 or 2
defective.
Wire break - Ambient or

local panel temperature
sensor
Wire break - Hot spot
temperature HV, LV or
Tertiary
Wire break - Core
temperature - Spot 1 or 2
Wire break - Bottom oil
temperature - Sensor 1 or
2
Wire break - Top oil

temperature - Sensor 1 or
2
Local panel temperature
above maximum limit
Moisture sensor
Output overflow Temperature - Moisture in

oil sensor
Output overflow - Relative
humidity - Moisture in oil
sensor
Wire break - Temperature Moisture in oil sensor
Wire break - Relative
humidity - Moisture in oil
sensor
Make sure local panel fan is working properly and the temperature sensor is not
defective. If no problem is found, the cooling of this panel may be redefined.
defective.
defective.
Web Page 2-22
2.2.7 Notes
This function allows the user to record general comments and notes regarding modifications or changes
made to the monitoring system or the monitored equipment. All the comments eventually added to
diagnostics are also available at this section.
After typing the note,

click here to save it.
Figure 2-14 Adding notes.
2.2.8 Maintenance
If the user clicks on the Start Maintenance button, the Smart Monitor system would be taken off line,
then the user would enter what maintenance activity was performed on the Smart Monitor system. This
function must be used every time an action that may lead to interference with the monitoring system is
being taken. The purpose is to avoid improper alarms and data recording.
Web Page 2-23
Figure 2-15 Starting maintenance.

To Start Maintenance click the onscreen button and the status indicator of this transformer will change
to Maintenance and the values in Main Variables and All Variables will be frozen with the last readings,
in order to show the last situation before the maintenance period. From this moment on, the data
acquisition/recording and diagnostic/event issuing will be paused.
Additional information/comments can be added during maintenance status condition, without breaking
this condition. Type the information/comments and click onscreen button Save message.
To end the maintenance status condition, type a brief description (obligatory) and click onscreen button
Stop maintenance.
Figure 2-16 Stopping maintenance.
Web Page 2-24
2.2.9 Maintenance - History

Use this link to view all maintenance periods that were recorded in the system for this transformer.
2.2.10 Parameters
This page shows the parameters used by Smart Monitor engineering models and also, for authorized
users, the modification of them.
Inadequate modifications of parameters can cause erroneous calculations and diagnostics.
Figure 2-17 Changing parameters.

After the modification of any parameter, it is necessary to click the onscreen button Modify at the
bottom of the page in order to confirm the modification. Here you are not just saving new values but
introducing new behavior to the system.
Web Page 2-25
i.
Parameters Transformer
The basic transformer parameters are shown below:
Table 2-3 Thermal Model parameters

Parameter
Description
Origin
Un.
Default
Serial number
Transformer serial number. For identification purpose.
Nameplate
NA
Technical data
Transformer description and caractheristics.

identification purpose.
NA
Energization date
Transformer first energization date. Used in ageing

model.
date
NA
Nominal voltage
Rated voltage (at center tap) of the transformer HV.
(phase-to-ground)
Nameplate
Used in various models.
HV
kV
NA
Nominal voltage
Nominal voltage of the transformer LV. Used in
(phase-to-ground)
Nameplate
various models.
LV
kV
NA
Voltage HV (phaseto-phase) for ratio
Used for HV/LV voltage ratio calculation (*).
Nameplate
kV
NA
Voltage LV (phaseto-phase) for ratio
Used for HV/LV voltage ratio calculation (*).
Nameplate
kV
NA
High Voltage
Current CT Max
Range
Highest current value of HV CT primary. Related to

secondary current of 5A. For example, a TC ratio of
Nameplate
600/5A has max range of 600. For a TC ratio of 600/1A
the max range must be 3000.
NA
High Voltage
Current CT Min
Range
Lowest current value of HV CT primary. Value is 0

Nameplate
(zero). For compatibility purpose.
NA
Low Voltage
Current CT Max
Range
Highest current value of LV CT primary. Related to

secondary current of 5A. For example, a TC ratio of
Nameplate
1200/5A has max range of 1200. For a TC ratio of
1200/1A the max range must be 6000.
NA
Low Voltage
Current CT Min
Range
Lowest current value of LV CT primary. Value is 0 (zero).

Nameplate
For compatibility purpose.
NA
For Nameplates values

and customer tags
(*) Specific for CenterPoint project.The ratio is used to estimate the HV line current from LV line measured
current. HV line current is not measured but necessary for the thermal model calculations.
Web Page 2-26
Parameters Cooling Control Model

For the cooling control, the following parameters must be configured:
Table 2-4 Parameters Cooling Mode
Parameter
Description
Hot-spot temperature for

control
Reference temperature for the cooling control

model. It estimates the steady state hot spot
temperature for all cooling mode and compares
with this reference. The cooling mode which has
the closest steady state hot spot temperature of
this reference is then selected. Hence the cooling
groups are activated accordingly. If the
calculated ongoing hot spot temperature
surpasses this value the cooling groups are also
activated and only deactivated when the
temperature is return to a value lower than this
reference. There is no hysteresis (see next item)
Origin of value
Default
85C
minutes
30 min
minutes
30 min
days
7 days
Customer choice
The default value
is considered low
by Siemens, but
has been adopted
for compatibility
with usual
customer choice.
Delay time for cooling groups control being

revaluated (activation or deactivation) by the
Minimum working period
Customer choice
cooling control model. It is necessary to avoid
excessive activation/deactivation.
Interval of time the cooling groups will remain
Duration of cooling exercise activated during the periodic exercise. Preventive Customer choice
maintenance purposes.
To adjust how frequent all the cooling groups
Time interval between
will be activated for preventive maintenance
Customer choice
exercises
purposes.
ii.
Un.
Parameters Thermal Model

The table below shows all necessary parameters for Smart Monitor Thermal Model:

Parameter
Description
Un.
Default
Model for hot spot

calculation
Hot spot temperature algorithm calculation selection

(IEEE, IEC or SIEMENS model). When using Dynamic Customer choice
Loading Guide, select Siemens model for compatibility.
NA
SIEMENS
Maximum winding
temperature
Limit for the highest (among the windings) hot spot Based on standard
temperature, directly measured or calculated. A recommendation or
diagnostic will be issued as an alert.
customer choice
120C
Maximum aging
rate
Limit of ageing rate for issuing a diagnostic as an alert.
Based on standard
recommendation or
customer choice
p.u.
2.7 p.u.
Maximum
accumulated loss of
life
Loss of life prior to
the monitoring
(ABNT NBR, IEC or
IEEE)
Limit of equivalent aging factor (refer to IEEE standard).

For issuing a diagnostic as an alert. Some authors use
the term accumulated loss of life in p.u.
Equivalent aging factor from the period since the first
energization date and the start date of the on-line
monitoring system. For compatibility 3 standards are
available, although they can be considered equal by
Based on standard
recommendation or
customer choice
p.u.
1.2 p.u.
Evaluated by the
customer according
to the standard
p.u.
NA
Origin
Web Page 2-27
approximation. For example if the transformer has

been in operation for any number of years at exactly
110C (hot spot temperature and using thermally
upgraded paper), this value is 1.0. If the hot spot
temperature is 89C, this value is 0.1.
Monitoring start
date
Start date of monitoring on the selected equipment.

Used to include the loss of life prior to the monitoring to the Aging hours.
Maximum ambient
temperature
Maximum expected ambient temperature of the site. Customer input.

Used for calculations within the Thermal Model.
Estimated.
date
NA
NA
105C
p.u.
1.3 p.u.
p.u.
1,3 p.u.
Supplied by the
manufacturer.
Should be
mentioned and used
in the heat run test
report.
1.3
Supplied by the
manufacturer or
estimated from the
routine test report..
NA
kW
NA
kW
NA
Choice of the
customer and based
on standards.
Choice of the
Limit of Load factor for issuing a diagnostic. The same
Maximum operation
customer based on
limit is applicable to HV, LV and tertiary currents of each
overload
technical design and
cooling mode.
operational pratices
Maximum top oil
temperature
Maximum design
overload
Hot Spot Factor

(HV, LV or Tertiary)
Winding Eddy
Losses (HV, LV or
Tertiary)
Limit of top oil temperature for issuing a diagnostic.
Load factor above which a diagnostic will be issued.

Supplied by the
This limit is applicable just for the cooling mode of
manufacturer
greatest power.
Ratio of hot spot and average winding-oil gradient
temperature. For some and average radientValue .
Essential for an adequate estimation of the hot spot
temperature. They are different for each winding and if
not available from the manufacturer refer to IEC 600767 for a default value.
The percentage of eddy losses over the ohmic losses of
the winding. As the temperature increases, the ohmic
losses increases and the eddy losses decreases. To
correct the temperature gradients (copper-oil and oil
longitudinal) at a certain temperature of the windings
the model need to evaluate the losses being dissipated
by them. With this parameter this evaluation is
improved.
Core Losses at 100%

of rated voltage
Core Losses at 110%
of rated voltage
Used to improve the estimations of the Dynamic

Routine test report
Loading Guide.
Used to improve the estimations of the Dynamic
Routine test report
Loading Guide.
Standard for loss of

life diagnostic
Loss of life is calculated according to IEC, IEEE and ABNT

standards. This selection only defines which of them Customer choice
will be considered for a diagnostic.
IEEE
Paper type
Used to select the aging rate and loss of life formulas

from Standards. If the specified hot spot temperature Technical data of the
rise is 80C (110C if the ambient is 30C), the cellulosic transformer
insulation is thermally upgraded.
NA
Web Page 2-28
iii.
Parameters Cooling Modes

For each cooling mode and each winding, the following parameters must be configured to achieve an
adequate estimation of hot spot temperature:
Table 2-6 Parameters Cooling Mode

Parameter
Reference losses
Exponent for cooling

system temp. calculation
Average oil time constant
Description
Rated total losses at which other parameters are
referenced. Used in the Dynamic Loading Guide
to estimate the cooling system average oil
temperature rise over ambient in steady state
load.
Used in the Dynamic Loading Guide to estimate
the average temperature rise over ambient of
the cooling system in steady state for the new
load.
the ongoing cooling system average temp. oil
rise over ambient by the transitory thermal
model.
Or average temperature rise over ambient at the

reference losses above mentioned.
the cooling system average oil temperature rise
over ambient in steady state for the new load.
Or rated top oil minus the bottom oil temp. in
the cooling system(radiators) at the reference
Longitudinal gradient of oil losses mentioned above.
temp. in the cooling system Used in the Dynamic Loading Guide to estimate
the cooling system bottom oil temperature after
corrected by the transitory thermal model.
Exponent for winding
Used to calculate the new steady state copper-oil
temp. calculation
temperature gradient on each winding and then
the hot spot temperature
Average increase of oil
temperature in the cooling
system
Longitudinal time constant

of the windings oil
Percent of total eddy losses
Rated current HV, LV or

Tertiary
Rated average copper-oil

gradient HV, LV or Tertiary
Time constant of the exponential temperature

rise/decay of the longitudinal oil temperature
gradient in the ducts of the windings. Used for
hot spot partial calculations acc. to the
transitory thermal model
The percentage of total additional losses (eddy
and stray of the active part) over the ohmic
losses of all the windings together. Used to
correct the sum of winding losses at a certain
temperature in the Dynamic Loading Guide.
Reference currents for other parameters below.
Used to calculate the load factor on windings,
necessary for hot spot partial calculations.
At the reference current above for each winding.
Used as partial calculation of the hot spot to
estimate the the copper-oil gradient on each
winding in steady state of the ongoing load
factor and then corrected by the transitory
Origin of value
Un.
Default
Equipment heat
run test
kW
NA
Standard IEEE
C57.911995/2002
ONAN: 0,8
ONAF: 0,9
ODAF: 1,0
Extracted from
heat run test
report or
calculated acc.
Standards and
weights from
nameplate.
minutes
NA
Heat run test

report.
NA
Heat run test

report.
NA
ONAN: 0,8
ONAF: 0,8
ODAF: 1,0
minutes
NA
Routine test report

or heat run test
report.
NA
Heat run test

report.
NA
Heat run test

report.
NA
Standard IEEE
C57.911995/2002
Extracted from
heat run test
report. Can be
also estimated as
1/5 of the oil time
constant.
Web Page 2-29
thermal model.
Oil rated longitudinal

gradient HV, LV or Tertiary
Winding time Constant HV,

LV or Tertiary
Reference losses HV, LV or

Tertiary
At the reference current above for each winding.

Used as partial calculation of the hot spot to
estimate the the longitudinal oil temp. gradient
Heat run test
C
in winding oil ducts at steady state of the
report.
ongoing load factor and then corrected by the
transitory thermal model.
Extracted from
heat run test
Time constant of the exponential temperature
report. Can be
rise/decay of the copper-oil temperature
also estimated
minutes
gradient. Used for hot spot partial calculations
acc. to IEC 60076acc. to the transitory thermal model
7. Usually 5-15
min.
At the rated current above mentioned.
Used in the Dynamic Loading Guide as part of
Routine test report
the estimation of the total losses after load
or heat run test
kW
factor and temperature correction. The result is
report.
part of the calculation of the cooling system
average oil temperature rise over ambient.
NA
NA
NA
Web Page 2-30
iv.
Parameters Cooling Group (fans)

On this item, besides hard limits for cooling diagnostics, it is possible to modify the hour counter of each
cooling group. To do so, type the new value for the counter at Hour counter field and click Modify at the
end of the page see table 2-6.

Parameter
Maximum current
Minimum current
Period for
maintenance
Number
v.
Description
Maximum cooling group normal current. In general
close to the rated current of each fan times the number
of fans. It can be evaluated on-site and an adequate
tolerance be added in order to guarantee a correct
diagnostic without false positives. A diagnostic will be
issued if the measured value is above this limit.
Can be calculated by subtracting the current of one fan
from the evaluated minimum current of the group of
fans during on-site measurements. A diagnostic will be
issued if the group current is lower than this limit.
Partial operation time of the group of fans which
requires maintenance action. A diagnostic will be
issued.
Number of fans per group.
Origin
Un.
Default
Technical data of
equipment
NA
Technical data of
equipment
NA
Technical data of
equipment
hour
30000 hours
NA
Origin of value
Un.
Default
Customer choice
based on
Standards
120C
Customer choice
based on
Standards
hour
2 hours
Customer choice
NA
Dynamic Loading Model

For dynamic loading mode, the following parameters must be configured:
Tabla 2-8 Dynamic Loading Model parameters.

Parameter
Description
Maximum hot-spot temperature to be reached

after the Loading period in emergency below at
Maximum temperature of
the load calculated by the Dynamic Loading
hot-spot in emergency
Model. In fact the model consider this
temperature to iteractively calculated the
maximum final load in a emergency situation.
Maximum time period for the overload
Loading period in
calculated by the Dynamic Loading Model in
emergency
order to reach the above configured hot spot.
The Dynamic Loding Model can increase the load
linearly from the ongoing load to a final load,
How to increase the current
which is the output of the model. Alternatively it
can increase directly to the final load (step).
2.3 Events Menu

On this menu it is possible to access Diagnostics and Events of all monitored equipments.
Web Page 2-31
Figure 2-18 Visualization of diagnostics from all monitored equipments.

The column marked above identifies the equipment of each Diagnostic or System Event. Each page lists 10
Diagnostic/Events. If the diagnostic/event to be visualized is not on the first page, click on the desired page
number as indicated on the figure below.
Click on the page number to

access older diagnostics/events
Figure 2-19 Pages of diagnostics/system events.
2.4 Configuration Menu

Following are the pages that can be accessed using the Configuration menu.
2.4.1 User
This item is only available for users with Administrator privileges.
On this item, it is possible to add new users of the system, search existent users, include email address for
notification of diagnostics and system events and change the level of access for existing users.
The figure below illustrates the fields that can be used to refine a search. After defining the search
criterion, click on Refine list. To visualize all existent enabled users, choose Enable on Status and click on
Refine list without adding any other search criterion.
Web Page 2-32
Fields for search

criterion
Click here to
execute the search
Click here to add a

new user
Figure 2-20 Searching and adding users

To create a new user, click on Create. The following screen will come up:
Figure 2-21 New user entry.

For Login, enter the name that will be used to login onto Smart Monitor and for User name, type the
entire name of the user.
Choose Enable for Status selection in order to allow the user to access the system. Choose one of the
following access levels for the new user under the Group field. The available levels are:
Visitor: Can view monitored variables, charts, diagnostics and parameters.
Monitor: Has the Visitor rights and additionaly can acknowledge Diagnostics, export data, start
maintenance and change parameters.
Web Page 2-33
Administrator: Has the Monitor rights. Additionally can create or delete users and change
equipments (item 2.4.3).
On Password and Password confirmation fields enter the password according to the following Standards:
The first letter must be capital.
Must contain at least one numeric character.
Must contain at least one symbol within dot (.), comma (,) and asterisk (*).
Examples:
Aaa11.aa
Peter.123
E-mails list: e-mail addresses which will receive the notification whenever there is a new diagnostic/event
available or there is a diagnostic acknowledgement. To include more than one address use comma (,) to
separate them.
E-mail notification box: The user can be enabled or disabled for receiving the notifications e-mails.
Finally, choose whether the password shall expire or not on the selection box Does the password expire?
If Yes is chosen, the password will expire in 90 days.
After entering all data, click on Save.
The Access to the database of the system is legally limited to five (5) users. Above this limit,
it is necessary to acquire additional licenses.
2.4.2 Change Password

All users can modify their passwords.
Figure 2-22 Changing user password.

Fill in the blanks and click on screen button Modify password to confirm.
Web Page 2-34
2.4.3 Status
This item is useful when eventual maintenance or remote access is required. Under normal operation, the
status on the first line will display Waiting for next solicitation and on the second line it will show Active.
Figure 2-23 System status.
2.4.4 Loaded modules

This information is useful for upgrading and tracking features and bugs already solved in the
system, although SIEMENS maintains this information for each supplied system.
Figure 2-24 Loaded modules on the system.
SM Operation and Maintenance Manual | December 2010
Sensors 3-1
Sensors
3.1 Temperatures
3.1.1 Pt100 (ambient temperature)
It consists in a RTD sensor (Resistance Thermometer Detector), 100 Ohm at 0 C type, encapsulated in a
steel tube. Installed inside Smart Monitor panel.
3.1.1.1 Technical data

Typical range:
Communication with SM:
Protection:
-40C to +100C
RTD Analog
IP65
3.1.1.2 General procedures and maintenance

Pt100 sensors dont need specific maintenance procedure.
3.1.2 Pt100 (oil temperatures)

It consists in a RTD sensor (Resistance Thermometer Detector), 100 Ohm at 0 C type, encapsulated in a
steel tube and assembled in an aluminum wiring box Figure 3-1. It allows the measurement of the top
and bottom oil temperatures.
Figure 3-1 Pt100 for oil temperature.
Sensors 3-2

Operation range:
Tube length:
Protection:
-50C to +300C
80mm
RTD analog
IP55

Pt100 sensors dont need specific maintenance procedure.
3.2 Load Current

3.2.1 SIMEAS T
The passive SIMEAS T transducer converts the alternating input current (from the secondary of a CT) to a
load-independet direct output current. The input and output are highly insulated (5 kV) and auxiliary
power is not required .
Figure 3-2 SIMEAS T working principle.

Transformer (1) transmits the input signal IE via the rectification and smoothing circuit (2) to the signal
evaluation (3), which controls the output amplifier (4). Supplied by the smoothing module, the output
amplifier delivers a load independent current IA, proportional to the input signal IE. The protective circuit
(5) provides the output with open circuit and transient overvoltage protection.The measuring range of the
alternating voltage transducer with expanded end range is adjusted via the expansion circuit (6).
The sensor is installed in the transformer main control cubicle to avoid cabling of the secondaries of the
TCs from main control cubicle to Smart Monitor, increasing safety to the circuitry open secondaries may
damage bushing CTs and/or connections.
For more information, consult the sensor manual
Sensors 3-3
Figura 3-3 SIMEAS T.

Model:
Provider:
Insulation:
Short duration current withstand
Accuracy:
Power/Working range:
Temperature:
Nominal frequency:
CT nominal current:
Setting time (t99):
Protection:
7KG6111-3EK10 (60Hz) / 7KG6111-2EK10 (50Hz)

Siemens AG
Ueff= 5.5 kV 50Hz U= 5kV 1.2/50us (input against output)
200A for 1 s
Ien to 0,05Ien : <0,5%
0,9VA maximum / 0.05Ien to 1.2Ien
-10C to +60C
50 Hz or 60 Hz
5A
Analog 0..20mA
<1 second
IP40

SIMEAS T doesnt need specific maintenance procedure.
Before any intervention in the current measurement circuit, short-circuit the secondary of the
bushing CT at the main control panel.
Sensors 3-4
3.3 Cooling Group Current

3.3.1 MCR-SL-S
MCR-SL-S is a current measuring transducer for sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal alternating currents. The
input current is from 0 to100 A, with loop-powered output with 4...20 mA Figure 3-4.
The sensor has a switch to control the current input range. The transducer is installed in the main control
cublicle, near the cooling group circuitry. The output signal is sent to the monitoring system.
For more information, consult the sensor manual see section 2.1.3.
Figure 3-4 MCR-SL-S transducer.

Model:
Provider:
Power supply:
Operation temperature:
Frequency range:
CT nominal current:
Precision:
Setting time (t99):
Protection:
MCR-SL-S-100-I-LP
Phoenix Contact
24VDC
-20C to +60C
30 600Hz
50, 75 and 100A with a switch selector
Analog 4..20mA
<1%
<340ms
IP20

MCR-SL-S doesnt need specific maintenance procedure.
SM Operation and Maintenance Manual| April 2012
Hardware 4-1
Hardware
4.1 IM151-8 PN/DP CPU Interface
The IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU interface module is an "intelligent preprocessor for TMDS software". It
decentralizes control tasks, has all the PLC functionalities and can be integrated to ET200S I/O system
modules.
Figure 4-1 IM151-8

The IM151-8 program, which is edited with Siemens STEP 7 language, controls all the IO cards connected
to the sensors/devices. It perform the readings, converts the readings into engineering values and filters
the the converted values. The filters algorithms remove spurious, overflow/underflow, outliers values in
accordance with the behavior of each device marking them as unavailable. The PLC program is loaded
into a memory card and thus can be easily inserted in a new hardware if necessary to replace. The
communication with the Microbox is via PROFINET port (P1/P2/P3 ports are internally connected to an
ethernet switch).
Hardware 4-2
Table 4-1 IM151-8 general description.

Position
1
2
Description
RJ45 socket (port 1 of the PROFINET)
R: Ring port for creation of ring topology with media redundancy.
RJ45 socket (port 2 of the PROFINET interface)
R: Ring port for creation of ring topology with media redundancy.
RJ45 socket (port 3 of the PROFINET interface)
Mode selector switch
Status and error displays of the IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU interface module
Status displays of the PROFINET interface
Slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Connection for supply voltage
The Figure 4-1 and the Table 4-1 show a general view of IM151-8. The table 4-2 and 4-3 present the mode
select settings and the error leds.
Table 4-2 Mode selector switch settings.
Posicin
Description
RUN
The IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU interface module processes the user program.
STOP
The IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU interface module does not process the user program
MRES
Mode selector switch setting for

Memory reset of the IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU interface module
Backing up the firmware to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Resetting to the as-supplied state
A memory reset using the mode selector requires a number of steps to be carried out in a set order.
Table 4-3 General status and error displays of the IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU interface module.
LED
Color
Description
SF
Red
BF-PN
Red
MT
ON
Yellow
Green
FRCE
Yellow
Group fault for hardware or software error

Lit: Bus fault (no cable connection to a subnet/switch; cable break or short-circuit).
Flashes: Check IP addresses ; failure of a connected IO device
Maintenance information
Supply voltage for the IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU
LED is lit: Active force job
LED flashes at 2 Hz: Node flash test function.
RUN
Green
IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU in RUN

The LED flashes during STARTUP at a rate of 2 Hz, and in HOLD state at 0.5 Hz.
STOP
Yellow
IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU in STOP or in HOLD or STARTUP

The LED flashes at 0.5 Hz when the CPU requests a memory reset, and during the reset at 2 Hz.
Note: engineering configuration issues are not included once the system has already worked before.
Hardware 4-3
4.1.1 Technical Data

Model:
Provider:
Power supply:
Work memory (RAM):
Memory card:
Bit rate:
Communication:
Communicaton with Microbox:
6ES7151-8AB01-0AB0
Siemens AG
24VDC
192kB
2MB
10...100Mbps
MPI/DP and PROFINET
RJ-45 (female)
4.2 ET200S I/O System

The ET200S distributed I/O system is a discretely modular, highly flexible DP slave for connection to
process signals on a central controller or a field bus. ET200S supports field bus types PROFIBUS DP and
PROFINET IO. ET200S has protection class IP 20. Depending on the interface module, each ET200S can
consist of up to 63 modules - for example, power modules, I/O modules, and motor starters.
These modules are connected to the IM151-8 and translate the sensor data in PROFIBUS/PROFINET
compatible data for communication.
The Table 4-4 shows all modules that can be found in Smart Monitor.
Table 4-4 ET200S Modules.
Type
Analog
Analog
Digital
Digital
Serial
Serial
Power Source
PROFIBUS DP
0..20mA / 4..20mA
RTD
Input
output
Modbus RTU
Modbus ASCII
24VDC
-
Module Name
2AI
2RTD
4DI
4DO
USS
ACSII
PM-E
DP Master
Input / Output
2
2
4
4
1
1
1
4.3 SIMATIC Microbox IPC

The SIMTAIC Microbox IPC is an industrial PC system for high-performance and space-saving applications in
particular in the field of machine, systems and control engineering.
Hardware 4-4
Figure 4-2 SIMATIC Microbox IPC (front).
Figure 4-3 SIMATIC Microbox IPC (rear).

The Table 4-4 describes the Microbox components shown in the Figure 4-3.
Table 4-5 Location of connection elements SIMATIC Microbox IPC
Position
Designation
Description
1
2
3
4
24 VDC
DVI/VGA
USB
PN/IND. ETHERNET
PN/IND. ETHERNET
Connection for a 24 V DC power supply.

DVI/VGA connection for CRT or LCD monitor with DVI interface.
4 USB 2.0 connections, high-speed / low current.
RJ45 Ethernet connection 1 (exclusive PCI interrupt) for 10/100/1000 Mbps.
RJ45 Ethernet connection 2 (shared PCI interrupt) for 10/100/1000 Mbps (not for
PROFINET versions).
PROFIBUS DP/MPI
PROFIBUS DP/MPI interface (RS 485 electrically isolated), 9-pin D-Sub socket.
COM1
PE Terminal
Serial port (RS232) 9-pin D-Sub connector.

The PE terminal (M4 thread) must be connected to the protective ground
conductor of the plant, in which the device is to be installed. The minimum
conductor cross-section may not be less than 2,5 mm2.
4.3.1 Technical Data

Model:
Provider:
Power supply:
Main memory:
Processor:
Instalation / mouting:
SIMATIC Microbox IPC427C

Siemens AG
24VDC
4 GB DDR3-SDRAM SODIMM
Intel Pentium Core 2 Duo 1.2 GHz, 800 MHz FSB, 3 MB SLC
DIN rail
4.3.2 Basic software

Microsoft Windows Embedded 5.1
Microsoft IIS 5.1
Java RTE 6
Microsoft SQL Server Express 2005 or 2008
Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 / 2.0 SP2 / 3.0 SP2 / 3.5 SP1
Microsoft ASP.NET 2.0 Ajax extensions 1.0
SIMATIC NET V6.3
Smart Monitor TMDS software V 2.16
Microsoft IE 7.0 (other internet browsers are compatible).
Hardware 4-5
SIEMENS
GAS-Guard 8 and GAS-Guard 3

Site Preparation Guide
810-1733-00 Rev A
Corporate Office: +1 (800) 880-2552

Technical Support: +1 (866) 273-7763
E-mail: support@serveron.com
Copyright 2006 Serveron Corporation
All rights reserved
Serveron, TrueGas, and LoadGuide are registered trademarks of Serveron Corporation.

All other trademarks, registered trademarks, service marks, and trade names are the
property of their respective owners.
810-1733-00 Rev A
GAS-Guard 8 and GAS-Guard 3 Site Preparation Guide
Table of Contents
Customer Information............................................................................................................................................ 3
Transformer Information ................................................................................................................................................ 4
Transformer Oil ................................................................................................................................................................ 4
Required Photographs..................................................................................................................................................... 4
Product Overview................................................................................................................................................... 5
Environmental Conditions .................................................................................................................................... 6
Items Needed for Installation................................................................................................................................ 7
Configured Items ............................................................................................................................................................. 8
Optional Accessories ....................................................................................................................................................... 8
Site Preparation Procedure .................................................................................................................................... 9

Choosing an Oil Supply and Return Port...................................................................................................... 10
Oil Supply Port............................................................................................................................................................... 10
Bleed Fixture/Oil Return Port...................................................................................................................................... 11
Choosing a Mounting Location....................................................................................................................... 12

Mounting Stand.............................................................................................................................................................. 12
Mounting the Stand to a Concrete Pad ....................................................................................................................... 12
Transformer or Wall Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 13
Mounting to the Transformer or Wall......................................................................................................................... 13
Providing power ............................................................................................................................................... 13

Determining need for Oil Inlet Cooler ........................................................................................................... 14
Choosing a Communication Interface & Protocol........................................................................................ 14
Connections - Power, Sensor and Communication cables .......................................................................... 15
LoadGuide.......................................................................................................................................................... 16
Oil Moisture and Temperature (optional) ..................................................................................................... 16
Helium Cylinder ............................................................................................................................................... 16
Ordering Helium............................................................................................................................................... 16
Ordering Stainless Steel Tubing and Required Fittings .............................................................................. 17
Site Checklist...................................................................................................................................................... 18
Appendix................................................................................................................................................................ 19
GAS-Guard Dimensions .................................................................................................................................. 19
Concrete Pad Layout ........................................................................................................................................ 20
Wire Termination Drawing ............................................................................................................................. 21
Helium Specification and Ordering Information ......................................................................................... 22
Helium Suppliers ........................................................................................................................................................... 22
Tubing Specification and Ordering Information .......................................................................................... 23

Tubing Suppliers ............................................................................................................................................................ 23
Shipping Containers ......................................................................................................................................... 24
1 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Table of Figures
Figure 1: Oil circulation and gas extraction schematic ...................................................................................... 5
Figure 2: Installation schematic............................................................................................................................. 9
Figure 3: Oil Supply Port Assy............................................................................................................................ 10
Figure 4: Installed bleed fixture .......................................................................................................................... 11
Figure 5: GAS-Guard and mounting stand ....................................................................................................... 12
Figure 6: GAS-Guard wall mount....................................................................................................................... 13
Figure 7: Junction Box panel................................................................................................................................ 15
Figure 8: Overall dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 19
Figure 9: Concrete pad dimensions .................................................................................................................... 20
Figure 10: Wire termination drawing................................................................................................................. 21
Figure 11: Shipping containers............................................................................................................................ 24
Table of Tables
Table 1: Customer information form.................................................................................................................... 3
Table 2: Transformer information form ............................................................................................................... 4
Table 3: Transformer oil information form.......................................................................................................... 4
Table 4: Required photographs checklist............................................................................................................. 4
Table 5: Items shipped............................................................................................................................................ 7
Table 6: Configured Items...................................................................................................................................... 8
Table 7: Optional Accessories................................................................................................................................ 8
2 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Customer Information
In order to facilitate installation of your GAS-Guard, please fill out the following customer
information form and mail, fax, or e-mail it to:
mail:
Serveron Corporation
Attn: Customer Support
3305 NW Aloclek
Hillsboro, OR 97124 USA
fax:
+1 (503) 924-3290
e-mail:
support@serveron.com
Company
Installation Site
Site Address
City
State
Zip
Country
State
Zip
Country
Primary Contact
Title
Address
City
Phone
Mobile
Fax
Email
Pager
Secondary Contact
Title
Address
City
State
Zip
Phone
Mobile
Fax
Email
Country
Pager
Table 1: Customer information form
3 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Transformer Information
Make:
Type:
Year:
Years in Service:
kVA Rating:
kV Rating:
conservator
nitrogen blanketed
other:
Total Dissolved Gas (ppm):

(sum of all measured gases, including
nitrogen)
attach all available DGA data

Table 2: Transformer information form
Transformer Oil
gallons
Oil Capacity:
liters
Manufacturer:
Certified PCB free:
Type:
yes
no
Table 3: Transformer oil information form
Required Photographs
Attach photographs of the following items and illustrate them in the space provided:
Oil Supply Port
Note thread size and units of measure:
Oil Return Port
Note thread size and units of measure:
Control Panel
Mounting location of
GAS-Guard
Table 4: Required photographs checklist
4 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Product Overview
This section describes the basic operational essentials for the Siemens GAS-Guard and the most
common methods of collecting data.
The GAS-Guard technology from Siemens is a remotely deployed laboratory grade gas
chromatograph which can be safely installed on an energized or non-energized transformer.
The purpose of this Gas-Guard is to detect and measure fault gases found in electrical power
transformers insulating oil. The GAS-Guard is designed and constructed to resist
environmental conditions relevant to a transformer substation.
The GAS-Guard is a precision device. The heart of the GAS-Guard is a specially constructed gas
chromatograph designed to measure fault gases. Siemens offers two versions of products,
application dependant. The GAS-Guard 8 measures eight IEEE recommend fault gaseshydrogen (H2), oxygen (O2), carbon dioxide (CO2), carbon monoxide (CO), methane (CH4),
ethylene (C2H4), ethane (C2H6), and acetylene (C2H2). The GAS-Guard 3 measures the three
Duval Triangle fault gases- methane (CH4), ethylene (C2H4), and acetylene (C2H2). The GASGuard may be used on conservator or nitrogen blanketed transformers; however, in all cases the
sample of gas is extracted directly from the oil within the transformer.
Oil is circulated from the transformer to the GAS-Guard, and then returned to the transformer
through -inch O.D. stainless steel tubing. Stainless steel tubing is used in conjunction with
compression fittings to minimize the risk of leaks. The GAS-Guard is outfitted with an internal
gas extraction system which removes dissolved gases from the circulating transformer oil.
Helium is used as a carrier gas to help transport the extracted sample gases through the gas
chromatograph. The oil circulation and gas extraction paths in the GAS-Guard are shown
below.
Data is collected in the GAS-Guard each time a gas chromatograph (GC) analysis is completed.
The GC analysis takes approximately 40 minutes. Once an analysis has been completed, the
optional Serveron Monitoring Service (SMS) or GAS-Guard View software can be used to view
the GAS-Guards data. The GAS-Guard is set up to perform a sample analysis once every four
hours (default). All data captured during an analysis is stored on compact flash memory within
the GAS-Guard. The compact flash memory holds approximately (2) years of data. The GASGuard View software or Serveron Monitoring Service (SMS) will allow the end user to track the
gas ppm levels over time and monitor the gas levels against user defined caution and alarm
settings.
The GAS-Guard includes Ambient Temperature and LoadGuide sensing devices. An optional
Oil Moisture and Temperature sensor is
available along with spare 4-20ma inputs for
use with other external devices. External
sensor information can also be correlated
with fault gas information to allow a
Oil
Gas
Gas Chromatograph
Side
Side
complete diagnostic overview of the
transformers condition.
Gas supply to GC
Gas supply to GC
Gas Extractor
Unit
Oil Return to
Transformer
Oil Supply from
Transformer
Figure 1: Oil circulation and gas extraction schematic

5 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Environmental Conditions
The GAS-Guard 8 and GAS-Guard 3 are designed to operate within the following outdoor
conditions:
Altitude up to 4572 m
Humidity Range 5% to 95%
Temperature Range -50C to 55C
Installation Category II
Pollution Degree 2
Please note that the altitude, humidity, and temperature ranges indicated are considered
extended environmental conditions from the minimum ranges required by UL 61010-1, Clause
1.4.1.
6 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Items Needed for Installation

Upon receipt of your GAS-Guard it is important to verify the contents of the shipping carton
with the packing list. Inspect the contents Please notify Siemens directly if there are any signs of
damage that may have occurred in transit.
Part #
Description
140-0170-XX
Sunshield
250-0130-XX
(2) In-line Oil Filters, 1/4 SS Swagelok
250-0144-XX
(2) Nut and Ferrule Set, 1/4 OD, SS
252-0013-XX
(3) 10-32 Nut
253-0066-XX
(6) 10-32x3/8 Screw
254-0075-XX
(1) 1/4 Lock Washer
270-0004-XX
(1) Helium Dryer, Q5 Copper Catalyst (GAS-Guard 8 only)
290-0017-XX
(1) Verification gas cylinder (GAS-Guard 8 only) OR
290-0021-XX
(1) Verification gas cylinder (GAS-Guard 3 only)

Note: The verification gas cylinder is shipped separately from the
GAS-Guard because of UN1956 classified non-flammable gas shipping
requirements and may ship at a later date depending upon installation.
291-0014-XX
(2) Helium Dryer Mounting Clips (GAS-Guard 8 only)
292-0018-XX
(1) Helium Regulator, high purity, for cylinder valve type CGA-580
300-0004-XX
(1) LoadGuide, Current Transformer
456-0022-XX
(1) Valve, Oil Return Assy.
456-0023-XX
(1) Valve, Sample Port / Secondary Shutoff Assy.
456-0026-XX
(1) Oil Supply Port Assy.
610-0110-XX
(1) Cable, 14, RJ45, 8 Cond.
610-0121-XX
(1) Adapter Assy., RS232
750-0088-XX
(1) 10 Helium Supply Line (GAS-Guard 8 only)
750-0089-XX
(1) 120 Helium Supply Line
900-0080-00
(1) GAS-Guard 8 (115V) OR
900-0081-00
900-0083-00
900-0084-00
(1) GAS-Guard 3 (230V)
900-0053-XX
(1) Bleed Fixture
910-0025-XX
(1) GAS-Guard Software CD (English)
Includes Users Manual, Site Prep, Install, Ops & Maintenance Guides
Table 5: Items shipped
7 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Configured Items
Part #
Description
900-0064-XX
(1) Kit, Junction Box with Cables OR
900-0059-XX
(1) Junction Box
610-0179-XX
(1) AC Power Cable (black 3-wire)
610-0180-XX
(1) Sensor Cable (black)
610-0181-XX
(1) Communication Cable (gray)
900-0063-XX
(1) Kit, External 23 ft. Cables
610-0182-XX
(1) AC Power Cable 23 ft. (black 3-wire)
610-0183-XX
(1) Sensor Cable, 23 ft. (black)
610-0184-XX
(1) Communication Cable, 23 ft. (gray)
900-0057-XX
(1) Transformer Pad Mount OR
900-0066-XX
(1) Transformer Tank Mount
Table 6: Configured Items
Optional Accessories
Part #
Description
900-0082-XX
Kit , Oil Moisture and Temperature Sensor
900-0058-XX
Oil Inlet Cooler
900-0060-XX
GSM Cellular Modem, USA
900-0085-XX
GSM Cellular Modem, Europe
900-0062-XX
Kit, Fiber Optic Ethernet
900-0067-XX
Kit, Wireless Radio, Serial
Table 7: Optional Accessories
8 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Site Preparation Procedure

Site Preparation consists of the completing the following steps:
Choosing an oil supply and return port
Choosing a mounting location
Providing power
Determining need for (optional) Oil Inlet Cooler
Choosing a communication interface & protocol
Communication/Power/Sensor Cable Connections
LoadGuide
Moisture and Oil Temperature sensor (optional)
Ordering Helium
Ordering stainless steel tubing
Site Checklist
Figure 2: Installation schematic
9 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Choosing an Oil Supply and Return Port

The GAS-Guard removes oil from the transformer, analyzes the oil, and then returns the oil to
the transformer. The locations where the oil is removed (oil supply port) and returned (oil
return port) are vital for the accurate analysis of the gases within your transformer.
Typically, oil is removed at the top of the transformer, and returned at the bottom of the
transformer. The location of the oil supply port should produce a sample that is a well-mixed
representation of the transformer oil. In this section we will discuss how to select the locations
and what fittings are required.
CAUTION: Maximum Oil Inlet Pressure to the GAS-Guard is 45 psi (3 bar)
Oil Supply Port

An Oil Supply Assy, part # 456-0026-XX, is provided with the GAS-Guard. The assembly
consists of a 2 black iron tee, 2 x reducing bushing, plug, ball valve, and a NPT x
Tube fitting (see figure 3). The assembly is integral to the installation and commissioning
process to help remove air and bubbles from entering into the transformer tank when the
transformer oil supply port is opened.
It is important to sample oil from a location on the tank where the oil is constantly mixing in
order to provide a well-mixed representation of oil within the transformer. Typically a top tank
valve is used for the oil supply. For Nitrogen blanketed transformers the oil supply port must
be at least 6 below the transformers oil level at all times. If the optional Moisture and Oil
Temperature sensor is to be installed, please refer to the Moisture and Oil Temperature Sensor
section below for additional configuration of the oil supply port.
1)
Select an appropriate oil supply port on the transformer
2)
Verify the port valve is closed and remove any plugs or caps securing the end of the
port
3)
Thoroughly clean the inside of the port of any residue or pipe sealing compound
4)
Determine the thread size of the selected oil supply port
5)
Purchase the necessary nipple and reducing bushing, as required to

mount the 2 Oil Supply Assy, part # 456-0026-XX. Note: Depending
on the Oil Supply Port valve size, alternate parts can be purchased instead
of using the 2 assembly provided. If parts are purchased for the transformer
valve size, they must be black iron, brass or stainless steel and the street side
to the tee should be NPT.
6)
Install nipple and reducing bushing as required to the oil supply

port using Teflon tape or pipe dope. Note: It is important for the
street side of the tee be oriented in the vertical direction
Siemens does not recommend sampling oil from cooling loops or

pressurized oil passages; doing so may void the warranty.
Figure 3: Oil Supply Port Assy
10 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Bleed Fixture/Oil Return Port

Typically the bottom drain valve is used for the oil return port. The return port should not be
located on the transformer cooling system or any pressurized oil passage. An air bleed fixture
and bubble trap is required at the oil return port to allow air removal during commissioning of
the GAS-Guard. This fixture is referred to as a Bleed Fixture. The Bleed Fixture assembly is
included with the GAS-Guard.
1)
Select an appropriate oil return port on the transformer
2)
Verify the port valve is closed and remove any plugs or caps closing the end of the
port
3)
Thoroughly clean the inside of the port of any residue or pipe sealing compound
4)
Determine the thread size of the selected oil return port
5)
Acquire necessary fittings to attach the bleed fixture to the oil return port
Note: The Bleed Fixture is designed to fit on a 2 NPT nipple. When using the Bleed
Fixture, adapt the oil return port to accommodate a 2NPT female thread.
6)
Secure the bleed fixture to the oil return port using Teflon tape or pipe dope
Siemens does not recommend sampling oil from cooling loops or pressurized oil
passages; doing so may void the warranty.
Oil Return Assy

Part # 456-0022-XX
Figure 4: Installed bleed fixture
11 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Choosing a Mounting Location

The GAS-Guard should be located in a position where it will not interfere with transformer
maintenance or access requirements. The front of the GAS-Guard must be accessible for
commissioning and maintenance. There at two types of mounting types for the GAS-Guards;
pedestal mounting stand or transformer mounting kit.
Items to consider when choosing a location for the GAS-Guard are:
Location of oil supply and oil return ports
Location of power supply
Transformer maintenance points
Access to the GAS-Guard
Mounting of the GAS-Guard stand

The GAS-Guard must be mounted and operated in an upright position. Failure
to do so will void the warranty.
Mounting Stand
The Mounting Stand is a post style, requiring some assembly, and is intended to be mounted to
a concrete pad. The hardware required for assembly and fastening to the concrete pad are
included. Figure 5 illustrates a typical mounting. See the appendix for mounting and layout
dimensions. For stand assembly, refer to the GAS-Guard Installation Guide, part #
810-1732-XX.
Mounting the Stand to a Concrete Pad

1)
Position the stand in the predetermined mounting location
2)
Using the stand as a template, mark four holes onto the

concrete pad
3)
Remove the stand and drill four 3/8-inch x 3-inch deep holes
in the marked locations
4)
Insert the four 3/8-inch concrete anchors included with the

stand into the holes
5)
Position the stand over the four mounting bolts and secure
the stand checking to make sure the stand is plumb and level
6)
Tighten retaining nuts/concrete anchors
Figure 5: GAS-Guard and mounting stand
12 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Transformer or Wall Mounting

The transformer mounting kit includes the necessary hardware to mount the GAS-Guard,
junction box, helium dyer and helium cylinder to unistrut (unistrut is not included). Siemens
recommends using 1, 5/8-inch deep channel unistrut. To mount the GAS-Guard and its
components a quantity of two 4-foot lengths of unistrut are required. The figures below are
examples of tank and wall mount applications.
Mounting to the Transformer or Wall

1)
The bottom rung of unistrut must be mounted

a. A minimum of 40-inches from grade if the helium cylinder will be secured to
the unistrut.
b. A minimum of 12-inches above grade or water threat if helium will not be
secured to the unistrut.
2)
Secure the bottom unistrut rung in the predetermined mounting location in

accordance with the appropriate height suggested in item 1.
3)
Measure up from the center of the bottom rung 19.85-inches and mark the mounting
location for the second rung.
4)
Secure the top unistrut rung.
SIEMENS
GAS-Guard 8
Figure 6: GAS-Guard wall mount
Providing power
The GAS-Guard has a built-in AC to DC power converter and surge protector capable of
utilizing 115 or 230 VAC 15% (50/60Hz); 6A max. @ 115 V; 3A max @ 230V.
NOTE: Siemens recommends installing a properly rated and marked switch or
circuit breaker in close proximity to the GAS-Guard as a mains voltage
disconnect device.
13 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Determining need for Oil Inlet Cooler

The GAS-Guard operates with transformer inlet oil temperatures ranging between 0C to
+55C. If your transformer oil temperature frequently deviates outside of this range please
notify the Siemens technical support team for assistance in determining whether or not an Oil
Inlet Cooler is needed.
Choosing a Communication Interface & Protocol

The GAS-Guard offers a range of communication options. The GAS-Guard can communicate
over multiple interfaces and protocols simultaneously. The different communication options
are as follows:
Internal modem - connects to any standard analog phone line (POTS).
RS-232 - connection is provided to allow serial communications with an external

computer as well as interface to a cellular or external modem.
RS-485 - connection is provided.
Ethernet connection can be configured as DHCP or a static IP address. The

GAS-Guard is supplied with a copper interface. A fiber optic interface kit can be
purchased using part # 900-0062-XX.
Modbus or DNP3 connection can be configured over all hardware interfaces

including Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485, and modem. For more information regarding
these protocols, please contact Technical Support.
An active communication channel is required for Serveron Monitoring Service (SMS) or to enable
Siemens access for remote calibration and troubleshooting. All communications require an authenticated
username and password.
14 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Connections - Power, Sensor and Communication cables

The standard GAS-Guard package includes (3) short cables used in conjunction with the
Junction Box. If longer cables are required, 23 ft cables can be purchased as an option using part
# 900-0063-XX. Typically these cables are terminated at the junction box terminal strip that is
included with the standard GAS-Guard package or at the transformer control cabinet. If the
junction box was not purchased, a terminal strip will be required for cable termination. A 27position terminal strip is recommended for flexibility of wiring connections. Depending on the
wiring connections used, a larger terminal strip maybe required. See the appendix for the
recommended wiring diagram.
Cable names and part numbers;
Power Cable, (black 3-wire) #610-0179-XX or #610-0182-XX

115 to 230 VAC 15% (50/60Hz)
6A max @ 115 V; 3A max @ 230V
Communications Cable, (gray) #610-0181-XX or #610-0184-XX

Modem
Junction Box
RS-232
RS-485
Auxiliary 12VDC, 1A max. (isolated)
Sensor Cable, (black) #610-0180-XX or #610-0183-XX

LoadGuide (Transformer Load)
Programmable Relay (NO/NC/C)
Power Relay (NO/NC/C)
(3) 4-20mA inputs (2 used for optional Oil Moisture and Temperature)
Helium Pressure Switch (optional with regulator)
Figure 7: Junction Box panel
15 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
LoadGuide
The GAS-Guard LoadGuide can be used to correlate transformer load to transformer gassing.
The LoadGuide sensor consists of a current clamp that is placed over a 0 to 5 amp high or low
side CT. It is important that the CT give a good representation of total transformer load.
Transformer load will be displayed on a relative scale with 0 indicating no load and 100%
indicating full load. The standard cable length is 8 ft. Additional cable of 22 AWG or larger can
be added to the LoadGuide sensor cable if required.
Oil Moisture and Temperature (optional)

An optional sensor is available to provide oil moisture in parts per million (ppm) or as percent
relative saturation (%RS) and oil temperature (C). Depending on the location of the sensor, the
oil temperature can be representative of top oil temperature. It is recommended the Oil
Moisture and Temperature Sensor be installed on the top valve of the transformer. The
necessary adapters are provided with the moisture sensor to install the moisture sensor at the
Oil Supply Assy. If the moisture sensor will be installed in an alternative location, a reducing
bushing made from black iron, brass, or stainless steel may be required.
Helium Cylinder
The helium gas cylinder should be securely mounted to the GAS-Guard mounting stand or
some other permanent surface. A mounting bracket that meets all compressed gas cylinder
restraining requirements is provided. Siemens also provides the necessary 1/8-inch O.D. SStubing to connect the helium cylinder to the GAS-Guard.
Ordering Helium
Helium carrier gas is vital to the performance of the chromatograph within the GAS-Guard.
Using helium that does not meet the described specifications will substantially reduce the life of
the GAS-Guard and void the warranty. See the appendix for ordering information.
16 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Ordering Stainless Steel Tubing and Required Fittings

Stainless steel tubing is used to connect the GAS-Guard to the transformer for circulating the
transformer oil for measurement. The amount of tubing you will need to purchase is based on
the location of your GAS-Guard in relation to the valves on your transformer.
Note: Stainless steel is the only material that should be used. The use of any other tubing
material will void the warranty of your GAS-Guard.
It is recommended that the tubing between the transformer and the GAS-Guard be installed as
one continuous piece, reducing the possibility of oil leaks.
Listed below are items to consider when choosing where to route the tubing to the GAS-Guard:
Make sure tubing will not interfere with regular maintenance of the transformer
Avoid long unsupported tubing runs
Route tubing so that it will not be tripped over or damaged by activities in the
vicinity of the transformer
If the length of the oil supply or return path exceeds 20-feet, a 1/4-inch stainless steel
union will have to be purchased and on site at the time of installation
It is recommended that your tubing be secured every 2~4-feet using stainless steel
cable ties or other adequate clamps
Carefully measure the predetermined tubing route from the transformer oil supply port to the
GAS-Guard. Take into consideration any corners or other obstacles that may add to the overall
length of tubing. Tubing is typically supplied in 20-foot lengths and will require a union if any
section exceeds 20-feet. Determine the number of 20-foot lengths and unions required for the
installation. If the overall tubing length exceeds 50-feet supply and return contact Siemens for
assistance.
Tubing and fittings must be on site the day of installation. See the appendix for ordering
information.
17 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Site Checklist
The following is a checklist that will help ensure that all the proper steps have been completed.
Customer Information form filled out and returned to Siemens

A location for mounting the GAS-Guard has been identified, and the GAS-Guard
mounting stand is secured in place
The transformer oil supply valve (GAS-Guard oil supply port) and the transformer oil
return valve (GAS-Guard oil return port) have been selected
Bleed fixture and oil supply fittings installed (additional fittings required if Oil
Moisture sensor is to be installed)
Power is present and available at the installation site for the GAS-Guard
Communication is available to the GAS-Guard
A cylinder of chromatographic grade helium (99.9999% pure with < 0.2 ppm of H2O)
has been purchased and is on location
A 0-5 Amp CT has been identified for the LoadGuide sensor

All shipped items and optional accessories have been located
Electrical conduit and enclosures have been installed (as required)
18 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Appendix
GAS-Guard Dimensions
Figure 8: Overall dimensions
19 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Concrete Pad Layout
Figure 9: Concrete pad dimensions
20 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Wire Termination Drawing
Notes:
(Red)
He Pressure Switch(optional) Helium NC
4-20mA Input Channel 2

Sensor Cable (black)
PN # 610-0180-00 (3.5ft)
PN # 610-0183-00 (23ft)

LoadGuide
Programmable Relay
From Analyzer
Power Relay
RS232
Communication Cable (gray)
PN # 610-0181-00 (3.5ft)
PN # 610-0184-00 (23ft)
RS485
Internal Modem
12V@1A
AC Power Cable (black 3-wire)
PN # 610-0179-00 (2ft)
PN # 610-0182-00 (23ft)
Communication Cable
Violet - Not Used
White - Not Used
GND (White/Red)
SGND (Black)
+24vdc (Violet)
Input (White/Violet)
+24vdc (Orange)
Input (White/Orange)
+24vdc (White)
Input (White/Black/BRN)
LoadGuide (Brown)
AGND (Blue)
COM (Yellow)
NC (Grey)
NO (Green)
COM(White/Yellow)
NC (White/Grey)
NO (White/Green)
TXD (Yellow)
RXD (White/Yellow)
RTS(Green)
CTS (White/Green)
DCD(White/Violet)
DSR (WhiteGrey)
RI (White/Red)
DTR(Grey)
GND(White/Black)
TXA (-) (White/Brown)
TXB (+) (Brown)
RCVA (-) (White/Orange)
RCVB (+) (Orange)
GND (White/Black/BRN)
RING (Blue)
TIP (White/Blue)
+12V (Red)
12V GND (Black)
2
3
4
5
User
Defined
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Communications
Input/Outputs
13
14
15
User
Defined
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
LINE (Brown)
25
NEUTRAL (Blue)
26
EARTH GND (Green/Yellow)
27
AUX 12VDC Output
AC Power
Sensor Cable
White/Black - Not Connected
White/Brown - Not Connected
White/Blue - Not Connected
Figure 10: Wire termination drawing
21 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Helium Specification and Ordering Information

Helium Specification:
99.9999% pure, Chromatographic or Research Grade

NO MORE than 0.2ppm H2O
Cylinder Size:
49.6-liter water capacity

9 inches x 60 inches including cap
Depending on vendor,
cylinder size is indicated
by:
300, 049, 49, 1L, A, K, T or UT
Cylinder Material:
High-pressure steel
Cylinder Valve Type:
CGA 580
Table 8: Helium specification and ordering information
Use of helium other than 99.9999% pure research grade or chromatographic

grade with less than 0.2-ppm H2O content will greatly decrease the life of the
GAS-Guard system components and VOID the warranty.
Helium Suppliers
(800) 772-9247
www.praxair.com
When ordering, please specify part number HE 6.0 RS T.

(323) 568-2201
www.airgas.com
When ordering, please specify part number HER 300-CT.
Table 9: Helium suppliers
22 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Tubing Specification and Ordering Information

Specification:
1/4-inch OD x 0.028 (or 0.035) wall T316

seamless steel tubing.
Order Information:
Purchase in 20-foot lengths
Table 10: Tubing specification and ordering information

Contact tubing suppliers for tube unions.
Stainless steel is the only material that should be used with the GASGuard; the use of any other tubing material will VOID the warranty
of your GAS-Guard.
Tubing Suppliers
www.swagelok.com
See website for local sales contact number
Table 11: Tubing suppliers
23 of 24
810-1733-00 Rev A
Shipping Containers
GAS-Guard
Figure 11: Shipping containers
24 of 24
SIEMENS

Installation Guide
810-1732-00 Rev A

All rights reserved

810-1732-00 Rev A
GAS-Guard Installation Guide
Table of Contents
Product Overview ...................................................................................................................................................4
Product Symbols......................................................................................................................................................5
Environmental Conditions .....................................................................................................................................6
Items Needed for Installation ................................................................................................................................7
Items Shipped ................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Configured Items.............................................................................................................................................................. 9
Optional Accessories........................................................................................................................................................ 9
Preparatory Tasks for Installation ...................................................................................................................10

Site Preparation Guide Checklist ................................................................................................................................. 10
Installation Procedures .........................................................................................................................................11

Stand Mounting and Assembly .......................................................................................................................12
Stand Post Mounting ..................................................................................................................................................... 12
Assembling the Stand .................................................................................................................................................... 13
Junction Box Mounting.................................................................................................................................................. 14
Oil Cooler (Optional) ..................................................................................................................................................... 15
Mounting the GAS-Guard................................................................................................................................16

Mounting with the Transformer Pad Mount Stand................................................................................................... 16
Mounting without the Transformer Pad Mount Stand............................................................................................. 17
Attaching the Sunshield ................................................................................................................................................ 17
Oil Connections..................................................................................................................................................18
Inline Oil Filters .............................................................................................................................................................. 18
Oil Plumbing................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Top-Oil Moisture/Temperature (optional)....................................................................................................21

Oil Transmitter Unit Mounting .................................................................................................................................... 22
Gas Connections ................................................................................................................................................23

Helium Gas Cylinder and Dryer Mounting (GAS-Guard 8 only) ........................................................................... 23
Verification Gas Cylinder.............................................................................................................................................. 25
Cable Connections .............................................................................................................................................26

Power Cable, (black 3-wire) 610-0179-00 2-ft/610-0182-00 23-ft.............................................................................. 26
Sensor Cable, (black) 610-0180-00 3.5-ft/610-0183-00 23-ft....................................................................................... 26
Communication Cable, (gray) 610-0181-00 3.5-ft/610-0184-00 23-ft ....................................................................... 27
External Sensors.................................................................................................................................................28
Oil Moisture and Temperature Connections.............................................................................................................. 28
Ambient Temperature ................................................................................................................................................... 28
LoadGuide (750-0058-XX) ............................................................................................................................................. 28
Relays ..................................................................................................................................................................29
Mounting Stand Assembly Drawing ..............................................................................................................30
Installation Checklist.........................................................................................................................................31
Forms.......................................................................................................................................................................32
Verification Cylinder Data Sheet.....................................................................................................................32
2 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Table of Figures
Figure 1: Installation schematic ...........................................................................................................................11
Figure 2: Stand Post...............................................................................................................................................12
Figure 3: Stand Assembly.....................................................................................................................................13
Figure 4: Junction Box Installation ......................................................................................................................14
Figure 5: Oil Cooler mounting.............................................................................................................................15
Figure 6: GAS-Guard mounting ..........................................................................................................................16
Figure 7: Sunshield mounting..............................................................................................................................17
Figure 8: Oil Filter Housing .................................................................................................................................18
Figure 9: Bleed Fixture and Siemens Oil Return Valve ....................................................................................19
Figure 10: Sample port/Secondary Shutoff Assy. ............................................................................................20
Figure 11: Top-Oil (Moisture/Temperature) Sensor Fixture ..........................................................................21
Figure 12: Transmitter Unit..................................................................................................................................22
Figure 13: Mounting Base.....................................................................................................................................22
Figure 14: Helium Dryer.......................................................................................................................................23
Figure 15: Helium Regulator................................................................................................................................24
Figure 16: Installed Verification Cylinder..........................................................................................................25
Figure 17: Wiring Terminations...........................................................................................................................27
Table of Tables
Table 1: Product Symbols .......................................................................................................................................5
Table 2: Items Shipped............................................................................................................................................8
Table 3: Configured Items ......................................................................................................................................9
Table 4: Optional Accessories ................................................................................................................................9
Table 5: Oil Moisture and Temperature connections .......................................................................................28
Table 6: Verification cylinder datasheet .............................................................................................................32
3 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Product Overview
The Siemens GAS-Guard 8 and GAS-Guard 3 are on-line laboratory-grade gas chromatographs which
can safely be installed on an energized or non-energized transformer. The GAS-Guard detects and
measures fault gases found in the oil of power transformers. The GAS-Guard is designed and
constructed to resist the environmental conditions typical of a power substation or generation facility.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to install your Siemens GAS-Guard until you have read and
fully understand the procedures outlined in this document.
4 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Product Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout the GAS-Guard or accessories. They are defined by the
International Electrotechnical Commission, IEC 878 and IEC 417A. It is important for safety reasons to
have an understanding of their representation.
Voltage Output
Voltage Input
Fuse
High Voltage
Caution: Refer to GAS-Guard Installation Guide and accompanying
documentation.
Protective earth (ground)
V~
H
L
__I__
O
Alternating Current and Voltage

Connect to mains live conductor (brown)
Connect to mains neutral conductor (blue)
The I position indicates the power switch is ON
The O position indicates the power switch is OFF
This device has been tested and certified by the Canadian Standards
Association International to comply with applicable U.S. and
Canadian safety standards.
Table 1: Product Symbols
WARNING statements in this manual identify conditions or practices that could result in personal
injury.
CAUTION statements in this manual identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to the
equipment or other property.
NOTE statements provide additional important information.
5 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Environmental Conditions
The GAS-Guard 8 and GAS-Guard 3 are designed to operate within the following outdoor conditions:
Altitude up to 4572 m
Humidity Range 5% to 95%
Temperature Range -50C to 55C
Installation Category II
Pollution Degree 2
Please note that the altitude, humidity, and temperature ranges indicated are considered extended
environmental conditions from the minimum ranges required by UL 61010-1, Clause 1.4.1.
6 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Items Needed for Installation

Note: As each transformer is different, some items may need to be provided by the installer.
Upon receipt of your GAS-Guard it is important to verify the contents of the shipping carton with the
packing list. Inspect the contents for any sign of damage that may have occurred in transit. Please
notify Siemens directly if there are any concerns. For return shipping instructions please see the
Operation and Maintenance Guide (Part # 810-1734-XX).
7 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Items Shipped
Part #
Description
140-0170-XX
Sunshield
250-0130-XX
(2) In-line Oil Filters, 1/4 SS Swagelok
250-0144-XX
(2) Nut and Ferrule Set, 1/4 OD, SS
252-0013-XX
(3) 10-32 Nut
253-0066-XX
(6) 10-32x3/8 Screw
254-0075-XX
(1) 1/4 Lock Washer
270-0004-XX
(1) Helium Dryer, Q5 Copper Catalyst (GAS-Guard 8 only)
290-0017-XX
(1) Verification gas cylinder (GAS-Guard 8 only) OR
290-0021-XX
(1) Verification gas cylinder (GAS-Guard 3 only)

Note: The verification gas cylinder is shipped separately from the
GAS-Guard because of UN1956 classified non-flammable gas shipping
requirements and may ship at a later date depending upon installation.
291-0014-XX
(2) Helium Dryer Mounting Clips (GAS-Guard 8 only)
292-0018-XX
(1) Helium Regulator, high purity, for cylinder valve type CGA-580
300-0004-XX
(1) LoadGuide, Current Transformer
456-0022-XX
(1) Valve, Oil Return Assy.
456-0023-XX
(1) Valve, Sample Port / Secondary Shutoff Assy.
456-0026-XX
(1) Oil Supply Port Assy.
610-0110-XX
(1) Cable, 14, RJ45, 8 Cond.
610-0121-XX
(1) Adapter Assy., RS232
750-0088-XX
(1) 10 Helium Supply Line (GAS-Guard 8 only)
750-0089-XX
(1) 120 Helium Supply Line
900-0080-00
900-0081-00
900-0083-00
900-0084-00
(1) GAS-Guard 3 (230V)
900-0053-XX
(1) Bleed Fixture
910-0025-XX
(1) GAS-Guard Software CD (English)
Includes Users Manual, Site Prep, Install, Ops & Maintenance Guides
Table 2: Items Shipped
8 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Configured Items
Part #
Description
900-0064-XX
(1) Kit, Junction Box with Cables OR
900-0059-XX
(1) Junction Box
610-0179-XX
(1) AC Power Cable (black 3-wire)
610-0180-XX
(1) Sensor Cable (black)
610-0181-XX
(1) Communication Cable (gray)
900-0063-XX
(1) Kit, External 23 ft. Cables
610-0182-XX
(1) AC Power Cable 23 ft. (black 3-wire)
610-0183-XX
(1) Sensor Cable, 23 ft. (black)
610-0184-XX
(1) Communication Cable, 23 ft. (gray)
900-0057-XX
(1) Transformer Pad Mount OR
900-0066-XX
(1) Transformer Tank Mount
Table 3: Configured Items
Optional Accessories
Part #
Description
900-0058-XX
Oil Inlet Cooler
900-0060-XX
GSM Cellular Modem, USA
900-0085-XX
GSM Cellular Modem, Europe
900-0062-XX
Kit, Fiber Optic Ethernet
900-0067-XX
Kit, Wireless Radio, Serial
900-0082-XX
Kit , Oil Moisture and Temperature Sensor
Table 4: Optional Accessories
9 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Preparatory Tasks for Installation

There are certain tasks that must be completed prior to installation of the GAS-Guard. These tasks are
outlined in the GAS-Guard Site Preparation Guide that was sent to you upon acceptance of your
order. Please review the Site Preparation Guide and ensure all items on the Site Preparation Guide
checklist below have been completed.
Site Preparation Guide Checklist

Customer Information form filled out and returned to Siemens
A location for mounting the GAS-Guard has been identified.
The transformer oil supply port (GAS-Guard oil supply port) has been selected
The transformer oil return port (GAS-Guard oil return port) has been selected
Confirm use of Siemens bleed fixture or customer has constructed their own bleed fixture
Oil supply port fittings determined and provided. Additional fitting are required if Oil
Moisture sensor will be installed.
Oil return port fittings determined and provided.

Power is present and available at the installation site for the GAS-Guard
Communication protocol (RS232, RS485, Ethernet, or Modem) selected
A cylinder of chromatographic grade helium (99.9999% pure with < 0.2 ppm of H2O) has
been purchased and is on location
A 0-5 Amp CT winding has been identified on the transformer for the LoadGuide sensor
All shipped items and configurable accessories have been located
Electrical conduit and enclosures have been installed (as required)
10 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Installation Procedures
Installation consists of completing the following steps:
Stand Mounting and Assembly
Mounting the GAS-Guard
Oil Connections
Gas Connections
Cable Connections
External Sensors
Relays
Installation Checklist
Existing transformer valve

(Oil Supply Port)
Oil Moisture and

Temperature Sensor
Oil supply line to

analyzer " SS tubing
Serveron
Supply/Sample Shutoff
Port
SampleOil
Port/Secondary
Valve
Assy 456-0023-XX
456-0023-XX
Serveron Optional
Oil Supply Port
Secondary Oil Supply
Assy.
456-0026-XX
Valve
456-0024-XX
Transformer
Tank
Helium Dryer
270-0004-XX
Oil return line to
transformer " SS tubing
Serveron Bleed
Bleed Fixture
Fixture 900-0053-XX
Electrical Panel
900-0053-XX
Existing transformer valve

(Oil Return Port)
Helium Tank
& Regulator
Serveron
Oil Return
Oil Return
Assy.
Assembly 456-0022-XX
456-0022-XX
Analyzer Stand
Stand 900-0057-XX
AC
ACPower
Mainscable,
power cable
Communications cable
Communications
(Ethernet,phone)
phone)
(Ethernet,
Transformer Pad
Figure 1: Installation schematic
11 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Stand Mounting and Assembly

The transformer pad mount stand is the preferred method of mounting the Siemens GAS-Guard.
However if the GAS-Guard is going to be mounted to the transformer without the stand, an optional
transformer tank mounting kit can be purchased from Siemens (Part # 900-0066-XX). If the transformer
pad mount stand was not purchased please proceed to the Mounting the GAS-Guard section.
Stand Post Mounting

1)
Remove the stand post from the shipping container.
2)
Position the stand on the transformer pad. The mounting location should have been
determined during completion of the GAS-Guard Site Preparation Guide
3)
Use the stand as a template and mark the four mounting holes
onto the pad. Orientation of the four mounting holes is not
important.
4)
Temporarily move the stand and using a hammer drill, drill a 3/8in x 3-in (7.6 cm) deep hole at each of the marked locations.
5)
Insert the four 3/8-in concrete anchors supplied with stand.
6)
Reposition the stand over the four anchors and install a flatwasher, split-washer and 3/8-in nut onto each of the four anchors
and tighten evenly.
7)
Using a level verify the stand-post is within 5 of plumb in all

directions. Use 3/8-in stainless steel washers as spacers under the
four corners if leveling is required.
Figure 2: Stand Post
12 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Assembling the Stand

1)
Locate stand hardware, items 2-through-16 (refer to the Mounting Stand Assembly Drawing
in the back of the guide) and assemble the stand per the figure below.
2)
Attach (1) item 5, channel using (1) item 4, U-bolt assembly with (2) item 9, lock washer to
the stand approx 3-in (7.6 cm) from the top. Using a 9/16-in deep socket and a level secure
the items to stand without over-tightening ensuring the channel is 5 of plumb. (Note:
Over-tightening will crush the aluminum post.)
3)
On the back side of the stand, mark from the top of the U-bolt assembly 20-in down and
attach (1) item 5, channel using (1) item 4, U-bolt assembly with (2) item 9, lock washer to
post. (Note: Do not fully tighten the lower U-bolts to the stand until the GAS-Guard is installed and
secured.)
4)
Attach (2) item 2, spring nut in top channel using (2) item 3, fully threaded bolt.
5)
Attach (2) item 2, spring nut in bottom channel.
6)
Attach (2) item 13, mounting strap using (4) items 14, 15 and 16, screw, lock washer and nut.
7)
Attach items 11 and 12, helium support bracket and strap using (4) items 6, 7 and 9 bolt,
washer and nut.
Figure 3: Stand Assembly

8)
If the optional oil cooler was purchased proceed to the Junction Box Mounting section. If
the oil cooler was not purchased continue with step (9).
9)
Position (1) 291-0014-XX helium dryer mounting clip provided with the Gas-Guard
hardware to the outside mounting strap item 13, lower through hole. Attach the clip to the
strap using (1) 253-0066-XX screw and (1) 252-0013-XX nut contained in the GAS-Guard
hardware. (Note: If a Junction Box will not be installed, attach the second 291-0014-XX using
(1) 253-0066-XX and (1) 252-0013-XX, to the second through hole from the top of item 13
outside mounting strap)
13 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Junction Box Mounting

The junction box must be mounted prior to mounting the optional oil cooler or GAS-Guard.
1)
Remove the Junction Box from the shipping container taking care not to damage the cable
glands protruding form the bottom of Junction Box.
2)
Attach the Junction Box to the stand mounting straps as illustrated in figure 4. Use the
mounting hardware included with the Junction Box.
3)
Attach (1) helium dryer mounting clip 291-0014-XX using the Junction Box hardware to top
right mounting position.
Figure 4: Junction Box Installation
14 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Oil Cooler (Optional)

If the optional oil cooler was not purchased proceed to the next section Mounting the GAS-Guard.
The optional cooler must be installed on the stand prior to mounting the GAS-Guard and helium dryer
retaining clips. If you have purchased the transformer pad mount stand follow the instructions below.
1)
Remove the oil cooler from its shipping container and verify all parts are accounted for.
2)
Mount the oil cooler to the upper GAS-Guard stand mounting bolts. The oil cooler will be
secured using the same hardware used to secure the GAS-Guard.
3)
Position (1) 291-0014-XX helium dryer mounting clip to the predrilled and tapped hole
located on the upper right hand side of the cooler. Attach the clip to the cooler using
(1) 253-0066-XX screw contained in the GAS-Guard hardware. Position (1) 291-0014-XX
helium dryer mounting clip to the predrilled and tapped hole located on the lower right
hand side of the cooler. Attach the clip using (1) 253-0066-XX screw contained in the GASGuard hardware. Discard (2) 252-0013-XX nuts contained in the GAS-Guard mounting
hardware.
CAUTION: If the oil cooler will not be mounted to the transformer pad mount stand, the oil
cooler must still be secured by the cooler frame. Oil line fittings and oil tubing can not support
cooler weight.
Figure 5: Oil Cooler mounting
15 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Mounting the GAS-Guard

CAUTION: The GAS-Guard must be mounted and operated in an upright position. Failure to
do so will VOID the warranty.
Mounting with the Transformer Pad Mount Stand

1)
Remove the GAS-Guard from the shipping container taking care not to damage the ambient
temperature sensor or cable glands protruding from the bottom of the GAS-Guard
enclosure.
2)
Attach the GAS-Guard using the stand mounting bolts item 3 and secure with items 7 and 9,
lock washer and nut provided with the stand hardware.
3)
Position the lower channel so the spring nuts are in-line with the GAS-Guard mounting
tabs. Loosely secure the GAS-Guard using (2) items 6, 8 and 9, bolts, lock washer and
washer to the spring nuts.
4)
Using a 9/16-in deep socket, tighten the lower channel on the post. (Note: Over-tightening
will crush the aluminum post.)
5)
Verify GAS-Guard is plumb and level, within 5 and all mounting hardware is tight.
Figure 6: GAS-Guard mounting
16 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Mounting without the Transformer Pad Mount Stand

When mounting the GAS-Guard, ensure the following:
1)
The GAS-Guard is mounted a minimum of 12-in (30.5 cm) above any possible water level.
2)
The GAS-Guard is plumb and level within 5.
3)
3/8-in hardware is used to mount the GAS-Guard to supporting structure.
Attaching the Sunshield

1)
Locate the sunshield and the (4) 10x32 retaining screws, part # 253-0066-XX, included in the
GAS-Guard hardware.
2)
Position the sun shield over the GAS-Guard, see figure 7.
3)
Install the four screws in predrilled and tapped mounting holes.
Figure 7: Sunshield mounting
17 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Oil Connections
There are several steps that must be followed specifically when connecting the oil supply and return
lines.
The GAS-Guard must be connected to the transformers main tank in two locations. The first
connection supplies oil from the transformer to the GAS-Guard (Oil Supply Port). The second
connection returns oil from the GAS-Guard back to the transformer (Oil Return Port). Refer to the Site
Preparation Guide for recommended transformer oil connection locations.
To guard against oil leaks, Extra High Density, 1.45 SG or higher Teflon tape (PTFE) or Teflon paste
should be applied to all NPT-type connections prior to assembly.
CAUTION: Ensure all fittings, valves, and fixtures are clean prior to installing. De-burr all
tubing ends prior to swaging on fittings.
CAUTION: Oil lines, valves, and fixtures are not a step! Make sure all tubing is positioned out
of the way of any foot traffic or maintenance areas on or around the transformer.
CAUTION: Maximum Oil Inlet Pressure to the analyzer is 45 psi (3 bar)
Inline Oil Filters

Two inline oil filters, Part # 250-0130-XX, are supplied with the GAS-Guard. The recommended
installation location for the filters is as close to the GAS-Guard bulkhead fittings as possible. If the
bulkhead is an inconvenient location to install the oil filters because of the installation of oil cooler or
GAS-Guard orientation, the filters must be mounted in a location that will allow easy access for filter
service.
1)
Identify location for oil filter mounting
2)
Locate the flow direction arrow on the filter housing.
3)
Install the filter in the oil line with the flow direction orientated correctly.
4)
Swage the two fittings onto the -in oil tubing.
Figure 8: Oil Filter Housing

18 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Oil Plumbing
Locate the two bulkhead fittings for oil connections labeled Oil In and Oil Out on the left side of
the GAS-Guard.
1)
Secure the Oil Supply Port Assy, 456-0026-XX to the transformer oil supply port/Top-Oil
(moisture/temperature) fixture. Please see the Top-Oil (moisture/temperature) section for
fixture specifications.
2)
Attach the Bleed Fixture 900-0053-XX or the customer supplied bleed fixture to the
transformer oil return port specified in the Site Preparation Guide.
3)
Secure the Oil Return Valve assembly 456-0022-XX to the Bleed Fixture.
4)
Using -in stainless steel tubing, join the oil supply fitting and the oil return valve assembly
to their respective Oil In and Oil Out bulk-head fittings on the GAS-Guard.
5)
Using the supplied helium and regulator, purge fitted oil lines with helium for one minute
prior to final tubing connection to the GAS-Guard.
Figure 9: Bleed Fixture and Siemens Oil Return Valve
19 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
6)
Select a convenient location no higher than 6 feet (183 cm) above ground level to mount the
Siemens Sample port/Shut-off valve assembly 456-0023-XX.
Figure 10: Sample port/Secondary Shutoff Assy.
Note: The sample port/shut-off valve is used when performing manual DGA testing or for
stopping oil supply to the GAS-Guard.
20 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Top-Oil Moisture/Temperature (optional)

An optional sensor is available to provide oil moisture in parts per million (ppm) or percent relative
saturation (%RS) and oil temperature in C. Depending on sensor location, the oil temperature data
can be representative of transformer top oil temperature.
Note: Siemens recommends the Oil Moisture/Temperature Sensor be installed on the top oil
supply port of the transformer.
To install the sensor, use the fittings identified in the Site Preparation Guide. All fittings must be
stainless steel, brass, or black iron. Please refer to figure 11 below for the Moisture/Temperature
sensor fixture configuration.
1)
Install the male nipple and Tee to the transformer oil supply port with the Tee orientation as
required.
2)
Reduce the straight-through port on the Tee to -in FNPT and the 90 port to -in FNPT.
3)
Install the Siemens -in Oil Supply Adapter to the 90 port.
4)
Install a -in x 2-in nipple to the straight-through port.
5)
Install the -in ball valve that comes with the Oil Moisture and Temperature sensor on the
-in x 2-in nipple.
For proper installation of the Oil Moisture and Temperature sensor, it is important for the nipple
connecting the Tee to the -in ball be no longer than required. Once the assembly is built, ensure the
tip of the Oil Moisture and Temperature sensor is in the oil flow.
Existing Transformer Valve

Nipple (X) x 2-3"
Tee (X) x (X) x (X)
Transformer Base
Nipple 1/2" x 2"
Reducing Bushing (X) x 1/2"

Reducing Bushing (X) x 1/4"
Serveron
Oil Supply
Adapter
Oil supply
Port Assy
1/4"
Tube x 1/4" MNPT
456-0026-00
250-0138-XX
Oil Moisture Sensor Cable

Serveron Oil Moisture and
Temperature Sensor with
Figure 11: Top-Oil (Moisture/Temperature) Sensor Fixture

21 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Oil Transmitter Unit Mounting

The moisture sensor is designed for industrial applications. The sensor assembly consists of (4)
elements which are:
Probe with Cable (5m)
Transmitter Unit
Mounting Base
Interface Cable (5m)
There are a few options to mount the transmitter unit depending on the valve location in which the
sensor will be installed. The transmitter unit is secured with two 3-mm hex screws to the mounting
base. If the installation of the sensor is
conducive to having the mounting base
attached to a structure (control cabinet,
junction box, channel, etc.), the transmitter
unit can be detached from the mounting
based using a 3-mm hex driver, refer to
figure 12. In the event the transmitter unit
can not be hard mounted to a support
structure, the transmitter unit can be
secured via cable ties to the oil supply
tubing.
3mm hex screws to remove transmitter unit
from mounting base
Figure 12: Transmitter Unit
Once the transmitter unit is removed from the mounting base, the base can be hard mounted. If the
transmitter unit is installed unprotected in an outside
environment (-55 to 60C), ensure the orientation of the
connections are facing in the downward direction, refer to
figure 13.
Figure 13: Mounting Base

22 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Gas Connections
Two gas sources must be connected to the GAS-Guard- Helium and Verification gas.
CAUTION: Use of helium other than 99.9999% pure research or chromatographic grade with
less than 0.2-ppm H2O content will VOID the GAS-Guard warranty.
WARNING: When full, the helium gas cylinder is pressured to greater than 2000psi (138 bar).
Helium is regulated to 80psi (5.5 bar), nominal, before entering the GAS-Guard. Always follow
Compressed Gas Association (CGA) guidelines when handling and transporting compressed
gases.
Helium Gas Cylinder and Dryer Mounting (GAS-Guard 8 only)

WARNING: Never leave the helium input to the GAS-Guard or the helium dryer inlet and
outlet ports exposed to the atmosphere.
The helium gas cylinder must be securely mounted. The GAS-Guard stand includes a mounting
bracket that meets all Compressed Gas Association (CGA) cylinder restraining requirements.
The helium dryer is mounted vertically to the GAS-Guard
mounting stand using the retaining brackets included with the
GAS-Guard mounting stand.
A 10-ft (305 cm) x 1/8-in O.D. stainless steel tube is provided to
connect the helium cylinder regulator to the top of the helium
dryer. A 10-in (25.4 cm) x 1/8-in O.D. stainless steel tube is
provided to connect the bottom of the helium dryer to the GASGuard.
CAUTION: Do not uncap or connect helium gas lines to the

helium dryer at this time.
Figure 14: Helium Dryer
23 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
1)
Install the provided helium regulator onto the helium cylinder. Do not use Teflon tape or pipe
dope.
2)
Orient the gauge vertically and tighten the CGA fitting.
3)
Orient the helium cylinder so that the gauge on the regulator can be clearly seen.
4)
Mount the helium dryer to the stand in the vertical orientation as indicated in figure 14,
using the supplied retaining clips 291-0014-XX.
5)
Install one end of the 10-ft stainless steel tubing onto the regulator.
6)
Verify the helium regulator shutoff valve is closed and slowly turn the valve located on top
of the helium cylinder fully counterclockwise (open).
7)
Slowly turn helium regulator shutoff valve counterclockwise (open) until helium begins to
flow. At this point, gas should be escaping from the stainless steel tubing.
CAUTION: Do not open the regulator shutoff valve completely to regulate the helium flow.
8)
Leaving the helium flowing, attach the other end of the 10-ft. tubing to the top of the helium
dryer.
9)
While the helium is continuing to flow, install the one end of the 10-in stainless steel tubing
onto the bottom of the helium dryer.
10) Let the helium continue to purge through the dryer and tubing for one (1) minute.
11) While the helium is still purging, attach the remaining end of the 10-in stainless steel tubing
to the bulkhead fitting on the right side of the GAS-Guard labeled Helium In.
12) Now turn the regulator shutoff valve fully counterclockwise (open).
13) Confirm all four helium connections and the helium regulator to helium tank connections
are leak-tight by applying a leak-check solution to the fittings.
Figure 15: Helium Regulator

Note: The leak check is very important as even the smallest leak can substantially reduce the
life of the helium cylinder.
24 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Verification Gas Cylinder

WARNING: When full, the verification gas cylinder is pressured to greater than 500psi (34 bar).
Verification gas is regulated to 8psi (0.5 bar), nominal, before entering the GAS-Guard. Always
follow Compressed Gas Association (CGA) guidelines when handling and transporting
compressed gases.
The verification gas cylinder is used to automatically verify and calibrate the GAS-Guard. The cylinder
contains a certified NIST-traceable concentration of the transformer fault gases measured by the
GAS-Guard.
1)
Open the analyzer door and locate the Verification cylinder mounting bracket and regulator.
2)
Install the Verification cylinder into the mounting bracket and secure using the Velcro strap.
3)
Connect the cylinder to the regulator union and tighten.
4)
Turn the knob on the top of the Verification cylinder counterclockwise until it is fully open.
The regulator requires no pressure adjustment.
5)
Confirm that the bottle to regulator connection is leak-tight by applying a leak-check

solution to the fitting. Wipe away any excess leak-check solution.
Note: The leak check is very important, as even the smallest leak can substantially reduce the
life of the Verification cylinder.
6)
Complete and return the Verification cylinder data sheet found in the appendix to Siemens.
Figure 16: Installed Verification Cylinder
25 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Cable Connections
The GAS-Guard has three primary electrical cable connections: Power, Sensor, and Communication.
Each cable comes with a preinstalled connector on one end and is marked with an identifying part
number and a description.
CAUTION: Ensure GAS-Guard power switch is off before connecting cables.
Power Cable, (black 3-wire) 610-0179-00 2-ft/610-0182-00 23-ft

The GAS-Guard has a variable input power supply capable of receiving input of 115VAC or 230VAC
15%, 50/60 Hz. Current draw is 6A max. at 115VAC and 3A max. at 230VAC. There are three
4A/250V type 3AG (T) fuses installed for the power supply (line and neutral) and the GAS-Guards
enclosure heater (line).
CAUTION: Replace fuses with same type and rating only.
CAUTION: The GAS-Guard enclosure heater is not a variable voltage input device and must be
used with the appropriate 115V or 230V mains voltage as marked within the GAS-Guard.
Note: Siemens recommends installing a properly rated and marked switch or circuit breaker in
close proximity to the GAS-Guard as a mains voltage disconnect device.
1)
Locate the cable-gland on the bottom of the GAS-Guard labeled Power.
2)
Starting from the inside of the GAS-Guard Housing, route the Power cable through the
cable-gland until the ferrite core contacts the cable-gland.
3)
Locate the in-line connector from the power supply and attach the power cable.
4)
Tighten the cable-gland onto the Power cable.
5)
Attach the green/yellow ground wire to the ground lug along with the communication and
sensor cable shield drain wires then tighten ground lug nut.
6)
Route the blunt cut end of the cable into the Junction Box or control cabinet for termination.
Pull enough cable through and trim cable to length. When using the Junction Box, pull
approx 10-in through and remove the cable jacket.
7)
Terminate per the wiring termination in figure 17.
Sensor Cable, (black) 610-0180-00 3.5-ft/610-0183-00 23-ft

1)
Locate the cable-gland on the bottom of the GAS-Guard labeled Sensor.
2)
Starting from the inside of the GAS-Guard Housing, route the black Sensor cable through
the cable-gland until the ferrite core contacts the cable-gland.
3)
Locate the connector J100 on the System board and insert the cable connector.
4)
Tighten the cable-gland onto the Sensor cable.
5)
Attach the shield drain wire to the ground lug with the communication and power
green/yellow ground wire then tighten ground lug nut.
6)
Route the blunt cut end into the Junction Box or control cabinet for termination. Pull enough
cable through and trim cable to length. When using the Junction Box, pull approx 10-in
(25.4cm) through and remove the black cable jacket.
7)
26 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Communication Cable, (gray) 610-0181-00 3.5-ft/610-0184-00 23-ft

1)
Locate the cable-gland on the bottom of the GAS-Guard labeled Communication.
2)
Starting from the inside of the GAS-Guard Housing route the gray Communication cable
through the cable-gland until the ferrite core contacts the cable-gland.
3)
Locate the connector J101 on the system board and insert the cable connector.
4)
Tighten the cable-gland onto the Communication cable.
5)
Attach the shield drain wire to the ground lug with the sensor and power green/yellow
ground wire then tighten ground lug nut.
6)
Route the blunt cut end into the Junction Box or control cabinet for termination. Pull enough
cable through and trim cable to length. When using the Junction Box, pull approx 10-in
(25.4 cm) through and remove the gray cable jacket.
7)
Notes:
(Red)
He Pressure Switch(optional) Helium NC
From Analyzer
Sensor Cable (black)

PN # 610-0180-00 (3.5ft)
PN # 610-0183-00 (23ft)
Communication Cable (gray)

PN # 610-0181-00 (3.5ft)
PN # 610-0184-00 (23ft)
GND (White/Red)
SGND (Black)
+24vdc (Violet)
Input (White/Violet)
(Orange)
4-20mA Input Channel 1 +24vdc
Input (White/Orange)
+24vdc (White)
4-20mA Input Channel 3 Input (White/Black/BRN)
LoadGuide (Brown)
LoadGuide AGND (Blue)
COM (Yellow)
Programmable Relay NC (Grey)
NO (Green)
COM(White/Yellow)
Power Relay NC (White/Grey)
NO (White/Green)
TXD (Yellow)
RXD (White/Yellow)
RTS (Green)
CTS (White/Green)
DCD(White/Violet)
RS232
DSR(WhiteGrey)
RI (White/Red)
DTR (Grey)
GND(White/Black)
TXA (-) (White/Brown)
TXB (+) (Brown)
RCVA (-) (White/Orange)
RS485
RCVB (+) (Orange)
GND (White/Black/BRN)
RING (Blue)
Internal Modem TIP (White/Blue)
+12V (Red)
12V@1A
12V GND (Black)
AC Power Cable (black 3-wire)

PN # 610-0179-00 (2ft)
PN # 610-0182-00 (23ft)
Communication Cable
Violet - Not Used
White - Not Used
1
2
3
4
5
User
Defined
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Communications
Input/Outputs
13
14
15
User
Defined
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
LINE (Brown)
25
NEUTRAL (Blue)
26
EARTH GND (Green/Yellow)
27
AUX 12VDC Output
AC Power
Sensor Cable
White/Black - Not Connected
White/Brown - Not Connected
White/Blue - Not Connected
Figure 17: Wiring Terminations
27 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
External Sensors
Oil Moisture and Temperature Connections
The Oil Moisture and Temperature sensor can be configured for 4-20mA or RS-232 output; the
recommended configuration is 4-20mA. The Sensor can also be installed as moisture only or moisture
and temperature. Please refer below for the wiring configurations.
Sensor Type
Sensor Signal
Name
Sensor
Wire
Color
Monitor Signal
Name
Monitor Wire
Color
Moisture Only
Supply (-)
Supply (+)
24VDC
CH 2
GREY
PINK
Signal GND
CH 1 (+)
24VDC
CH 1 Input
BLK
ORG
Signal Ground
CH 1 (+)
24VDC
CH 1 Input
CH 3 Input
BLK
ORG
Moisture/Temperature
Supply (-)
Supply (+)
24VDC
CH 2
CH 1
GRN
GREY
PINK
GRN
YEL
WHT/ORG
WHT/ORG
WHT/BLK/BRN
Table 5: Oil Moisture and Temperature connections
Ambient Temperature
1)
Push sensor through cable-gland marked Amb Temp so that sensor tip is exposed 2-in.
(5 cm) below bottom of GAS-Guard enclosure and cable-gland.
2)
Ensure sensor cable is plugged into connector J2 on the System board.
LoadGuide (750-0058-XX)
WARNING: High voltage can be induced by the LoadGuide sensor. Do not clamp the
LoadGuide around the transformer CT winding until its wires have been terminated to the
GAS-Guard.
1)
Locate the 0 to 5-amp CT winding identified in the Site Preparation Guide within the
transformer control panel.
2)
Pull the LoadGuide leads from the transformer panel to the GAS-Guard junction box. A
wire size of 22 AWG or larger can be used to extend the length of the leads.
3)
Connect the black and white wires of the LoadGuide to the brown and blue sensor cable
leads, polarity is not significant.
4)
Unscrew white screws and remove back plate from device.
5)
Place the U-shape of the device around the 0 to 5-amp tap.
6)
Reinstall back plate and finger tighten screws.
28 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Relays
There are two dry contact relays, (1) Power and (1) Programmable, User defined. The Power relay is
triggered on loss of power to the GAS-Guard. The programmable relay can trigger on any GAS-Guard
programmed parameter. The relay can be wired for normally-open (NO) or normally-closed (NC)
configuration. The following parameters can be programmed:
Block all inputs (no operation)
Gas alarm condition, both PPM and rate-of-change
Gas caution condition
Service required condition
Sensor alarm condition (Oil Temp, Moisture, LoadGuide, Helium Gas (with optional
regulator), 4-20ma input CH2, etc.)
Note: The relays are capable of handling 100VA, 110VAC @ 1A or 50VDC @ 1A.
29 of 32
30 of 32
4
2
2
2
2
4
4
10
4
1
1
2
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
1
2
2
4
18
19
20
21
8
17
16
15
Qty
Item #
254-0094-00 Strut Washer, Grip Style
253-0151-00 3/8 Bolts x .875
253-0148-00 #10-16 x Self Drilling Screw
140-0203-00 CMP, Bracket Bulkhead
010-0047-00 Packaging Set (Not Shown)
253-0070-00 #10-32 x Screw
254-0023-00 #10 Lock Washer
252-0013-00 #10-32 Nut
140-0193-00 x 1/8 Mounting Strap
190-0001-00 Strap
140-0062-00 He Support Bracket
253-0076-00 3/8 Anchor Bolts
254-0071-00 3/8 Locker Washer
254-0070-00 3/8 Flat Washer
252-0014-00 3/8 Nut
253-0071-00 3/8 Bolts x 1.5
291-0009-00 Unistut 2 feet
291-0010-00 U-Bolt Assy w/Mtg Plate
253-0144-00 3/8 Bolts x 3 Fully Threaded
291-0011-00 NutMounting w/spring
140-0190-00 CMP, Stand Post
Part/Description
810-1732-00 Rev A
Mounting Stand Assembly Drawing
Figure 18: Mounting Stand Assembly
810-1732-00 Rev A
Installation Checklist
The following is a checklist to help ensure that all the proper steps have been completed prior to filling
the GAS-Guard with oil.
GAS-Guard securely mounted

Helium cylinder securely mounted
Helium regulator installed
Helium dryer installed in the vertical orientation
Helium system leak-checked
Verification cylinder securely mounted
Verification cylinder system leak-checked
All oil plumbing components secure
(Optional) Oil Cooler securely mounted to stand
All compression fittings securely tightened and leak-checked
All cabling securely routed and safely out of the way
Electrical conduit and or termination strip enclosures installed, secured, and grounded as
necessary
Sensor connections established

Communication connections established
Power connections established (power is OFF in the GAS-Guard)
CAUTION: DO NOT apply power to the GAS-Guard!

Power will be applied as part of the commissioning procedure.
31 of 32
810-1732-00 Rev A
Forms
Verification Cylinder Data Sheet
Upon successful installation of your GAS-Guard verification cylinder; please complete
and fax or e-mail this Verification Cylinder Data Sheet to Technical Support at:
+1 (503) 924-3290 fax
support@serveron.com e-mail
Attention:
Siemens Product Support
From:
Company:
Site:
Site Address:
City, State and Zip:
Country:
GAS-Guard and Verification Cylinder Information

Installers Name:
Installation Date:
GAS-Guard Serial
Number:
Helium high pressure

gauge (psig):
Helium low pressure

gauge (psig):
Verification high pressure

gauge (psig):
Verification low pressure

gauge (psig):
Verification Cylinder
Lot Number:
Manufacture/Analysis Date
Verification Cylinder Components

Hydrogen
Oxygen
Methane
Carbon Monoxide
Carbon Dioxide
Ethylene
Ethane
Acetylene
H2
O2
CH4
CO
CO2
C2H4
C2H6
C2H2
N/A
Certified Concentrations
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
Table 6: Verification cylinder datasheet

32 of 32
SIEMENS

Operations and Maintenance Guide
810-1734-00 Rev A

All rights reserved

810-1734-00 Rev A
GAS-Guard 8 and GAS-Guard 3 Operations and Maintenance Guide
Table of Contents
Introduction..............................................................................................................................................................3
Product Symbols......................................................................................................................................................4
Operation ..................................................................................................................................................................5
Calibration ............................................................................................................................................................5
Alarm Settings......................................................................................................................................................5
New transformers or transformers with no previous gas data:................................................................................. 6
Transformers with a stable gassing history: ................................................................................................................. 6
Gassing Transformers which have been degassed: ..................................................................................................... 7
Transformers with an unstable gassing history which have not been degassed: ................................................... 7
Viewing GAS-Guard Data..................................................................................................................................7

Front panel lights (Indicators) ...........................................................................................................................8
Turning the GAS-Guard On/Off ......................................................................................................................9
Manual DGA Sampling ....................................................................................................................................10
Operational Parameters ....................................................................................................................................10
Maintenance ...........................................................................................................................................................11
Helium and Verification Gas ...........................................................................................................................11
Helium Gas ..................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Helium Dryer.................................................................................................................................................................. 11
Helium Cylinder and Dryer Removal and Replacement.......................................................................................... 11
Verification Gas .............................................................................................................................................................. 13
Verification Gas Cylinder Removal and Replacement.............................................................................................. 13
Leak Check Fittings ...........................................................................................................................................14

Replacing Fuses..................................................................................................................................................14
Oil Filter Service.................................................................................................................................................15
Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) .............................................................................................................16
Cleaning ..............................................................................................................................................................16
Internal Cleaning............................................................................................................................................................ 16
External Cleaning ........................................................................................................................................................... 16
Return Shipping Instructions...............................................................................................................................17

Forms.......................................................................................................................................................................18
Verification Cylinder Data Sheet.....................................................................................................................18
Table of Figures
Figure 1: Siemens GAS-Guard...............................................................................................................................3
Figure 2: Oil shut off valve .....................................................................................................................................9
Figure 3: DGA sample port ..................................................................................................................................10
Figure 4: Installed verification cylinder..............................................................................................................14
Figure 5: Filter assembly.......................................................................................................................................15
Figure 6: Internal foam support...........................................................................................................................17
1 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Table of Tables
Table 1: Product Symbols .......................................................................................................................................4
Table 2: Recommended caution/alarm settings for transformers with no previous gas data.....................6
Table 3: Recommended caution/alarm settings for transformers with a stable gassing history.................6
Table 4: Recommended caution/alarm settings for gassing transformers after degassing..........................7
Table 5: Front panel lights ......................................................................................................................................8
Table 6: Customer Replaceable Units .................................................................................................................16
Table 7: Verification cylinder datasheet .............................................................................................................18
2 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Introduction
The Siemens GAS-Guard is an on-line laboratory-grade gas chromatograph. The GAS-Guard detects
and measures fault gases found in the cooling oil of power transformers. The GAS-Guard is designed
and constructed to operate under those environmental conditions typical of a power substation or
generating facility.
Figure 1: Siemens GAS-Guard
3 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Product Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout the GAS-Guard or accessories. They are defined by the
International Electrotechnical Commission, IEC 878 and IEC 417A. It is important for safety reasons to
have an understanding of their representation.
Voltage Output
Voltage Input
Fuse
High Voltage
Caution: Refer to GAS-Guard Installation Guide and accompanying
documentation.
Protective earth (ground)
V~
H
L
__I__
O
Alternating Current and Voltage

Connect to mains live conductor (brown)
Connect to mains neutral conductor (blue)
The I position indicates the power switch is ON
The O position indicates the power switch is OFF
This device has been tested and certified by the Canadian Standards
Association International to comply with applicable U.S. and
Canadian safety standards.
Table 1: Product Symbols
WARNING statements in this manual identify conditions or practices that could result in personal
injury.
CAUTION statements in this manual identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to the
equipment or other property.
NOTE statements provide additional important information.
4 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Operation
Once installed, the Siemens GAS-Guard requires very little setup before operation commences. To
retrieve DGA data from the GAS-Guard, set caution/alarm levels, sampling schedules etc. use either
GAS-Guard View software or the Serveron Monitoring Service (SMS). Refer to the GAS-Guard View
Software Users Manual or the SMS Users Guide. For more information, manuals are available for
download from www.serveron.com or by contacting Technical Support at support@serveron.com.
Calibration
Every Siemens GAS-Guard is calibrated at the factory. Following installation and commissioning, the
GAS-Guards auto-calibration feature verifies calibration automatically every three days. Siemens
recommends confirming calibration of your GAS-Guard every six months by viewing the Verification
PPM in Gas graph in GAS-Guard View (Graph ToolsMaintenanceVerification Data). A manual
recalibration should not be required unless a new certified verification cylinder is installed,
approximately once every three years. If Siemens has connectivity to the GAS-Guard during the
standard warranty period (12-months from date of shipment) Siemens will periodically confirm
calibration of the GAS-Guard as well.
Note: For Serveron Monitoring Service customers, upon installing a new verification
cylinder fill out and return the Verification Cylinder Datasheet located at the end of this
document and return it to Technical Support.
Alarm Settings
Following installation of the GAS-Guard and after an initial 24 hour stabilization period, the gas
caution and alarm levels can be set in the GAS-Guard. These levels can be set using the GAS-Guard
View software which was included with your GAS-Guard or by the Serveron Monitoring Service.
There are no universal rules regarding the values at which to set the caution and alarm levels in the
GAS-Guard. In the most general case caution and alarm settings are disabled while the
GAS-Guard runs for approximately thirty (30) days to establish gassing trends and a baseline PPM
level for each of the fault gases. After the GAS-Guard PPM data has been established, you can use the
history to set the caution and alarm levels directly or consult with the support group at
support@serveron.com to determine the appropriate caution and alarm settings for your GAS-Guard.
The following guidelines may be useful for setting the initial gas caution and alarm levels. Keep in
mind that these are recommendations. The appropriate caution and alarm settings for your
GAS-Guard may vary from these recommendations.
5 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
New transformers or transformers with no previous gas data:

Set the GAS-Guard caution level to 50% and the alarm level to 100% of the low-end CAUTION ppm
limits proposed by IEEE PC57.104 Draft 11, published April 21, 2004; except acetylene, as noted below.
Gas
Caution PPM
Alarm PPM
Hydrogen
50
100
Methane
60
120
Acetylene
Ethylene
25
50
Ethane
33
65
Carbon Monoxide
175
350
Carbon Dioxide
1750
3500
Oxygen
baseline+10%
Baseline+20%
Notes:
Per Draft 11
above initial measured PPM
Table 2: Recommended caution/alarm settings for transformers with no previous gas data
Transformers with a stable gassing history:

Use the GAS-Guard to measure the transformer oil for thirty (30) days in order to establish baseline
levels of the eight fault gases. Set the GAS-Guard caution/alarms levels to the measured baseline levels
+ value (PPM) shown below.
Gas
Caution PPM
+value (PPM)
Alarm PPM
+value (PPM)
Hydrogen
+50
+100
Methane
+60
+120
Acetylene
+2
+5
Ethylene
+25
+50
Ethane
+33
+65
Carbon Monoxide
+175
+350
Carbon Dioxide
+1750
+3500
Oxygen
baseline+10%
Baseline+20%
Notes:
Table 3: Recommended caution/alarm settings for transformers with a stable gassing history
6 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Gassing Transformers which have been degassed:

Set the caution level to 50% and the alarm level to 100% of the low-end CAUTION ppm limits
proposed by IEEE PC57.104 Draft 11, published April 21, 2004; except acetylene, as noted below.
Gas
Caution PPM
Alarm PPM
Hydrogen
50
100
Methane
60
120
Acetylene
Ethylene
25
50
Ethane
33
65
Carbon Monoxide
175
350
Carbon Dioxide
1750
3500
Oxygen
baseline+10%
Baseline+20%
Notes:
Per Draft 11
Table 4: Recommended caution/alarm settings for gassing transformers after degassing
Transformers with an unstable gassing history which have not been

degassed:
There are no recommendations possible for transformers in this category. In order to establish the
caution and alarm levels, allow the GAS-Guard to run for thirty (30) days to establish gassing trends
and baseline measurements. After this data has been collected, you should consult with Siemens
(support@serveron.com) to determine the appropriate caution and alarm settings for the transformer.
Viewing GAS-Guard Data

The GAS-Guard data can be viewed using the supplied GAS-Guard View software or the optional
Serveron Monitoring Service Client software. A copy of the GAS-Guard View software and users
manual can be found on the CD that shipped with the GAS-Guard. Alternatively, the GAS-Guard can
present data to SCADA systems using DNP3 or Modbus protocols. Please contact a Siemens
representative for further information regarding the Serveron Monitoring Service or to integrate the
GAS-Guard with a SCADA system
7 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Front panel lights (Indicators)

The Siemens GAS-Guard has three colored lights (LEDs) located on the front panel. These lights are
described in the following Table as they appear on the front panel, from top to bottom.
Light
Alarm
Notes:
The GAS-Guard has detected one or more gas values equal to or
greater than their respective alarm settings.
The GAS-Guard needs service. The service indicator is activated by
a number of GAS-Guard-specific parameters. For cause
identification proceed as follows-
Service
GAS-Guard View:
Open GAS-Guard View program and update the unit database. After
updating the database open the event-log and view recorded event
condition.
Serveron Monitoring Service:
Open the Serveron Monitoring Service Client program and view the
event log. Contact Technical Support group at
(support@serveron.com).
Note: Depending on the cause for Service, the GAS-Guard may
need to perform an analysis before the blue Service LED is turned
OFF.
Power
The GAS-Guard is ON.
Table 5: Front panel lights
8 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Turning the GAS-Guard On/Off

CAUTION: Always ensure helium is being supplied to the analyzer. Never leave the helium
inlet to the GAS-Guard exposed to atmosphere.
CAUTION: The GAS-Guard is designed to operate continuously. When powering down the
GAS-Guard for extended periods of time (more than 24 hours), always close the oil supply and
return valves to the analyzer.
To isolate (shut off) the oil inlet and oil outlet ports, close the transformer oil supply and return valves
or close the Siemens manual DGA (sample port/oil shutoff) valve as well as the Siemens oil return
valve located on the bleed fixture.
The figure below is a typical example of one of these valves. There are at least two valves per
installation, one for the inlet and one for the outlet. The exact location and number of these valves will
vary by installation. The valve is shown in the ON position in the following figure.
Figure 2: Oil shut off valve

For whatever reason, if the GAS-Guard is consistently unable to complete its sample runs, Siemens
recommends powering down the GAS-Guard and closing the supply and return valves (described
above) until the exact nature of the problem is understood and/or corrected. This will ensure no
damage is caused to the GAS-Guard.
9 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Manual DGA Sampling

A manual DGA sample port is installed in-line with the GAS-Guard oil supply tubing. Siemens
recommends this port for correlation of GAS-Guard data to manual DGA data. The location of the
sample port will vary by installation. The sample port provided with the GAS-Guard is a -in locking
valve with a 1/4-in FNPT fitting. No special procedures are required when obtaining a manual DGA
sample.
Figure 3: DGA sample port
Operational Parameters
Please see the Siemens GAS-Guard Data Sheet available online at www.serveron.com.
10 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Maintenance
The Siemens GAS-Guard has been designed to keep maintenance to a minimum. The following will
help you determine the best service plan.
Helium and Verification Gas

Helium Gas
The helium gas cylinder will last greater than four (4) years based on the default four hour sampling
interval. It is important that the gauge on the regulator be checked quarterly and a leak-check solution
applied to fittings biannually to ensure no leaks have developed. The helium cylinder should be
replaced when the pressure gauge reads less than 150psi (10.34 bar).
Helium Dryer
The helium dryer will last greater than four (4) years based on the default four hour sampling interval.
A leak-check solution should be applied to the helium dryer fittings bi-annually to ensure no leaks
have developed. The helium dryer should be replaced when the helium cylinder is replaced.
Helium Cylinder and Dryer Removal and Replacement

WARNING: When full, the helium cylinder is pressured to greater than 2000psi (138
bar). Helium is regulated to 80psi (5.5 bar), nominal, before entering the GAS-Guard,
Always follow Compressed Gas Association (CGA) guidelines when handling and
transporting compressed gases.
CAUTION: Use of helium other than 99.9999% pure research or chromatographic grade
with less than (0.2 ppm) H2O content will VOID the GAS-Guard warranty.
1)
Turn off power to the GAS-Guard by opening the GAS-Guard door and toggling the power
switch located in the upper right hand corner to the OFF position.
2)
Turn the helium cylinder valve clockwise to the fully OFF position.
3)
Using a 7/16-in wrench, remove the 1/8-in helium inlet and outlet lines from the top and
bottom of the helium dryer.
WARNING: A small amount of high-pressure helium will be released upon loosening

the fitting.
4)
Using a suitable wrench, remove the helium regulator from the cylinder valve.
11 of 18

5)
810-1734-00 Rev A
Carefully support the regulator to prevent any damage to the 1/8-in helium line or
regulator.
CAUTION: It is extremely important that no water or other foreign contaminates be

allowed to enter the open regulator fitting or tubing.
6)
Remove the helium cylinder from its mounting bracket.
7)
Remove the helium dryer from its mounting clips.
8)
Verify the replacement cylinder meets the following specifications:
9)
Chromatographic grade helium
99.9999% pure/Grade (6.0)
Less than 0.2 ppm H2O
CGA-580 fitting
Position the new helium cylinder in the mounting bracket and secure the cylinder in place.
10) Reinstall the regulator onto the helium cylinder. Do not use Teflon tape or pipe dope.
11) Orient the gauge vertically and tighten the CGA fitting.
12) If necessary, reorient the helium cylinder so that the gauge on the regulator can be clearly
seen.
13) Install the new helium dryer in the mounting clips. The dryer is not flow directional.
Note: Do not remove the helium dryer plugs at this time.

14) Verify the helium regulator shutoff valve is closed and slowly turn the valve located on top
of the helium cylinder fully counterclockwise (open).

15) Slowly turn helium regulator shutoff valve counterclockwise (open) until helium begins to
flow. At this point, gas should be escaping from the stainless steel tubing.
CAUTION: Do not open the regulator shutoff valve completely to regulate the helium flow.
16) Leaving the helium flowing, remove the top helium dryer plug and attach the free end of
the 10-ft helium line to the top of the helium dryer.

17) With the helium continuing to flow reinstall the line to the bottom of the helium dryer.
18) Now turn the regulator shutoff valve fully counterclockwise (open).
19) Confirm all four helium connections and the helium regulator to helium tank connections
are leak-tight by applying a leak-check solution to the fittings.

Note: The leak check is very important as even the smallest leak can substantially reduce the
life of the helium cylinder.
The helium regulator outlet pressure is preset at 80psi (5.5 bar), nominal, and requires no adjustment.
12 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Verification Gas
The verification gas certification is three (3) years and the cylinder holds enough gas for over 4 years
worth of verification runs based on the default every three days sampling interval. It is important that
the gauge on the regulator be checked quarterly and a leak-check solution applied to fittings biannually to insure no leaks have developed. The verification cylinder should be replaced when the
high pressure gauge reads less than 25psi (1.72 bar).
CAUTION: Use of verification gas that does not meet Siemens specifications will VOID
the GAS-Guard warranty.
Verification Gas Cylinder Removal and Replacement

WARNING: When full, the verification gas cylinder is pressured to greater than 500psi (34 bar).
Verification gas is regulated to 8psi (0.5 bar), nominal, before entering the GAS-Guard. Always
follow Compressed Gas Association (CGA) guidelines when handling and transporting
compressed gases.
The verification gas cylinder is used to automatically verify and calibrate the GAS-Guard. The cylinder
contains a certified NIST-traceable concentration of the eight-transformer fault gases measured by the
GAS-Guard.
1)
2)
Turn the verification cylinder tank valve to the fully OFF (clockwise) position.
3)
Using a 9/16-in wrench loosen the verification cylinder to regulator union.
WARNING: A small amount of high-pressure verification gas will be released upon loosening
the fitting.
4)
While supporting the verification cylinder release the Velcro strap retaining the verification
cylinder in the bracket.
5)
Install the new verification cylinder into the mounting bracket and secure using the Velcro
strap.
6)
Connect the cylinder to the regulator union and tighten.
7)
Turn the knob on the top of the verification cylinder counterclockwise until it is fully open.
The regulator requires no pressure adjustment.
8)
Confirm that the bottle to regulator connection is leak-tight by applying a leak-check

solution to the fitting. Wipe away any excess leak-check solution.
Note: The leak check is very important, as even the smallest leak can substantially reduce the
life of the verification cylinder.
13 of 18
9)
810-1734-00 Rev A
For Serveron Monitoring Service users, please complete and return the Verification cylinder
data sheet to Technical Support (support@serveron.com) after the Verification cylinder is
replaced.
Figure 4: Installed verification cylinder
Leak Check Fittings

After the first month of continuous use, all regulator, gas and oil fittings should be checked for leaks. A
semi-annual check of these fittings is recommended following the one month initial check.
Replacing Fuses
The GAS-Guard has a variable input power supply capable of receiving input of 115VAC or 230VAC
15%, 50/60 Hz. Current draw is 6A max. at 115VAC and 3A max. at 230VAC. There are three
4A/250V type 3AG (T) fuses installed for the power supply (line and neutral) and the GAS-Guards
enclosure heater (line).
CAUTION: Replace fuses with same type and rating only.
14 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Oil Filter Service

The GAS-Guard uses two inline screen type oil filters. Under normal operation, no filter maintenance is
required. If service is require, the filter consist of three main parts: the filter housing, filter screen and
the filter cap. For filter service proceed as follows:
1)
2)
Loosen the filter cap while supporting the filter housing with an adjustable end wrench. The
exact filter location will vary by installation.
3)
After loosening the filter cap slowly back off the cap until transformer oil starts flowing out
the purge hole located on the side of the filter cap.
4)
Let the oil continue to flow until a clear stream of oil void of any contaminates is visible.
5)
Tighten filter cap.
6)
Turn on power to GAS-Guard.
Figure 5: Filter assembly
15 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs)

Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) are defined as customer replaceable parts onsite without
decommissioning the GAS-Guard.
Part #
Description
270-0004-XX
290-0020-XX
290-0017-XX
292-0018-XX
292-0019-XX
370-0025-XX
370-0026-XX
370-0027-XX
430-0032-XX
750-0076-XX
750-0084-XX
750-0090-XX
250-0130-XX
R750-0076-XX
R750-0084-XX
Helium Dryer
Regulator, CAL,
Cylinder, Verification
Regulator Helium
Regulator Helium w/ Pressure Switch
LED, Front Panel, Green
LED, Front Panel, Red
LED, Front Panel, Blue
Fuse, TD, 4 Amps, 1/4" x 1 1/4"
Column Assembly, GAS-Guard 8
Assy, Power Supply
Column Assembly, GAS-Guard 3
Filter, Oil
Replacement Column Assembly1, GAS-Guard 8
Refurbished Power Supply Assy
Table 6: Customer Replaceable Units

Please contact Technical Support (support@serveron.com) for removal and installation procedures.
Cleaning
Internal Cleaning
No internal cleaning of the GAS-Guard is required; doing so may cause damage the internal
components and void the warranty.
External Cleaning
No external cleaning of the GAS-Guard is required. If external cleaning is desired, water is the only
recommended cleaning solution. Direct spray of high-pressure water onto the GAS-Guard door seal,
LEDs, oil/helium bulkhead fittings and cable glands should be avoided.
GAS-Guard 3 does not require replacement column assembly
16 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Return Shipping Instructions

Prior to returning parts to Siemens a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number must be obtained
from Siemens technical support:
E-mail: support@serveron.com).
Returned items should be shipped in the original packaging or like packaging to avoid shipping
damage. If original packaging or like packaging is not available contact Technical Support for shipping
assistance.
Warning: Shipping of the GAS-Guard without installing the internal foam support, part #
010-0038-XX, can cause damage to the GAS-Guard and void the warranty.
Figure 6: Internal foam support
17 of 18
810-1734-00 Rev A
Forms
Verification Cylinder Data Sheet
Upon successful installation of your verification cylinder; please complete and fax or email this Verification Cylinder Data Sheet to Technical Support at:
+1 (503) 924-3290 fax
or support@serveron.com e-mail
Attn:
Siemens Product Support
From:
Company:
Site:
Site Address:
City, State and Zip:
Country:
Gas Cylinder Information

Installers Name:
GAS-Guard Serial
Number:
Installation Date:
Helium high pressure
gauge (psig):
Verification high pressure
gauge (psig):
Manufacture Date:
Lot Number:
Gas Components
Hydrogen
Oxygen
Methane
Carbon Monoxide
Carbon Dioxide
Ethylene
Ethane
Acetylene
Certified Concentrations
H2
O2
CH4
CO
CO2
C2H4
C2H6
C2H2
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
Table 7: Verification cylinder datasheet
18 of 18
GAS-Guard View
Software User's Manual
v2.0
810-1735-01 Rev A
June 10, 2008
www.serveron.com
3305 NW Aloclek Drive
+1 (503) 924-3200 phone
+1 (503) 924-3290 fax
Corporate Office: (800) 880-2552

Technical Support: (866) 273-7763
All rights reserved
Serveron and LoadGuide are registered trademarks of Serveron Corporation.
Microsoft, Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft .NET, Windows NT, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, DirectX and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
FreeWave is a registered trademark of FreeWave Technologies. Unicode is a registered
trademark of the Unicode Consortium.
810-1735-01 Rev A
GAS-Guard View Software User's Manual v2.0
Table of Contents
Before You Begin .................................................................................................................................. 6
About This Manual .......................................................................................................................... 6
About GAS-Guard View 2.0 Software .......................................................................................... 6
GAS-Guard View 2.0 Feature Overview .................................................................................. 7
Installing GAS-Guard View 2.0 ......................................................................................................... 9
System Requirements ...................................................................................................................... 9
Choosing an Installation Configuration ....................................................................................... 9
Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................... 10
Upgrade Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 10
Using GAS-Guard View 2.0 .............................................................................................................. 12
Starting GAS-Guard View 2.0 ...................................................................................................... 12
Creating New Files (Adding an Asset) ....................................................................................... 13
Opening Files .................................................................................................................................. 14
Navigating to Company, Sites, Assets and Monitors ............................................................... 15
Navigation Pane Icons and Notification ..................................................................................... 15
Working with Files......................................................................................................................... 17
Using Legacy Files ..................................................................................................................... 17
Corrupt or Invalid Files ............................................................................................................. 18
Removing a File from the Navigation Pane ............................................................................... 18
Using Commands........................................................................................................................... 19
Using Tabs....................................................................................................................................... 20
Using the Asset Status Tab ....................................................................................................... 20
Using the Graphs........................................................................................................................ 22
Graph Toolbar .......................................................................................................................... 23
Installing and Using Licenses ....................................................................................................... 25
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 25
Automatic Scheduled Polling Option ..................................................................................... 26
Diagnostics Package Option ..................................................................................................... 26
GAS-Guard View 2.0 Reference ....................................................................................................... 28
Navigation Pane ............................................................................................................................. 28
Viewing Pane .................................................................................................................................. 29
Transformer Asset Tabs ............................................................................................................ 29
Status Tab.................................................................................................................................. 29
Gas in Oil Tab........................................................................................................................... 31
Limits Tab ................................................................................................................................. 33
Percent of Alarm Tab .............................................................................................................. 33
Rate of Change Tab ................................................................................................................. 34
Duval Triangle Tab.................................................................................................................. 34
Sensor Data Tab ....................................................................................................................... 34
Extractor Data Tab ................................................................................................................... 35
Retention Time Tab ................................................................................................................. 35
Verification Data Tab .............................................................................................................. 35
3 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Company Specific Tabs ............................................................................................................. 36

Welcome Tab ............................................................................................................................ 36
Polling Tab ................................................................................................................................ 36
Status Tab.................................................................................................................................. 38
Site Specific Tabs ........................................................................................................................ 38
Status Tab.................................................................................................................................. 39
Monitor Specific Tabs ................................................................................................................ 39
Sampling Tab (Monitor icon selected in Navigation Pane) ............................................... 39
Communications Tab (Monitor icon selected in Navigation Pane) ................................. 39
Menu Commands........................................................................................................................... 39
File Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 40
File New ........................................................................................................................... 40
File Open .......................................................................................................................... 41
File Close .......................................................................................................................... 41
File Archive...................................................................................................................... 41
File Export ........................................................................................................................ 41
File Print ........................................................................................................................... 42
File Print Preview ............................................................................................................... 42
File Exit................................................................................................................................. 42
Action Menu ............................................................................................................................... 42
Action Select Modem ......................................................................................................... 42
Action Send Diagnostic Data ........................................................................................ 43
Action Rename Company (Company selected, Status tab) ...................................... 43
Action Rename Site (Site selected, Status tab) ............................................................ 43
Action Rename Asset (Transformer asset selected, Status tab)................................ 44
Action Poll Now (Transformer asset selected, Status tab) ............................................ 44
Action Enter DGA (Transformer asset selected, Gas in Oil tab) .............................. 44
Action Start Sample Run (Transformer asset selected, Gas in Oil tab) ....................... 44
Action Update Limits (Transformer asset selected, Limits tab) ................................... 44
Action Start Verification Run (Transformer asset selected, Verification Data tab) ... 45
Action Start Calibration Run (Transformer asset selected, Verification Data tab) .... 45
Action Change Monitor Password (Transformer asset selected, Status tab) ......... 45
Action Set Monitor Date and Time (Transformer asset selected, Status tab) ............. 46
Action View Log (Transformer asset selected, Status tab) ....................................... 46
Action Sample Hourly (Monitor selected, Sampling tab) ............................................. 46
Action Check Communications (Monitor selected, Communications tab) ................ 47
Action Update Communications (Monitor selected, Communications tab) .............. 47
View Menu .................................................................................................................................. 47
View Refresh (F5)................................................................................................................ 47
View Auto Refresh ............................................................................................................. 47
View Navigator ................................................................................................................... 47
Help Menu .................................................................................................................................. 47
Help Users Manual............................................................................................................ 47
Help Frequently Asked Questions ................................................................................... 48
Help Release Notes............................................................................................................. 48
Help Licensing .................................................................................................................... 48
4 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Help Install Sample Files ................................................................................................... 49

Help About Siemens Client ............................................................................................... 49
Using the Duval Triangle .............................................................................................................. 49
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 49
Interpretation of regions ........................................................................................................... 50
Interpretation of the Triangle ................................................................................................... 51
Multiple data points................................................................................................................... 51
Summary ..................................................................................................................................... 51
Using the Rogers Ratio Viewer .................................................................................................... 52
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 52
Functional Overview ................................................................................................................. 52
Interpretation of Regions .......................................................................................................... 54
Interpreting the Graphical View .............................................................................................. 55
Summary ..................................................................................................................................... 55
Maintaining GAS-Guard View 2.0 Installations ............................................................................ 56
Configuring Communications ..................................................................................................... 56
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 56
Local Area Network (LAN) ...................................................................................................... 57
Telephone Modem ..................................................................................................................... 57
RS-232........................................................................................................................................... 58
RS-232 with radio (FreeWave) ............................................................................................... 58
Telephone Modem with radio (FreeWave) ......................................................................... 59
Configuring Modems .................................................................................................................... 60
Modem Initialization ................................................................................................................. 60
Advanced Dialing Strings ......................................................................................................... 61
Overview .................................................................................................................................. 61
Send/Expect Protocol ............................................................................................................. 61
Configuring TAPI Modems ...................................................................................................... 62
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................. 63
Corrupt or Invalid Files ............................................................................................................. 63
Overview .................................................................................................................................. 63
File Structure ............................................................................................................................ 63
Causes of File Corruption....................................................................................................... 66
Repairing Damaged Files ....................................................................................................... 66
Menu Items Unavailable (Grayed Out)............................................................................... 67
Theory of Operations ..................................................................................................................... 67
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 67
Viewer Component .................................................................................................................... 68
Poller Component ...................................................................................................................... 68
5 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Before You Begin

About This Manual
This Users Manual provides the information that you need to install, setup, and use the
Siemens GAS-Guard View 2.0 software to monitor and diagnose the state of your
transformer assets.
The manual is organized into chapters of increasing depth and detail. The chapters
Installing GAS-Guard View and Using GAS-Guard View are informal user guides. The
GAS-Guard View Reference chapter provides detailed descriptions of all parts of the user
interface. Finally, the chapter titled Maintaining GAS-Guard View Installations provides
additional information.
Note: this manual assumes you have basic familiarity with the operating
principles of your Siemens Online Transformer Monitor. If you require
information regarding the features, operation, and installation of a Siemens
transformer monitor please review the technical documentation available at
the Serveron web site www.serveron.com or contact your local distributor.
Current contact information for authorized distributors and technical support
is published on the Serveron web site.
About GAS-Guard View 2.0 Software

GAS-Guard View 2.0 is a software application for Windows-compatible PCs. It is used to
retrieve and display data that has been collected by a Siemens GAS-Guard on-line
transformer monitor and also to change settings within the monitor. GAS-Guard View 2.0
does not measure gas-in-oil levels; the GAS-Guard monitor makes those measurements.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 retrieves these measurements from the monitor and displays them in a
variety of formats. GAS-Guard monitors measure, record, and report the status of fault
gases in transformer insulating oil.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 requires an Ethernet, dial-up, direct serial or radio link from the PC to
the monitor in order to retrieve measurements and change settings. Transformer data
retrieved by GAS-Guard View 2.0 is stored in ordinary files on the PC.
Retrieving data does not cause the monitor to lose or delete its internal measurement
history. This allows more than one computer running GAS-Guard View 2.0 to remotely
retrieve data from a single GAS-Guard monitor. Alternatively, the security features of GASGuard View 2.0 can be used to restrict monitor access to a single, privileged installation on a
single computer.
6 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Note: GAS-Guard View 2.0 is fully compatible with transformer data files
created by GAS-Guard View version 1.6 or earlier. After you install or
upgrade to GAS-Guard View 2.0 software, however, all GAS-Guard View
users at your site must upgrade to version 2.0. Files created or updated with
Siemens GAS-Guard View 2.0 software cannot be viewed using older
versions of GAS-Guard View software. Users who have not upgraded will
be notified of an error when they attempt to view or update these files.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 Feature Overview

End date and time range controls
Tabs
Viewing pane
Menu bar
Application
Toolbar
Transformer
Asset
Graph
Toolbar
Navigation
pane
Figure 1. GAS-Guard View 2.0 User Interface Overview.
Navigation pane: allows selection of the company, site, transformer or monitor for viewing.
In addition, the icons provide notification information (e.g. attention required, data not
accessible) about the status of monitored assets.
Viewing pane: contains one or more tabs. The tabs collectively display the state of the asset
or other item selected in the Navigation pane. Each tab contains a separate purpose-built
display. For transformer assets, the available tabs include the Status view, Gas in Oil PPM
graph, Limits view, Percent of Alarm graph, Sensor and Extractor Data graphs, Retention
Times graph, and Verification Data graph.
7 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Menu bar: allows selection of user commands.

Application Tool bar: contains the End Date and Range controls.
End Date and Range controls: affect the display of data for many of the tabs that appear in
the viewing pane, particularly the graphs. Changing the setting of either control causes an
immediate refresh of the viewing pane to conform to the new setting. The default End Date
is the timestamp of the most recent available data while the default Range is 1 month.
Graph Toolbar: Displayed only when a graph is visible. Contains commands specific to
graphs.
Later sections of this document describe all features of the user interface in detail.
8 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Installing GAS-Guard View 2.0

System Requirements
Siemens GAS-Guard View 2.0 requires a computer with 533 MHz Pentium-III or higher and
minimum 128MB of memory (192MB recommended). 1024x768 or higher screen resolution
is highly recommended (visual anomalies may occur on an 800x600 display). The video
system must be configured to display at least 256 colors. Siemens strongly recommends use
of the highest color mode available from your display subsystem. This may be called high
color, true color, 24-bit color, or 32-bit color depending on your vendor.
Installation requires approximately 50MB of hard disk space. At least 20MB of additional
space should be available for normal use. Actual disk usage varies with the number of
monitored assets.
Siemens GAS-Guard View 2.0 is a Windows-based application. This product works with
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems. Windows 98,
Windows ME, and Windows NT operating systems are not supported. Microsoft
Windows Vista is not supported.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 requires the Microsoft .NET Framework version 2.0.
Choosing an Installation Configuration

Siemens GAS-Guard View 2.0 may be installed in any one of three configurations: Viewer
Only, Server or Standalone. In order to choose the configuration that best meets your
needs, it is helpful to know a little about the internal organization of GAS-Guard View 2.0
software.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 is made up of two major components, the Viewer and the Poller. The
Viewer is the application you see and interact with. The Poller works "behind the scenes,
communicating with your Siemens monitor(s) and saving the data they gather in files.
In the Viewer Only configuration, as the name implies, the Poller component is not
installed. Viewer Only installations are limited to accessing data retrieved and stored in
files by some other GAS-Guard View 2.0 installation. This configuration is appropriate in a
workgroup setting where some users access transformer data but do not have the need or
the ability to communicate directly with Siemens monitors from their computer.
The Server configuration is the counterpart of the Viewer configuration. It functions as the
point of communication with your Siemens monitors. A Server installation can receive
monitor data when no user is logged in. Server installations are particularly appropriate
when the host computer operates continuously and has ongoing access to the necessary
communications resources (modems, network adapters, etc.) Server installations are
frequently unattended and may be expected to operate 24x7 for long periods of time.
To install a Server configuration, you are required to specify an account identity under
which the Poller component will execute. To be successful at this task, you should have
9 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
knowledge of Windows file sharing and network security fundamentals. The account you
choose must have sufficient privileges. These include the privilege to access all files
(including network files) that will be used by the Poller and also privilege to use the systemwide portion of the Registry. In keeping with industry best practices, Siemens recommends
that you do not assign unnecessary privileges to this account.
If these concepts are not clear to you, Siemens recommends that you create a Standalone
configuration.
In the Standalone configuration, the Poller component is installed in your Startup folder
and runs only when you are logged in. Data cannot be received from the monitor when you
are not logged in. The benefit of the Standalone configuration is that it largely eliminates
the need for special knowledge of file sharing and network security.
A Standalone installation of GAS-Guard View 2.0 behaves like a traditional desktop
application program. Note that this configuration is intended for use by a single user on a
single computer. If multiple user login identities will be accessing GAS-Guard View 2.0 on
the same computer, Siemens recommends that a Server configuration be used instead.
Installation Procedure
Note: Administrative privilege is required to install the software.
When you insert the installation CD-ROM, GAS-Guard View 2.0 setup should start
automatically. If it does not, please double click setup.exe in the INSTALL folder of the CDROM to start it. Setup will install the necessary prerequisite software and then install
version 2.0 of GAS-Guard View.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 requires version 2.0 of the Microsoft .NET Framework. If the
installation program detects that this mandatory prerequisite is not present, it will be
installed automatically from the CD-ROM.
Siemens recommends that you use Windows Update to check for any recent updates to
Microsoft components after installing GAS-Guard View 2.0 on your computer.
When installation is complete, you may start GAS-Guard View 2.0 using either the Start
menu or the Desktop icon.
Upgrade Procedure
Note: Administrative privilege is required to upgrade the software.
Insert the installation CD-ROM. GAS-Guard View 2.0 setup should start automatically. If it
does not, please double click SETUP.EXE in the INSTALL folder of the CD-ROM to start it.
10 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Setup will automatically upgrade your existing installation to version 2.0 of GAS-Guard
View.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 requires version 2.0 of the Microsoft .NET Framework. If the
installation program detects that this mandatory prerequisite is not present, it will be
installed automatically from the CD-ROM.
Note: GAS-Guard View 2.0 is fully compatible with transformer data files
created by GAS-Guard View version 1.6 or earlier. After you install or
upgrade to Siemens GAS-Guard View 2.0 software, however, all GAS-Guard
View users at your site must upgrade to version 2.0. Files created or updated
with Siemens GAS-Guard View 2.0 software cannot be viewed using older
versions of GAS-Guard View software. Users who have not upgraded will
be notified of an error when they attempt to view or update these files.
Siemens recommends that you use Windows Update to check for any recent updates to
Microsoft components after upgrading to GAS-Guard View version 2.0 on your computer.
When installation is complete, you may start GAS-Guard View 2.0 using either the Start
menu or the Desktop icon.
11 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Using GAS-Guard View 2.0

This chapter contains an informal guide to the features of GAS-Guard View 2.0. Details of
each part of the user interface appear in the GAS-Guard View Reference chapter later in
this manual.
Starting GAS-Guard View 2.0

Upon successful installation, a GAS-Guard View 2.0 icon is created on the Desktop and a
GAS-Guard View 2.0 item is created in Start Program Files Siemens. Use one of
these shortcuts to launch GAS-Guard View. The navigation pane will display the message
No Files and the Welcome screen will be displayed. The Welcome screen is shown in
Figure 2. GAS-Guard View 2.0 Welcome Screen.
Figure 2. GAS-Guard View 2.0 Welcome Screen.

You can now install and open the sample files as described on the Welcome screen. You can
also create a new transformer data file if your installation configuration supports this
operation (Viewer Only configurations do not support the creation of new files).
12 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Alternatively, if this installation is an upgrade from GAS-Guard View 1.62 or earlier and
you have existing transformer data files, you can open these files.
Creating New Files (Adding an Asset)

Note: this operation is available if you selected the Standalone or Server
configuration during installation. If you selected Viewer Only, operations
that create and modify files are not available to you.
To add a new monitored asset to the navigation pane, create a new file. The file holds all
measurements and other information about the asset, its monitor, and its place in the
navigation hierarchy.
Use File New to create a new file. This menu item displays the New File Creation
wizard. The first page of the wizard is shown in Figure 3. New File Creation wizard, initial
page.
Figure 3. New File Creation wizard, initial page.

When you click Next, the wizard presents a series of pages that collect the information
required to display and communicate with a Siemens monitor. At the conclusion of the
13 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
wizard, the new asset and its monitor are added to your navigation pane for display and/or
update (polling).
For a detailed description of the wizard, see the section Configuring Communications later
in this manual.
Opening Files
To familiarize yourself with the GAS-Guard View 2.0 user interface, you may examine the
sample files. To do so, first click the Install Sample Files button on the Welcome screen or
click Install Sample Files in the Help menu. Use the browse box to choose a location (e.g.
your My Documents folder). When you click OK, the files are copied to the location you
chose (e.g., My Documents). You do not need the installation media to install the sample
files.
Now select Open from the File menu and navigate to the location you selected in the
previous step. Select one of the sample files and click the Open button. The file contents are
added to the navigation pane. The viewing pane displays the Status tab shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Asset selected in navigation pane and Status tab displayed in viewing pane.
14 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Note: since the contents of the sample files were captured some time ago, the
Data Age section on the Status tab warns you that the file contents are not
up-to-date and the Alarm History section displays the message WARNING:
No Recent Gas Data.
Additional information about the Status tab can be found in the section Using the Asset
Status Tab later in this manual.
Navigating to Company, Sites, Assets and Monitors

The navigation pane is used to select a company, site, transformer or monitor for display. It
is organized as a hierarchy of Company, Sites, Assets and their Monitors. Its structure is
similar to the navigation pane found in Windows Explorer and in many other software
applications and web sites.
The navigation pane remembers all the files you have opened and provides easy access to
their contents. When you open additional files, their contents are merged with existing sites
and companies if the names match.
Click on the small + adjacent to an icon to expand it. Expanding the transformer icon, for
example, displays the icon representing the monitor. If you then click the monitor icon, the
viewing pane redraws to show tabs specific to managing the monitors operation
(scheduling and communications).
Navigation Pane Icons and Notification

Icons in the navigation pane change to notify you of conditions that may require your
attention. By default, items in the navigation pane are represented by the basic icons shown
in Figure 5.
Folder icon representing a
Company or Site
Icon representing a Transformer
Asset
Icon representing an Online
Transformer Monitor
Figure 5. Basic icons.
15 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
When an alarm or caution condition is encountered on a transformer asset, or a service

required condition is encountered on a transformer monitor, the corresponding icon is
temporarily replaced by the pending notification icon: a yellow triangle containing an
exclamation point. The pending notification icon is shown in Figure 6.
Icon representing an item that

requires your attention
Figure 6. Pending notification icon

After an asset or monitor with a pending notification is selected and displayed in more
detail, the icon is replaced by an acknowledged notification icon. This appears as the
original transformer or monitor icon with a tiny yellow triangle superimposed at upper
right.
The acknowledged notification icon is displayed as long as the original condition (alarm,
caution, or service required) is present. When an update (polling operation) is performed
and the condition is cleared, the acknowledged notification icon is replaced by the company,
site, transformer or monitor icon.
The acknowledged notification icons are shown in Figure 7.
Icon representing a Company or Site holding an

item with a condition that has been acknowledged
Icon representing a Transformer condition that
has been acknowledged
Icon representing an Online Transformer Monitor
condition that has been acknowledged.
Figure 7. Acknowledged notification icons

Pending and acknowledged notification icons propagate upward in the navigation pane. If
any of the assets in a site are in a notification condition, the site icon displays the highest
priority (pending or acknowledged) notification icon for any of its assets. Similarly, if any
of a companys sites are in a notification state, the company icon will also display the
highest priority icon. This behavior allows you to determine at a glance when one of your
assets or monitors requires attention.
16 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Finally, distinct icons are displayed for companies, sites, assets or monitors when their data
is contained in a file that cannot be accessed by GAS-Guard View 2.0. These icons appear as
the original company, site, asset or monitor icon with a tiny white x on a red background
superimposed at upper right. The inaccessible file icons are shown in Figure 8.
Icon representing a Company or Site contained in a
file or files that are not accessible to GAS-Guard
View
Icon representing a Transformer contained in a file
that is not accessible to GAS-Guard View
Icon representing an Online Transformer Monitor
contained in a file that is not accessible to GASGuard View
Figure 8. Inaccessible file icons
A file may be inaccessible because:
It has been moved or deleted, or
It is stored on a file share that is not accessible because of an interruption in your
network service, or
You no longer have the permissions required to access the file, or
The contents of the file have become corrupted so that GAS-Guard View 2.0 can no
longer load them.
When you click on an icon representing an inaccessible company, site, asset, or monitor, the
item does not become selected and the contents of the Viewing pane do not change. Instead,
a dialog box is displayed. The dialog box text provides a short explanation of the reason the
item is inaccessible, e.g. file not found.
Working with Files

Using Legacy Files
Files created by GAS-Guard View version 1.6 (or earlier) are considered legacy files.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 is fully compatible with legacy files.
After you install or upgrade to Siemens GAS-Guard View 2.0 software, all GAS-Guard View
users at your site must upgrade to version 2.0. Files created or updated with Siemens GASGuard View 2.0 software cannot be viewed using older versions of GAS-Guard View
software. Users who have not upgraded will be notified of an error when they attempt to
view or update a file created or updated by GAS-Guard View 2.0.
17 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Legacy files do not contain Company, Site or Asset Name information for use in the
Navigation pane so GAS-Guard View 2.0 uses the default terms Company, Site, and Asset
in the navigation pane. You can change these default names to your actual company, site
and asset names.
To change a name, first select the Company, Site, or Asset icon in the Navigation pane and
then click Rename in the Action menu. Updated values are stored in the file itself so the
change need only be performed once. Please see the Menu Commands section of this
manual for more information.
Corrupt or Invalid Files

GAS-Guard View 2.0 differs from earlier versions of GAS-Guard View in its handling of
corrupt or invalid files. GAS-Guard View 2.0 generally detects and refuses to open corrupt
or invalid files where earlier versions of GAS-Guard View may have provided partial
functionality or behaved incorrectly.
If you encounter a Corrupt or Invalid message when opening a legacy file, please see the
Troubleshooting section of this manual or contact Siemens or your Siemens representative
for assistance. In most cases, corrupt or invalid files can be repaired without loss of data.
Removing a File from the Navigation Pane

The contents of all the files you have created (File New) or opened (File Open)
are shown in the navigation pane. If you close GAS-Guard View 2.0, the contents of the
navigation pane are preserved: when you restart GAS-Guard View 2.0, navigation pane
contents are unchanged.
If you no longer wish to view one or more assets or their monitors, you can remove them
from your navigator using File Close. This menu item displays the Close Files dialog
shown in Figure 9.
18 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Figure 9. Close Files dialog.

Select the row(s) containing the monitor(s) you no longer wish to view and click OK. The
dialog clears and the screen is redrawn. If you close all files, the No files message is
displayed in the navigation pane and the Welcome screen appears in the viewing pane.
Sites continue to be displayed so long as they contain any visible transformer assets, and
companies continue to be displayed so long as they contain any visible sites. If you close all
the transformers within a Site, the Site will disappear from your navigator as well.
Closing a file merely removes the file from the navigation pane. It does not delete or alter
the file data itself. To again display information for a transformer and its monitor in GASGuard View 2.0, use File Open to add the file to the navigation pane.
Using Commands
Commands (user actions) appear in the GAS-Guard View 2.0 menu bar. Menu items are
unavailable (grayed out) when they do not apply to the current selection; for example, the
File Export menu item is available only when the Viewing Pane shows data that may
be exported. Otherwise, it is grayed out.
19 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Note: if your GAS-Guard View 2.0 installation is a Viewer Only

configuration, all commands that update or modify data are unavailable to
you. These commands must be performed from a Standalone or Server
configuration.
The contents of the Action menu change according to the currently selected navigation item
and tab. The command to Enter DGA, for example, is only available when viewing the
Gas in Oil graph that displays the DGA data. The Enter DGA command does not appear in
the menu when viewing other navigational selections or tabs.
Some Action menu commands are always present. These commands affect the GAS-Guard
View 2.0 application as a whole and appear at the top of the Action menu. They include
Select Modem and Send Diagnostic Data.
All GAS-Guard View 2.0 commands are described in the Menu Commands section of the
GAS-Guard View Reference section of this manual.
Using Tabs
This section provides an overview of the status and graphing tabs.
Using the Asset Status Tab

When a transformer asset is selected, the default (leftmost) tab presents a dashboard-like
status overview. The tab contains colored status indicators, an Alarm History display, and
certain textual information. The tab is shown in Figure 10.
20 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Figure 10. Status tab.

The groups of colored indicators on the upper left show:
The state of the gas PPM level alarm.
The state of the gas rate of change (ROC) alarm.
The status of the monitor.
The data age (an indication of whether data has recently been obtained from the
monitor).
The Event History section shows the status reported by the selected monitor over the
previous several days. This display expands to fill the available screen width. The colored
vertical bars represent the outcome of sample runs and other significant monitoring events.
Bars that represent successful sample runs are colored green, yellow or red to indicate the
most urgent condition detected by that sample run (normal, caution, or alarm). Black bars
are displayed to indicate that the monitor aborted a run due an error, and blue bars indicate
that the monitor encountered a Service Required condition. If the most recent data is more
than about 48 hours old, the Event History label displays WARNING: No Recent Gas Data
in red.
21 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Note: for more information about sample runs, Service Required conditions,
and other Siemens Online Transformer Monitor principles of operation,
please consult the documentation that was provided with your monitor or
visit http://www.serveron.com.
To obtain details of a particular days runs and other significant monitor events, move the
mouse pointer over the rectangle (tile) representing that day and click. A small dialog box
will be shown containing details of that days activity. Click OK to clear the dialog.
The Action menu for the Status tab contains several commands. For details of these
commands, please refer to the GAS-Guard View Reference chapter later in this manual.
Using the Graphs

The Gas in Oil PPM, Rate of Change, and Percent of Alarm graph tabs share several key
features.
The content of a typical graph tab is shown in Figure 11.
Graph toolbar
Secondary Y
(sensor) axis
DGA
legend
Graph title
DGA
Primary Y
axis label
Primary Y (gas
value) axis
X (time) axis
Graph
legend
Figure 11. Graph tab components.
These graphs display two vertical (Y) axes, one at the left and the other at the right. The
values of gases are always displayed relative to the left or primary axis, which may be either
logarithmic or linear. Sensor readings (LoadGuide, Ambient Temperature, etc) are
displayed relative to the right or secondary axis, which always displays a linear scale.
22 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
A graph legend indicating the color of each gas or sensor data series appears to the right of
the graph area. The graph legend relates colors to measured values. Carbon Monoxide
(CO), for example, is always shown in red. When a graph is first displayed, measured gas
values are shown while computed values and sensor values are hidden. The colored circle
adjacent to each series names in the legend is a control buttons. To display or hide a
particular gas or sensor data series, click the appropriate button.
Siemens GAS-Guard model GAS-Guard 8 and GAS-Guard 3 monitors support configurable
labeling for external sensors. For these models, the external sensor labels are taken from
information stored in the transformer monitor itself. The labels are normally configured
when the monitor is installed. GAS-Guard View 2.0 does not support the ability to change
the configured labels.
The legend information at extreme upper right indicates that one or more manual dissolved
gas analysis (DGA) readings are currently being displayed on the graph. This legend block
appears only when manual DGA readings are being shown. On the graph surface, manual
DGA data appears as small x markers in the color of the corresponding gas data series. To
see the numerical values of DGA data, simply slide the mouse over the area of the DGA.
For more information about the Gas in Oil PPM, Rate of Change, and Percent of Alarm
tabs, including instructions for entering manual DGA readings, see the corresponding
section in the GAS-Guard View Reference chapter later in this manual.
Graph Toolbar
Graph tabs contain their own toolbar. It is distinct from the Application Toolbar that
contains the End Date and Range controls. The graph toolbar is detailed in Figure 12.
Annotate
Copy to
Clipboard
Toggle:
Annotations
Print
Display Rogers
Ratio Viewer
Toggle: Point
Labels
Toggle: Data
Table
Toggle: Zoom
Figure 12. Graph Toolbar

23 of 70
Toggle: Primary
Y axis log/linear
810-1735-01 Rev A
Copy to Clipboard. This button allows the graph contents to be transferred to the Windows
Clipboard in one of three formats: bitmap, metafile, and text. Bitmap and metafile are
image formats compatible with many other applications. Text format allows the graph data
to be copied. In most cases, better results can be achieved with the File Export menu
item, which is described in the GAS-Guard View Menu Commands section of this manual.
Print. This button allows the graph contents to be printed. Its behavior is identical to the
File Print menu item, also described in the Menu Commands section.
Point Labels. This button allows point labels to be displayed or hidden. Point labels are
most useful when only a limited number of points are displayed (for example, a 3-day
view).
Data Table. GAS-Guard View 2.0 can display a data table which provides a tabular data
view of the data that is linked to the graph contents. The Data Table button allows the data
table to be displayed or hidden. When the mouse is moved over Data Table cells, the
corresponding point in the graph series is highlighted. When the mouse is moved over a
point in the graph series, the Data Table is automatically scrolled to display the
corresponding cell and that cell is highlighted.
Zoom. The zoom button enables or disables zooming the graph. With zoom enabled, you
can click in the graph area at the upper left corner of the area you wish to enlarge and drag
the mouse down and to the right to define the area you wish to display. When you release
the mouse button the selected area expands to fill the entire graph region and sliders
(similar to scroll bars) are displayed to allow the graph to be repositioned. You may zoom
repeatedly to magnify smaller areas or click the toggle again to restore the original
resolution.
Log Scale. The log/linear button changes the primary Y axis from a log scale to a linear
scale and back. Display of sensor values is not affected. Sensor values are displayed
relative to the secondary Y axis, which is always linear and displays a fixed range suitable
for sensors supported by Siemens.
Display Rogers Ratio Viewer. Clicking this button displays the Rogers Ratio Viewer, a
graphical transformer diagnostic display. The Rogers Ratio Viewer requires a Diagnostic
Package license from Serveron. For more information about licensing, see Installing and
Using Licenses. For more information about the Rogers Ratio Viewer, see Using the
Rogers Ratio Viewer.
Toggle Annotations. This button toggles the display of graph annotation markers.
Annotations are notes attached to particular points in time on the graph while their markers
are cartoon-style thought bubbles. To see the annotation contents, move the mouse over
the marker or click within the bubble.
Annotate. Clicking this button displays the Annotate dialog box, which allows you to enter
annotations (notes) that are associated with a point in time on the graph. In order to
annotate graphs, you must obtain a Diagnostic Package license from Serveron. For more
information about licensing, see Installing and Using Licenses.
24 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Installing and Using Licenses

Your initial installation of GAS-Guard View 2.0 is a fully-functional application for
monitoring and managing Siemens Online Transformer monitors. In addition, Siemens
offers options that require separate licensing. The options include:
The Automatic Scheduled Polling option, which provides the ability to perform
automatic scheduled polling for more than one monitor (automatic scheduled
polling for a single monitor is included in the initial installation).
The Diagnostics Package option, which includes Duvals Triangle, the Rogers Ratio
Viewer, and the ability to annotate graphs.
This section explains how to obtain, install, and use licenses for these extended features. To
purchase licenses, please contact Siemens or your Siemens representative.
Overview
Licensed features are enabled through a two-step process. The process begins when you
transmit your Machine ID via email to Serveron and is completed when you receive the
license key corresponding to the desired feature. You then install the license key into your
GAS-Guard View 2.0 installation in order to enable the feature. Your installation has only
one Machine ID, but you must obtain one license key from Serveron for each option you
wish to access.
In order to obtain a license key, you must first install GAS-Guard View 2.0 in either the
Standalone or the Server configuration. Requesting and installing license keys are
administrative activities that cannot be performed from a Viewer Only configuration.
To begin the process, start GAS-Guard View 2.0 and then click Licensing in the Help
menu to display the Licensing dialog. After a moment, the dialog box displays your
Machine ID and enables the Copy to Clipboard button.
Create an email message. Address it to support@serveron.com with subject License
Request. Paste the Machine ID into the body of the message. It should look like this (your
Machine ID value will be different):
Machine ID: 5F01-7C60-F311-43B2-3A8D
Send the email message. Serveron makes every effort to respond to license key requests
within two business days, but cannot guarantee response. If you do not receive a timely
response to your email, please contact Serveron Customer Support or your Serveron
representative.
When the email response arrives from Serveron, your license key will take the form of a text
file attachment. Please save the file attachment to a known, and preferably backed up
directory on your PC or another safe location. If you are ever forced to perform a complete
re-installation of GAS-Guard View 2.0, you may need to re-install your license keys.
After saving the license key file attachment, open GAS-Guard View 2.0 and again click
Licensing in the Help menu to display the Licensing dialog. Click the Browse button
located at left to display a standard Open File dialog. Navigate to the license key file (the
attachment you saved). Select the file and click OK. After a short pause, GAS-Guard View
25 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
2.0 should respond with a dialog stating 1 license key installed. If it does not, please try the
operation again. If the problem reoccurs, please contact Siemens or your Siemens
representative.
You can now make use of the feature or features enabled by your license.
Automatic Scheduled Polling Option

GAS-Guard View 2.0 maintains an internal table of licenses available for automatic polling.
Each license enables automatic polling for a single monitor. When you install GAS-Guard
View 2.0 in either the Standalone or Server configuration, the table is initialized with one (1)
license.
An automated polling license key encodes a number of additional licenses. Licenses are
available from Serveron in groups of 6, 12, or unlimited. When you install the key as
described above, the additional licenses you purchased are placed in the internallymanaged table.
To access your automatic polling licenses, select the Company node in the navigator and
click the Polling tab. The viewing pane should show a list of monitors. Click on a monitor
(row) to select it and then click Update Automatic Polling Status in the Action menu.
The Update Automatic Polling Status dialog box appears. The dialog box shows the
number of automated polling licenses available in the pool. The value is 1 when you first
install GAS-Guard View 2.0. When you add licenses, the value increases by the number of
additional licenses you purchased (6, 12, or unlimited).
Automated polling for a monitor is enabled by checking Automatically poll this monitor in
the Update Automatic Polling Status dialog. When you click OK, one license is removed
from the internally managed table and assigned to the selected monitor. The number of
available licenses remaining in the table is reduced by one (if you purchased an unlimited
license, the table still contains an unlimited number of licenses).
If you uncheck Automatically poll this monitor for an automatically polled monitor or use
File Close to close the file, its license is automatically returned to the internally managed
table. This increases the number of available polling licenses by one. This table-based
design allows you to float a smaller number of licenses across a larger number of
monitors should you choose to do so.
Diagnostics Package Option

The Diagnostics Package includes the Duval Triangle display, the Rogers Ratio Viewer, and
the ability to place annotations (comments) on graphs. Diagnostic license keys are available
from Serveron in groups of 6, 12, or unlimited. License keys are obtained and installed
using the procedure described earlier. Once installed, the licenses must be assigned to a
particular monitor in order to take effect.
26 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Note: Diagnostic licenses cannot be reassigned. Unlike automated polling

licenses, Diagnostic licenses do not float. When you install a license key for
the Diagnostic Package, the licenses you purchased are placed in an
internally managed table. When you assign a license to a monitor, the license
is removed from the internally managed table and assigned to the monitor.
Unlike Automated Polling licenses, the assignment of a diagnostic license to
a monitor serial number is final and irrevocable. There is no undo.
To access your Diagnostics Package licenses, first obtain and install the license key using the
procedure described earlier. Then click Licensing on the Help menu and select the
Diagnostics tab.
The tab shows a list of known monitors (from the Navigation pane) and the licensing status
of each. To assign a license to a monitor, click in the left list to select it and then click
Assign You will receive a warning indicating that license assignment cannot be revoked
or undone. Carefully check that you have selected the monitor you wish to license and then
click OK. The monitors serial number transfers to the rightmost list indicating the monitor
is now licensed.
Note: after assigning the license, you must poll the monitor before the license
will take effect. Polling the monitor stores encrypted licensing information in
the file so the Viewer can access it. You may use the Poll Now menu item in
the Action menu or, if the monitor is being automatically polled, simply wait
for the next automatic polling cycle to occur.
After polling the monitor, click on the monitored transformer asset in the Navigation pane
and access the Diagnostic Package features for the monitor. For example, select the Duval
Triangle tab to display the Triangle.
Each time a monitor is polled, GAS-Guard View 2.0 checks to see whether the monitor being
polled has been assigned a Diagnostic Package license. If so, GAS-Guard View 2.0 stores
licensing information in the file itself. Any GAS-Guard View 2.0 installation that opens the
file checks for the presence of this licensing information. If valid licensing information is
found in the file, GAS-Guard View 2.0 enables its diagnostic features for the data found in
that file.
This design ensures that once a Diagnostics license is issued to a monitor, anyone viewing
the monitors data using GAS-Guard View 2.0 will have access to all Diagnostic Package
features. If, for example, you send a transformer data file to a transformer expert at another
location within your organization, the file carries its own licensing information along with
it. If the remote expert opens the file using their own standalone GAS-Guard View 2.0
installation, all Diagnostic Package features will be enabled. Similarly, workgroup users
with Viewer Only installation configurations will have access to Diagnostics Package
display features for any properly licensed monitor.
27 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
GAS-Guard View 2.0 Reference

This chapter contains details of every tab and menu command in the GAS-Guard View 2.0
user interface. The next section describes the navigation pane. The tabs are discussed in the
Viewing Pane section. Menu items are documented in the Menu Commands section that
follows. For reference, the user interface overview is shown in Figure 13.
Tabs
Viewing pane
Menu bar
Application
Toolbar
Transformer
Asset
Graph
Toolbar
Navigation
pane
.
Figure 13. GAS-Guard View 2.0 User Interface Overview.
Navigation Pane
The navigation pane contains a hierarchical list (sometimes called a tree) showing the
company, sites, assets and monitors defined in all the files you have opened or created. Each
item in the navigation pane is identified by an icon. The icons are shown in Figure 14.
28 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Folder icon representing a

Company or Site
Icon representing a Transformer
Asset
Icon representing an Online
Transformer Monitor
Figure 14. Navigation pane icons.

To expand an icon, displaying the items it contains, click the + (plus) adjacent to a collapsed
icon. To collapse the icon, hiding the items it contains, click the (minus) adjacent to an
expanded icon.
When you select an icon by clicking on it, the viewing pane is redrawn with tabs that are
appropriate to display information about the selected item.
Icons in the navigation pane change to notify you of conditions that may require your
attention. For details of the alternative icons used for notification, please refer to Navigation
Pane Icons and Notification.
To add to the navigation pane, click New or Open in the File menu. To remove items,
click Close in the File menu. For detailed descriptions of these commands, please see the
Menu Commands section later in this manual.
Viewing Pane
This section contains additional details about the tabs that appear in the viewing pane. The
current selection in the navigation pane determines which tabs appear in the Viewing Pane.
Your selection will most frequently be an icon representing a transformer asset. All tabs
associated with transformer assets are described in the next subsection, Transformer Asset
Tabs. Less frequently, you will select a Company, Site or Monitor icon in the navigation
pane. Tabs associated with these selection types are described in subsequent sections,
Transformer Asset Tabs

This section discusses the tabs that appear when a transformer asset is selected in the
navigation pane.
Status Tab
The Status tab is the default when a transformer asset is selected. It displays a dashboardlike display of the status of the selected asset. The following indicators are provided:
29 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Gas PPM Level Status and Gas ROC Status. These three-level indicators show the results
of the most recent sample obtained from the monitor. They display alarm (red) to indicate
that the monitor encountered a gas alarm condition on the most recent sample run or
caution (yellow) to indicate a gas caution condition. If no cautions or warnings were
detected on the most recent sample run, both indicators display normal (green). If no
readings have ever been received, all three indicators display background gray.
Monitor Status. This two-level indicator displays service required (blue) to indicate that the
monitor has encountered a service required condition. The blue indicator mimics the blue
Service Required lamp on the front panel of the monitor itself. The indicator displays
normal (green) to indicate a healthy monitor. If no data has ever been received from the
monitor, both indicators display background gray.
Data Age. This three-level indicator shows whether gas in oil data from the monitor is up to
date or needs to be refreshed by polling the monitor. 0 8 Hours Old (green) indicates that
the timestamp of the most recently-received sample run is from 0 to approximately 8 hours
old. 8 24 Hours Old (yellow) indicates the most recent sample is more than about 8 hours
old but no older than about 24 hours. 24 Hours or Older (red) indicates that the most recent
sample is more than about 24 hours old. If no sample data has ever been received from the
monitor, all three indicators display background gray.
Event History. This horizontal region shows the monitors activity over recent days. Each
rectangular block or tile displays one days activities with the most recent days activity
appearing at right.
Within a days tile, the colored vertical bars indicate one significant activity by the monitor.
Most activities are sample runs, which appear as green, yellow or red bars to indicate their
most urgent outcome (normal, caution, or alarm, respectively). Service required conditions,
if any, are displayed as vertical blue bars. Aborted runs are shown as black bars. Finally,
non-sample runs are displayed as vertical white bars. Most non-sample runs are regularlyscheduled verification runs. If no data has ever been received from the monitor, the Event
History block is empty.
Note: for more information about sample runs, Service Required conditions,
and other Siemens Online Transformer Monitor principles of operation,
please consult the documentation that was provided with your monitor or
visit http://www.serveron.com.
Textual Information. At the bottom of the screen textual information about the monitor is
displayed. The Latest Monitor Timestamp is the timestamp on the most recent piece of
significant information (service required event, sample run, etc) received from the monitor.
Below the Latest Monitor Timestamp, the Status screen displays the monitors serial number
and model information for reference purposes.
Many commands are available in the Action menu when viewing the Status tab. These
commands are documented in the Action Menu section later in this manual.
30 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Gas in Oil Tab

Overview
The Gas in Oil tab is shown when a transformer asset is selected. Figure 15 shows the Gas
in Oil tab.
Tabs
Viewing pane
Menu bar
Application
Toolbar
Transformer
Asset
Graph
Toolbar
Navigation
pane
Figure 15. Gas in Oil tab.
This tab displays a graph showing the measured levels of gases. Depending on the type of
Siemens GAS-Guard transformer monitor used (8 gases or 3 gases), the display will include
either eight gases (Hydrogen (H2), Oxygen (O2), Methane (CH4), Carbon Monoxide (CO),
Carbon Dioxide (CO2), Ethane (C2H6), Ethylene (C2H4), and Acetylene (C2H2) model
GAS-Guard 8) or three gases (Methane (CH4), Ethylene (C2H4), and Acetylene (C2H2)
model GAS-Guard 3). By default, gas values are displayed on a logarithmic axis.
Siemenss 8 gas analyzers also display a computed estimation of Nitrogen (N2), Total
Dissolved Combustible Gas (TDCG), and Total Hydrocarbons (THC). TDCG is the sum of
Hydrogen (H2), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Ethane (C2H6), Ethylene (C2H4), Acetylene
(C2H2), and Methane (CH4). THC is the sum of Ethane (C2H6), Ethylene (C2H4), Acetylene
(C2H2), and Methane (CH4). In all cases, gases are displayed in parts per million (PPM),
gas in oil, over a selectable time period (default 1 month).
The Gas in Oil tab also displays the levels of external sensors including LoadGuide,
ambient temperature, and oil temperature as well as several optional sensors (oil moisture
PPM, oil moisture percent relative saturation (%RS) and auxiliary temperature.)
31 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Note: data from optional oil moisture and temperature sensors is displayed
only if sensors are installed and correctly configured. For more information
about oil moisture and temperature sensors, please contact your Siemens
representative.
To display or hide a particular data series, click the small colored button immediately to the
left of the series name in the graph legend. Gas values are displayed relative to the left (Gas
PPM) axis, which is logarithmic by default; the left axis may be changed to linear by clicking
the Log button in the graph toolbar. Sensor values are displayed relative to the right (Sensor
Value) axis, which is linear. For more information about axis, legends, and the graph
toolbar, please see the section Using the Graphs earlier in this manual.
The graph legend relates colors to measured values. Carbon Monoxide (CO), for example, is
always shown in red. By default, gas values (except Nitrogen) are shown and all sensor
values are hidden.
Commands
When viewing a Gas in Oil graph, the Action menu contains the tab-specific commands
Enter DGA and Start Sample Run.
Selecting Enter DGA displays the Enter DGA Data dialog box, which contains a simple
spreadsheet-like data editor. Set the date of your manual DGA report in the Record Time
field and enter the values for the nine supported gases. You may enter multiple rows or
correct existing entries. When you click OK, the DGA data is saved and displayed on the
graph. For more details about the DGA data display, see Displaying Manual DGA Data
below.
Selecting Start Sample Run immediately contacts the monitor to begin a sample run. Since
sample runs are scheduled automatically by the monitor, use of this command is rarely
required.
Note: to adjust the monitors sampling schedule, click the monitor icon in the
navigation pane, then click the Sampling tab, and finally click Update
Sampling in the Action menu. GAS-Guard View 2.0 displays the Update
Sample Schedule dialog box. When you click OK, GAS-Guard View 2.0
immediately contacts the monitor and updates the schedule you have
defined.
Values Below the Lower Detection Limit (LDL)
The lower detection limit (LDL) values for Siemens model GAS-Guard 8 and model GASGuard 3 monitors are specified in the Data Sheet for the respective monitor. The monitor
may report values below these levels, however, and GAS-Guard View 2.0 will display them.
Values below the LDL are visually distinguished by their pale translucent color. This pale
color serves as a visual reminder that uncertainty is associated with the measurement.
32 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Displaying Manual DGA Data

Manual DGA data is displayed as one or more small colored x markers on the Gas in Oil
graph. The colors match the corresponding data series, i.e. CO is displayed in red, H2 in
blue, etc.
Moving the mouse pointer near a DGA reading on the graph surface displays a popup
window showing the exact numerical value of each of the DGA measurements.
Note: if you have a Siemens model GAS-Guard 3 monitor, only the GASGuard 3 gases (CH4, C2H2, and C2H4) are displayed on the graph. You may
enter values for all 9 fields in the dialog box, however. When you move the
mouse over the DGA sample area, all 9 gas in oil values are shown in the
pop-up window.
Disabling a data series by clicking in the graph legend also disables the corresponding DGA
value from appearing on the graph.
When DGA data is visible on the graph, a small DGA legend appears at the upper right
corner of the screen to indicate the meaning of the display.
Limits Tab
The Limits tab is shown when a transformer asset is selected. It displays caution (warning)
and alarm limits for the eight measured gases and TDCG (TrueGas and model GAS-Guard 8
monitors) or for three measured gases (model GAS-Guard 3 monitor). Limits are displayed
for both gas in oil PPM level and gas in oil rate of change (ROC, reported in PPM/day).
This tab also displays the most recently measured values reported by the monitor for gas in
oil, rate of change, and goodness of fit (a quality metric for the current ROC value).
Note: ROC data is available from model GAS-Guard 8 and GAS-Guard 3
monitors only. The TrueGas monitor does not measure or report ROC data.
ROC alarm and caution limits cannot be set for the TrueGas monitor.
To change the limits, click Update Limits in the Action menu. This displays the Update
Alarm and Caution Limits dialog box. To change a limit, click in the desired cell and type
the new value. When you click OK, the monitor is immediately updated. The viewing pane
is refreshed when the update is complete.
Percent of Alarm Tab
The Percent of Alarm tab is shown when a transformer asset is selected. It displays
measured gas values and TDCG normalized to their individual alarm or caution limit
values.
Example: suppose the alarm limit for H2 is 50 PPM and the alarm limit for C2H4 is 120
PPM. Further, suppose the measured value for H2 is 40 PPM and the measured value for
33 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
C2H4 is 60 PPM. Then the displayed value for H2 will be 80 (40 PPM is 80% of the limit
value, 50 PPM) and the displayed value for C2H4 will be 50 (60 PPM is 50% of 120).
Values may be displayed relative to their caution limits instead of their alarm limits by
clicking one of the buttons at lower right. Sensor values (LoadGuide, Ambient Temp, etc.)
do not have alarm or caution limits. Their actual values are shown relative to the right axis
for reference purposes.
No tab-specific commands are available in the Action menu when the Percent of Alarm tab
is displayed.
Rate of Change Tab
The Rate of Change tab is shown when a transformer asset is selected and the transformer
monitor is a Siemens model GAS-Guard 8 or GAS-Guard 3.
This tab displays the smoothed rate of change (ROC) of gas in oil values expressed in PPM
per day. ROC is not computed for sensor values (LoadGuide, Ambient Temp, etc.). Their
actual values are shown relative to the right axis for reference purposes.
No tab-specific commands are available in the Action menu when the Rate of Change tab is
displayed.
Duval Triangle Tab
Note: the Duvals Triangle tab displays data when a valid Diagnostic License
accompanies the display data. To enable the Triangle, an administrator must
obtain a Diagnostic License from Serveron or your Serveron representative,
install the license, assign it to the appropriate monitor, and then poll the
monitor. The Diagnostic License enables the Triangle for all GAS-Guard
View 2.0 installations that view the data contained in the file. For more
information, see Installing and Using Licenses.
The Duval Triangle is an analytical tool developed by Dr. Michel Duval of IREQ (Hydro
Quebec), Canada. The Triangle presents DGA (dissolved gas analysis) results in a graphical
form by sorting them according to a list of faults as codified by IEC Publication 60599,
"Mineral oil-impregnated electrical equipment in service- Guide to the interpretation of
dissolved and free gases analysis," March 1999.
For more information about the Triangle, see Using the Duval Triangle.
Sensor Data Tab
The Sensor Data tab is shown when a transformer asset is selected. It displays the values of
internal sensors. This information is intended for use by trained Customer Service
personnel.
No tab-specific commands are available in the Action menu when the Sensor Data tab is
displayed.
34 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Extractor Data Tab

The Extractor Data tab is shown when a transformer asset is selected. This tab displays the
status of internal sensors related to the transformer monitors gas extractor subsystem. This
information is intended for use by trained Customer Service personnel.
No tab-specific commands are available in the Action menu when the Extractor Data tab is
displayed.
Retention Time Tab
The Retention Time tab is shown when a transformer asset is selected. The tab displays
internal information about the status of the chromatography subsystem. This information is
intended for use by trained Customer Service personnel.
No tab-specific commands are available in the Action menu when the Retention Time tab is
displayed.
Verification Data Tab
Overview
The Verification Data tab is shown when a transformer asset is selected. It displays the
results of all verification runs performed in the selected time interval. Verification runs
measure gas levels from reference gas contained in the monitors calibration bottle instead
of sample gas from the transformer asset being monitored.
Sensor data is not displayed on the Verification Data graph.
Commands
When viewing the Verification Data tab, the Action menu contains the tab-specific
commands Start Verification Run and Start Calibration Run.
Selecting Start Verification Run immediately contacts the monitor to begin a verification
run. Since verification runs are scheduled automatically by the monitor, use of this
command is rarely required.
Note: to adjust the monitors verification schedule, click the monitor icon in
the navigation pane, then click the Sampling tab, and finally click Update
defined.
Selecting Start Calibration Run immediately contacts the monitor to begin a calibration run.
Note: Siemens monitors contain an auto-calibration feature. Manual
calibration runs should only be performed by trained Customer Service
personnel.
35 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Company Specific Tabs

This section describes the tabs that appear when you select an organization (typically your
company) in the navigation pane. Your organization is usually the top of the navigation
hierarchy.
Welcome Tab
The Welcome tab contains first-time startup instructions and a button that allows you to
install the sample files. Note that you may also install or reinstall the sample files at any
time by clicking the Help menu and selecting Install Sample Files.
Polling Tab
The Polling tab is the central point of administration for automatically scheduled polling.
The tab shows a row-oriented display of all monitors known to the software. Each row
contains several status columns. The display is updated every few seconds to reflect the
latest status of each monitor.
Each row in the list may be selected by clicking on it. Selecting a row enables some menu
items in the Action menu. To configure automatic polling for a monitor, click the monitors
row to select it and then choose Update Automatic Polling Status from the Action menu.
This displays the Update Automatic Polling Status dialog box.
36 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Figure 16. Polling Tab and Update Automatic Polling Status dialog box.
The dialog box displays the number of available polling licenses. To enable automatic
polling for a monitor, click the Automatically poll this monitor checkbox and then click
OK. The dialog box displays the number of available automatic polling licenses. At least
one license must be available to enable automatic polling. If no licenses are available, the
checkbox is grayed out (unavailable).
The Polling Period control can be used to configure the maximum polling period. GASGuard View 2.0 will poll the monitor at least as often as the configured value. GAS-Guard
View 2.0 may poll the monitor more often in case of communication errors (retries) and
certain monitor conditions.
To immediately poll a monitor, click the monitors row and then choose Poll Now from
the Action menu (the Poll Now menu item performs the same function as the Poll Now
item on the Asset Status tab.
For more information about these menu items, see the Menu Commands section of this
manual.
Each row displayed by the Polling tab is composed of several fields (columns). The
following fields are shown:
Asset Name. The name of the transformer asset.
37 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Serial Number. The serial number of Siemens monitor.

Auto Poll? This field displays Yes if the monitor is configured for automatic scheduled
polling, No if it is not.
Period. This field displays the maximum period between automatic polling updates in
hours. If the unit is not configured for automatic polling (Auto Poll column displays No),
this column retains its previous value or displays the default value of 4 hours. GAS-Guard
View 2.0 may contact the monitor more frequently than the value shown in this field. For
further details, see the Next Poll subsection below.
Errors. This field displays the number of communication errors that have occurred since the
monitor was last polled successfully. Each successful contact with the monitor resets the
count to 0.
Successfully Called. This field displays the date and time of the last successful call to the
monitor. If the monitor has not been successfully contacted, the field is empty.
Next Poll. This fields shows when the Poller component of GAS-Guard View 2.0 will next
attempt to contact the monitor. In the simplest case, this value is approximately the time of
the last successful call plus the value of the Period. The value may be different for several
reasons. Two of the most common are:
If a polling attempt fails, the Poller component will retry the failed attempt using an
internally defined retry algorithm. The retry frequency may be different than the
normal polling frequency.
If the monitor begins sampling at an accelerated rate (e.g. hourly), the Poller will
eventually detect the monitors behavior and begin polling more frequently in order
to make timely data available to you. For more information about accelerated
sampling, see Action Sample Hourly (Monitor selected, Sampling Tab) in the
Menu Commands section.
Status. When GAS-Guard View 2.0 is communicating with the monitor, this field displays
the most recent status of the conversation, e.g. downloading a record, updating the host
data file, etc. The last status is displayed within parenthesis after the communication is
complete.
File Name. This field displays the name of the file in which the monitors data is stored on
the host.
Status Tab
The Status tab is shown when your organization (typically, your company) is selected in the
navigation pane. The Status tab displays a flat list of your organizations sites. The list is
not navigable.
Site Specific Tabs

This section describes the tabs that appear when you select a site icon in the navigation
pane.
38 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Status Tab
The Status tab is shown when one of your organizations sites is selected in the navigation
pane. The Status tab displays a flat list of the assets of the selected site. The list is not
navigable.
Monitor Specific Tabs

This section describes the tabs that appear when you select a monitor icon in the navigation
pane. The monitor icon is the lowest or leaf node in the navigation hierarchy.
Sampling Tab (Monitor icon selected in Navigation Pane)
The Sampling tab is shown when a monitor icon is selected in the navigation pane. Use this
tab to review the monitors sampling and verification schedules.
To change the monitors sampling or verification schedules, click Update Sampling on
the Action menu while this tab is displayed. The Update Sampling Schedule dialog is
displayed. When you click OK in the dialog box, GAS-Guard View 2.0 immediately
contacts the monitor and updates the monitors sampling schedule.
The Action menu for this tab also contains the Sample Hourly command. The Sample
Hourly command is described in the Action Sample Hourly (Monitor selected,
Sampling Tab) section below.
Communications Tab (Monitor icon selected in Navigation Pane)
The Communications tab is shown when a monitor icon is selected in the navigation pane.
It displays a textual summary of the communications settings for the selected transformer
monitor. Use this tab to review the hosts communication settings.
To change the settings used by GAS-Guard View 2.0, click Update Communications on
the Action menu while this tab is displayed. The Update Communications Wizard is
displayed. Use the Wizard to review and update the communication settings. When you
click Finish, GAS-Guard View 2.0 updates the hosts communication settings.
To verify monitor communications, click Check Communications on the Action menu for
this tab. This command will attempt to contact the monitor and retrieve basic information
about the monitor. After the command completes (or fails), a message box displays the
outcome of the test.
Menu Commands
This section provides an overview of the menu commands available in GAS-Guard View
2.0.
39 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
File Menu
File New
This menu item displays the New File Creation wizard to begin the creation of a new file.
Since each transformer asset and its monitor are represented in a single file, this operation is
used to add new assets and monitors to your GAS-Guard View 2.0 installation.
After the initial screen, the wizard displays the Monitor Information page shown in Figure
17.
Figure 17. Monitor Information page.

After entry of the required information, the wizard displays the Select File page. A default
filename is composed from the last folder in which you located a file combined with the site
and asset name you specified. If you have not previously located a file using GAS-Guard
View 2.0, the location will default to your My Documents folder.
You may use the keyboard to change any part of the path or use the Browse button to
select a different folder in which to create the file.
The wizard then presents the Connection Type page. This page allows you to select the
monitors communications type from a range of supported alternatives. When you click the
Next button, a communications configuration page specific to the selected communications
type is displayed.
40 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
If you selected LAN communication, for example, the configuration page supports entry of
a LAN (Ethernet) address. If you selected modem communications, the configuration page
supports entry of phone number, communications port, and related information.
After configuring communications, clicking the Next button will display a textual summary
of the information collected by the wizard. When the Finish button is clicked, the new file is
created and added to the navigator. It will remain in the navigator even if you exit and
restart GAS-Guard View 2.0. To remove an asset and its associated monitor from the
navigator, click Close in the File menu.
File Open
This item is used to open an existing file. It presents a standard Open File dialog. After the
file is opened successfully, it is added to the navigator. It will remain in the navigator even
if you exit and restart GAS-Guard View 2.0. To remove an asset and its associated monitor
from the navigator, use File Close.
File Close
This item is used to close (remove from display) one or more files. The files must have
previously been added to the navigator via File New or File Open. Closing the
file only removes the file from view. The files contents are not altered and the file is not
deleted.
File Archive
This item is used to reduce the size of large files while preserving their data. The Choose
Archive Date dialog is displayed. Use this dialog to set the boundary date. When you click
OK, a standard file selection dialog is displayed. After you choose an archive file name and
location and click OK, all monitor data older than the boundary date is removed from the
primary data file and placed in the archive. Since archived data is no longer present in the
data file, it is no longer displayed.
If you wish to review archived data at a later date, click Open in the File menu and select
the archive file using the Open File dialog box.
Archiving your data is optional. GAS-Guard View 2.0 will function correctly even if all data
ever downloaded is allowed to accumulate in the primary data file.
File Export
Selecting this item displays a File Save dialog that allows the export of transformer data.
The export file will contain the data for the date range currently selected in the End Date
and Range controls in the application toolbar.
Use this command to make data available to other application programs, e.g. Microsoft
Office Excel. Exports may be created at any time. Exporting data does not remove it from
the data file: the data continues to be displayed by GAS-Guard View 2.0 after you export it.
Data may be exported in one of two formats:
Comma-separated value (.CSV): files in this textual format may be loaded directly by
Microsoft Excel and many other applications.
41 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
TOA4: this textual file format is directly compatible with Transformer Oil Analyst version 4
(TOA-4) software from Delta-X Research.
File Print
This item allows the contents of the viewing pane to be printed. A standard printer dialog is
displayed. You may change print settings defined by your printer, if desired, and then click
OK to print the viewing pane contents.
This item is unavailable (grayed out) if there is nothing to print.
File Print Preview
A standard Print Preview dialog is displayed. The contents of the viewing pane may be
printed from within the preview using the controls at the top.
This item is unavailable (grayed out) if there is nothing to print.
File Exit
This item closes the application.
Action Menu
Some of the contents of the Action menu are determined by the selection in the navigation
pane and the visible (currently selected) tab. This section describes each possible action and
identifies the selection type and tab which must be visible for the action to be available in
the menu.
The following menu items are available in the Action menu regardless of the selection or
current tab.
Action Select Modem
This menu item opens the Select Modem dialog box. The dialog allows you to select the
TAPI modem used to communicate with Siemens model GAS-Guard 3 and GAS-Guard 8
monitors.
Note: the modem selected using this dialog box affects communication with
Siemens model GAS-Guard 3 and GAS-Guard 8 monitors only. When
communicating with Serveron TrueGas monitors, the COM port selected on
the Configure Modem page of the Update Communications dialog
determines the modem used to contact the monitor.
The Select Modem dialog box displays a dropdown list containing all properly-configured
TAPI modems. If your modem is not displayed in the list, click Configure TAPI Modem to
display the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard. Follow the prompts to configure your
modem. For more information, see Configuring Modems later in this manual.
42 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Action Send Diagnostic Data

This item displays the Send Diagnostic Data dialog box. It is designed to help you obtain
support from Serveron Customer Service should your monitor ever require it. In general,
you should contact Serveron Customer Service for guidance before using this command.
After querying whether to continue, GAS-Guard View 2.0 will begin generation of an
informational file about the monitor. The informational file includes everything in the
monitors data file. By default, GAS-Guard View 2.0 attempts to contact the monitor (using
the configured communication path) to obtain additional service-related information. If a
connection to the monitor cannot be established, this additional data is not included in the
informational file. You can limit the duration of this connection or choose not to connect
using the controls in the dialog box.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 will prompt for a file in which to save the diagnostic data. After you
select a file and click OK, GAS-Guard View 2.0 will contact the monitor and obtain
diagnostic information (unless you chose not to do so) and then copy the current data file
into the diagnostic file.
After saving the diagnostic file, GAS-Guard View 2.0 will create an email message using
your default email client (Microsoft Office Outlook, Outlook Express, Mozilla Thunderbird,
etc.) The generated email message will appear on your screen for review.
You must attach the informational file to the generated email message using the commands
provided by your email client. Instructions for locating the file appear within the generated
email message itself.
Note: GAS-Guard View 2.0 only prepares data for transmission to Serveron.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 will never, under any circumstances, send data of any
kind to Serveron. You must send the email that was generated in GASGuard View 2.0, like you would any other email, if you wish to communicate
the diagnostic information to Serveron.
The remaining menu items in this section are specific to the selection in the navigation pane
and the current tab. Example: the Rename Company item appears in the Action menu
when you select a Company in the navigation pane and then display the Status tab.
Action Rename Company (Company selected, Status tab)
This command displays the Rename Company dialog box which allows the entry of a new
name for the currently selected company. When you click OK, one or more files are updated
to reflect the change and both the navigation and viewing panes are redrawn.
Action Rename Site (Site selected, Status tab)
This command displays the Rename Site dialog box which allows the entry of a new name
for the currently selected site. When you click OK, one or more files are updated to reflect
the change and both the navigation and viewing panes are redrawn.
43 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Action Rename Asset (Transformer asset selected, Status tab)

This command displays the Rename Asset dialog box which allows the entry of a new name
for the currently selected asset. When you click OK, the file is updated to reflect the change
and both the navigation and viewing panes are redrawn.
Action Poll Now (Transformer asset selected, Status tab)
Causes GAS-Guard View 2.0 to connect to the selected assets transformer monitor and
download all data. The connection attempt uses the current communications settings,
which are displayed on the Communications tab when the monitor icon is selected.
Action Enter DGA (Transformer asset selected, Gas in Oil tab)
Displays the Enter DGA Data dialog box, which supports entry of DGA data for display on
the Gas in Oil graph. Enter the values from your manual DGA into the cells of the empty
row and adjust the date as appropriate. If you need to add additional rows, click the Add
Row button to add a new empty row. When you are satisfied, click OK to save your entries.
If you discover an error in a DGA entry, use the dialog box to change the value displayed in
the cell and then click OK. To delete a manual DGA, open the dialog box. Click the area to
the left of the date and time to highlight the entire row, click the Delete button, and then
click OK to update the file and graph.
Action Start Sample Run (Transformer asset selected, Gas in Oil tab)
After confirming your choice, this command commands the transformer monitor to
immediately start a sample run. Since sample runs are scheduled automatically by the
monitor, use of this command is rarely required.
Note: to adjust the monitors sampling schedule, click the monitor icon in the
navigation pane, then click the Sampling tab, and finally click Update
defined.
Action Update Limits (Transformer asset selected, Limits tab)
Displays the Update Limits dialog box, which supports changes to the gas in oil caution and
alarm limit values. For Siemens model GAS-Guard 8 and GAS-Guard 3 monitors, the dialog
supports both level and rate of change alarms; for Serveron TrueGas monitors, only level
alarms are supported.
When the OK button is clicked, GAS-Guard View 2.0 immediately contacts the monitor to
update the limit values.
44 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Action Start Verification Run (Transformer asset selected, Verification

Data tab)
immediately start a verification run. Since verification runs are scheduled automatically by
the monitor, use of this command is rarely required.
Note: to adjust the monitors verification schedule, click the monitor icon in
the navigation pane, then click the Sampling tab, and finally click Update
defined.
Action Start Calibration Run (Transformer asset selected, Verification
Data tab)
immediately start a calibration run. A calibration run takes 30 minutes to 1 hour depending
the model of transformer monitor you have installed.
Note: Siemens monitors contain an auto-calibration feature. Manual
calibration runs should only be performed by trained Customer Service
personnel.
Action Change Monitor Password (Transformer asset selected,
Status tab)
This command is intended to ensure that only a single approved installation of GAS-Guard
View 2.0 software may access the transformer monitor.
Note: changing the password is intended to block access to the selected
transformer monitor by other computers running GAS-Guard View 2.0. The
new password is set in the monitor and stored securely on the local
computer. After completing this command, GAS-Guard View 2.0 will be able
to poll data or access monitor data and settings from the local computer only.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 first offers the opportunity to cancel the operation. If you choose to
continue, GAS-Guard View 2.0 displays a dialog box supporting entry of the new password.
When you click OK on this dialog box , GAS-Guard View 2.0 securely stores the password
in the host compter. GAS-Guard View 2.0 then displays the Poller Activity dialog and sets
the new password in the monitor.
45 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Action Set Monitor Date and Time (Transformer asset selected, Status
tab)
This command sets the transformer monitors internal date and time to match the local
computer. If the monitor is a Siemens model GAS-Guard 8 or GAS-Guard 3, the time is
converted to Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) before being sent to the monitor.
Action View Log (Transformer asset selected, Status tab)
This command displays recent activity by the polling/dialing subsystem (Poller). For
more information about the Poller, see Theory of Operations later in this manual.
Action Sample Hourly (Monitor selected, Sampling tab)
Note: this command is available for Siemens model GAS-Guard 8 and GASGuard 3 transformer monitors only. Serveron TrueGas monitors do not
support hourly sampling.
Causes GAS-Guard View 2.0 to connect to the transformer monitor and establish a
temporary sampling schedule within the monitor. The temporary schedule continues for 24
hours and specifies that sample runs should be performed once per hour.
After the 24 hour period elapses, the monitor reverts to the schedule that was in effect when
the Sample Hourly command was given. If you wish to continue hourly sampling, you may
issue the command again to enable hourly sampling for another 24 hour period.
The Sample Hourly command is intended to allow you to temporarily accelerate sampling
when additional online DGA data is critical, e.g. when a transformer is experiencing a
gassing event or other unusual condition.
Note: by increasing the number of sample runs, this command increases the
monitors consumption of helium carrier gas. Excessive use of this command
may require replacement of the helium cylinder more frequently than stated
in the Siemens Transformer Monitor product documentation.
The Sample Hourly command also interacts with the automatic scheduled polling feature of
GAS-Guard View 2.0. If the monitor that is sampling hourly is also configured for
automatically scheduled polling, the Poller component of GAS-Guard View 2.0 will begin
polling it at an accelerated rate (hourly) in order to make the data available to you.
Under certain conditions, the Siemens transformer monitor may begin sampling at an
accelerated (hourly) rate without any input from you. This form of accelerated sampling
occurs when a previously configured Rate of Change (ROC) gas alarm limit is violated
within the monitor. ROC accelerated sample will not occur unless you configure Rate of
Change alarm limits,. If this form of accelerated sampling does occur at your installation,
the Poller component of GAS-Guard View 2.0 will notice after several hours and begin
polling at an accelerated rate in order to make the data available to you.
46 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
A monitor that is performing hourly samples due to a ROC alarm will cease performing
accelerated runs and return to its previous schedule approximately 24 hours after the ROC
alarm condition is cleared. If ROC does not return to normal on its own, you can clear the
condition by increasing the ROC alarm limit value or disabling the alarm for that gas. For
more information, see Action Update Limits (Transformer asset selected, Limits tab)
below.
Action Check Communications (Monitor selected, Communications
tab)
This command allows you to check communications by performing a lightweight poll of the
monitor without switching tabs. The Poller Activity dialog is displayed just as with Poll
Now. Unlike the Poll Now operation, GAS-Guard View 2.0 will not attempt to download
data from the monitor. Instead, it will update control information (alarm levels, sampling
schedule, etc) and then terminate the connection. After communication is complete (or
fails), a message box displays the outcome of the test.
Action Update Communications (Monitor selected, Communications
tab)
This command displays the Update Communications Wizard, allowing all communication
settings for the selected transformer monitor to be reviewed and optionally updated.
For more information about the Update Communications Wizard, see Configuring
Communications later in this document.
View Menu
View Refresh (F5)
This command updates the Navigator and all tabs with the latest data.
View Auto Refresh
Enables or disables the automatic refresh feature. If the menu item is checked, GAS-Guard
View 2.0 will automatically refresh the display with the latest data approximately once per
hour. Each automatic refresh is equivalent to manually selecting View Refresh or
pressing F5.
If the menu item is not checked, automatic refresh will not occur.
View Navigator
This command makes the Navigator visible. It is useful if the navigation pane has been
hidden using the small close box at upper right of the pane.
Help Menu
Help Users Manual
Opens this document.
47 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Help Frequently Asked Questions

Displays the Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) about GAS-Guard View 2.0.
Help Release Notes
Displays the Release Notes.
Help Licensing
This menu item raises the Licensing dialog. All tasks associated with obtaining, installing
and assigning licenses (except assigning polling licenses) are performed using this dialog
box. These tasks are described in Installing and Using Licenses in the Using GAS-Guard
View 2.0 section of this manual.
The Licensing dialog box has three tabs.
Keys tab. This tab is used to obtain your machine ID, which must be provided to Serveron
when you request a license. Use the Copy to Clipboard button to copy your machine ID and
then paste it into the license request email as described under Installing and Using
Licenses.
The Keys tab is also used to install licenses you receive from Serveron. After receiving your
license via email and saving the license file attachment, click the Browse button on the
Keys tab to open the Serveron license key file. When you click OK, GAS-Guard View 2.0
attempts to install the license.
Finally, the Keys tab displays the license keys you have currently installed. To display the
details of an installed license, click the license to select it and then click Details.
Polling tab. This tab displays the number of polling license you have available. Your
available licenses are maintained in a pool managed internally by GAS-Guard View 2.0 as
described under Installing and Using Licenses. The same value is displayed when you
open the Update Automatic Polling Status dialog (Polling tab, Action menu, Update
Automatic Polling Status).
Polling licenses are installed by browsing from the Keys tab, and assigned to monitors using
the Update Automatic Polling Status dialog as described in the Company Specific Tabs
section.
Diagnostics tab. This tab is used to assign Diagnostics Package licenses to individual
monitor serial numbers. Siemens monitors that have not been assigned Diagnostics licenses
are shown in the left box. To assign a license, click to select the monitor and then click
Assign Since a diagnostic license cannot be reassigned, you will be prompted to confirm.
Carefully check your selection and then click OK. The selected serial number is removed
from the left box and displayed in the right box.
The newly-assigned license will not take effect until the next time GAS-Guard View 2.0 polls
the monitor. At that time, encrypted licensing information will be stored in the host data
file. Any GAS-Guard View 2.0 installation that opens the file will discover the licensing
information and enable the diagnostic features.
48 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Help Install Sample Files

Displays the Install Sample Files dialog box which allows the sample files to be copied to a
folder of your choice. The function of this menu item is identical to the Install Sample Files
button on the Welcome screen.
Help About Siemens Client
This item displays the About Box, which shows the detailed version number of GAS-Guard
View 2.0 and a link to Siemenss world wide web page.
Using the Duval Triangle

The Duval Triangle is a feature of the Diagnostics Package, which requires a separate license
from Serveron. For information on how to enable the Diagnostics package, please see
Installing and Using Licenses.
To access the Triangle, select a Transformer asset in the navigation pane and then click the
Duval Triangle tab in the viewing pane. If no license is found, the background will be
displayed but data points will not.
Overview
The Duval Triangle is an analytical tool developed by Dr. Michel Duval of IREQ (Hydro
Quebec), Canada. The Triangle presents DGA (dissolved gas analysis) results in a graphical
form by sorting them according to a list of faults as codified by IEC Publication 60599,
"Mineral oil-impregnated electrical equipment in service- Guide to the interpretation of
dissolved and free gases analysis," March 1999.
The Triangle and IEC Publication 60599 are analysis tools meant to be used as an aid for
diagnosing the source of combustible gases in transformer coolant oil. The Triangle should
not be regarded as the final word for such diagnosis but as a tool to be used by an
informed expert for the purpose of evaluating the health of a transformer.
The Duval Triangle task is shown in Figure 18.
49 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Figure 18. Duval Triangle task.
Interpretation of regions
The Triangle is broken into seven (7) polygonal regions, labeled T1, T2, T3, D1, D2, DT, and
PD. The regions labeled with a T indicate probable thermal faults, with increasing numbers
indicating higher temperatures. The regions labeled with a D indicate probable discharge
faults, with increasing numbers corresponding to more energetic discharges. The region
labeled DT indicates a probable mixture of thermal and discharge faults. Finally, the small
region at the apex labeled PD indicates a probable partial discharge (also known as corona)
condition.
Specifically, each region is to be interpreted as specified in IEC Publication 60599:
T1 - Thermal faults not exceeding 300C
T2 - Thermal faults exceeding 300C but not exceeding 700C
T3 - Thermal faults exceeding 700C
D1 - Discharges of low energy
D2 - Discharges of high energy
50 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
PD - Partial Discharges
The DT region indicates a probable combination of thermal and discharge faults. It is not
discussed in IEC 60599.
Interpretation of the Triangle

Each of the Triangle's three sides forms an axis with a range of 0 to 100%. The Triangle's
base is the acetylene (C2H2) axis. The left side is the methane (CH4) axis. The right side is
the ethylene (C2H4) axis.
Use of the Triangle begins with a dissolved gas measurement (such as one obtained every
few hours from the Siemens on-line transformer monitor) that includes acetylene, methane,
and ethylene values. The values of the three gases are then normalized to total 100%.
Example: A DGA result might show acetylene at 10 parts per million (PPM), methane at 20
PPM, and ethylene at 20 PPM. The normalized values for these three gases at these
concentrations are 20% acetylene, 40% methane, and 40% ethylene.
A single data point is plotted at the intersection of the three normalized values by drawing
lines across the triangle from each of the appropriate normalized values on the axes. These
lines are always drawn parallel to some axis of the graphic, as indicated by the dotted white
lines.
Multiple data points

The advent of on-line DGA data provided by the Siemens transformer monitor provides
new opportunities for use of the Triangle. In particular, the wealth of data provided by the
Siemens monitor can be used to quickly assess the health of a transformer by viewing values
in the Triangle over a specific range of dates, allowing one to correlate specific fault
conditions with transformer loading or extraneous events.
The End Date and Range controls in the application tool bar determine the range of interest
for plotting points on the Duval Triangle. The Duval Triangle displays all meaningful
samples shown on the corresponding Trend Graph. The relative age of DGA samples are
indicated using pale yellow for the oldest to bright yellow, pale orange, and bright orange
for the most recent samples. The latest sample plotted in the Triangle is distinguished using
an X marker contained in a circle. In addition, dotted lines normal to the three graph axes
are shown on the graph, for the most recent data point only.
Summary
The Duval Triangle analysis tool, integrated with Siemens's industry-leading On-Line
Transformer Monitor and turnkey asset monitoring services, offers breakthrough
capabilities for transformer asset management.
51 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Using the Rogers Ratio Viewer

The Rogers Ratio Viewer is a feature of the GAS-Guard View 2.0 Diagnostics Package,
which requires a separate license from Serveron. For information on how to enable the
Diagnostics package, please see Installing and Using Licenses.
To access the Viewer, select a Transformer asset in the navigation pane and then click the
Gas in Oil tab in the viewing pane. Then click the Rogers Ratio Viewer button in the Graph
toolbar (see Graph Toolbar in the section Using the Graphs). If no license is available,
clicking the toolbar button will display a dialog box instructing you to contact Siemens or
your Siemens representative to obtain one.
Note: the Rogers Ratios (also known as Basic Gas Ratios) are based on five
measured gases: H2, CH4, C2H2, C2H4, and C2H6. The Siemens model
GAS-Guard 3 online transformer gas monitor measures CH4, C2H2, and
C2H4, but does not measure H2 or C2H6. For this reason, Rogers Ratios
cannot be computed from data gathered using a GAS-Guard 3.
When the asset selected in the Navigation Pane is monitored by a GASGuard 3, the Rogers Ratio button does not appear in the graph toolbar.
Siemens recommends use of the Duval Triangle to assess transformer gas in
oil data gathered with a GAS-Guard 3 monitor.
Introduction
The Rogers Ratio Viewer is displayed using a button on the Graph toolbar as described
above. The Viewer is a separate component that displays in its own window. If the Viewer
is not installed or cannot be executed, the button itself is not shown on the Graph toolbar.
The Rogers Ratios Viewer uses Microsoft DirectX version 9, a graphical software toolset.
Some video adapters and video device drivers do not support DirectX version 9. The
Viewer requires a video display with 32-bit color (24-bit RGB plus alpha). This mode may
be referred to as high color or true color and is sometimes erroneously labeled as 24bit color. Most video adapters built since 2001 can support the Viewer.
Functional Overview
Dissolved gas ratios (known as Rogers Ratios in IEEE Standard PC57.104 D11d and Basic
Gas Ratios in International Standard IEC-60599) are a tool for the interpretation of Dissolved
Gas Analysis (DGA) results. The Ratios present DGA results in graphical form by
organizing them according to a list of faults as codified in an IEC Standard and an IEEE
Draft Standard. These documents are IEC Publication 60599, "Mineral oil-impregnated
electrical equipment in service - Guide to the interpretation of dissolved and free gases
analysis," March 1999, and draft IEEE Publication PC57.104 D11d, Draft Guide for the
Interpretation of Gases in Oil Immersed Transformers, April 21 2004. Note that this latter
document is an unapproved IEEE standards draft, subject to change.
Both specifications define the ratios as follows:
52 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
CH4 / H2
C2H2 / C2H4
C2H4 / C2H6
The Ratios and respective standards are intended as diagnostic aids for DGA interpretation.
The Ratios should therefore not be regarded as the "final word" for such diagnosis but rather
as a tool to be used by an informed expert for evaluating the health of a transformer.
The advantages of these ratio tools are that they are quantitative and independent of
transformer oil volume. However, these and other ratio methods can produce incorrect
interpretations or none at all. Therefore, they should be used in conjunction with other
diagnostic tools such as the Duval Triangle. The value of on-line monitoring is that these
diagnostic tools can be utilized over time to enable a comprehensive condition-based asset
management program.
The Rogers Ratio Viewer is shown in Figure 19.
Figure 19. Rogers Ratio Viewer

The advent of on-line DGA data provided by the Siemens On-Line Transformer Monitor
provides new opportunities for use of the Ratios. In particular, the wealth of data provided
by the On-Line Transformer Monitor can be used to quickly assess the health of a
53 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
transformer by viewing ratio values over a specific range of dates, allowing one to correlate
specific fault conditions with transformer loading or extraneous events.
Selecting an End Date and Range for the Trend Graph determines the range of interest for
plotting points in the Ratio Viewer. The Ratio Viewer displays all meaningful samples
shown on the corresponding Trend Graph. The relative age of DGA samples are indicated
using pale yellow for the oldest to bright yellow, pale orange, and bright orange for the
most recent samples. The latest sample plotted in the Viewer is distinguished using a solid
red color. In addition, dotted lines normal to the three graph axes are shown on the graph,
for the most recent data point only.
Interpretation of Regions
The Viewer displays ratios in a three-dimensional volume containing several rectangular
solid regions, labeled T1, T2, T3, D1, D2, PD, and OK. Note that the region labeled PD
appears only in the IEC-60599 ratio definitions while the region labeled OK appears only in
the IEEE PC57.104 D11d ratio definitions.
The regions labeled with a T indicate probable thermal faults, with increasing numbers
indicating higher temperatures. The regions labeled with a D indicate probable discharge
faults, with increasing numbers corresponding to discharges that are more energetic. The
region labeled PD indicates a probable partial discharge (also known as corona) condition,
while the region labeled OK indicates a presumed absence of faults.
The IEEE PC57.104 D11d and IEC-60599 specifications generally agree on the following
detailed region definitions:
OK - Normal Unit
IEEE PC57.104 D11d names this region Case 0. IEC-60599 does not define this
region.
PD - Partial Discharges
IEC-60599 defines this region, while IEEE PC57.104 does not.
D1 - Discharges of low energy
This region is named Case 1 in IEEE PC57.104 D11d.
D2 - Discharges of high energy
This region is named Case 2 in IEEE PC57.104 D11d. The extent of this region differs
slightly between the IEC-60599 and IEEE PC57.104 D11d definitions.
T1 - Low temperature thermal faults not exceeding 300C
T2 - Thermal faults exceeding 300C but not exceeding 700C
T3 - Thermal faults exceeding 700C
54 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Interpreting the Graphical View

Each of the Viewers three axes is logarithmic with conceptually unlimited range. The
"front" axis shows an increasing ratio of Methane (CH4) to Hydrogen (H2), referred to as R1
in the text below. The "up" axis shows an increasing ratio of Acetylene (C2H2) to Ethylene
(C2H4), referred to as R2. The "right" axis shows an increasing ratio of Ethylene (C2H4) to
Ethane (C2H6), referred to as R3.
Use of the Viewer begins with a dissolved gas measurement (such as one obtained every
few hours from the Siemens On-Line Transformer Monitor) that includes nonzero ethylene,
ethane, and hydrogen values expressed in Parts per Million (PPM). The three ratios are
then computed. The resulting values determine the location of a point in 3D-space for
display by the Viewer.
Mathematically speaking, a ratio value is not defined if its denominator is zero. Therefore, a
sample containing a hydrogen (H2) value of 0.0 PPM causes R1 to be undefined. Likewise, a
sample with an ethylene (C2H4) value of 0.0 PPM causes R2 to be undefined and an ethane
(C2H6) value of 0.0 PPM causes R3 to be undefined.
When one or more of the ratios is undefined, the three values R1, R2 and R3 do not
determine a point in 3D-space and the Viewer cannot plot the sample. The Viewer displays
a count of samples that could not be plotted in the upper left corner of the display window.
The count is labeled Zero denominator.
As noted above, each axis has conceptually unlimited range. The Viewer is capable of
displaying ratio values between 0.01 and 100.0. If a value of R1, R2 or R3 lies outside the
range from 0.01 to 100.0, an out of range marker is displayed. The marker appears as a
small ring with an arrow through it.
The graphical view can be rotated, zoomed and panned using the arrow keys, shift-arrow
keys, and control-arrow keys respectively. The display can be cleared and the points replotted in time sequence by pressing the Backspace key. For more information, press F1
while the Viewer is active to raise the Help window. In the Help window, press Show Key
Help... to display the complete command list for the Viewer.
Summary
The Rogers Ratio Viewer analysis tool, integrated with Siemens's industry-leading On-Line
Transformer Monitor and turnkey asset monitoring services, offers breakthrough
capabilities for transformer asset management.
55 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Maintaining GAS-Guard View 2.0

Installations
This chapter provides additional detail about GAS-Guard View 2.0 and discusses important
aspects of GAS-Guard View 2.0 installations.
Configuring Communications
Introduction
The physical connection type is selected or updated using the Connection Type page of the
Wizard. The Wizard is displayed when creating a new monitored asset (File New
menu item) or when updating communications to an existing monitor (Action Update
Communications menu item on the Communications tab, which is available when a
monitor is selected in the navigation pane).
The Connection Type page is shown in Figure 20.
Figure 20. Connection Type page.

After the connection type is selected and the Next button is pressed, a page specific to the
connection types configuration requirements is presented. The following sections describe
the supported connection types and their configuration options.
56 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Local Area Network (LAN)

Direct monitor communication via Ethernet LAN is supported for Siemens model GASGuard 8 and GAS-Guard 3 monitors. The Next button leads to the Configure LAN
Connection page. When LAN is selected, only a single configuration item, the network
(Ethernet) address of the monitor, need be supplied.
Telephone Modem
Plain old telephone system (POTS) and cellular modems are supported for both TrueGas
and GAS-Guard family monitors. Configuration data for the modem is entered on the
Configure Modem Connection page. Five items are required to configure a modem
connection:
The phone number, also called the dial string.
The dial string may include commas to introduce delays into the dialing sequence. It
may also include codes to temporarily disable PBX functionality; in the example, the
code *71 represents a typical command to disable the Call Waiting feature.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 also supports a send/expect protocol for arbitrarily complex
interactions with the modem. This protocol is enabled by the caret (^) character,
which can only be entered after checking the Allow advanced dial string checkbox.
The send/expect protocol is described in the section Advanced Dialing Strings.
The modem setup string.
This string contains modem initialization commands that should be in effect at all
times. The default modem setup string is also described in the section Configuring
Modems, below.
The COM port to which the modem is attached (TrueGas monitors only).
The number of the COM port on the local computer. This value does not apply to
Siemens model GAS-Guard 3 and GAS-Guard 8 monitors and is not displayed for
them. To select the modem used to communicate with your model GAS-Guard 3 or
GAS-Guard 8 monitors, please click Select Modem in the Action menu.
The baud rate which should be used.
The baud rate at which the port should be used.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 uses Modbus for direct serial/radio connection to Serveron
TrueGas monitors only. For TrueGas monitors, the Modbus address of the monitor
must be specified. The default Modbus address is 17.
57 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
RS-232
Direct RS-232 connectivity is supported for both TrueGas and GAS-Guard family monitors.
Three items are required to configure a direct connection:
The COM port to which the cable is attached.
The number of the COM port on the local computer.
The Modbus address of the monitor (Serveron TrueGas monitors only)
GAS-Guard View 2.0 uses Modbus for direct serial connection to Serveron TrueGas
monitors only. For TrueGas monitors, the Modbus address of the monitor must be
specified. The default Modbus address is 17.
RS-232 with radio (FreeWave)

GAS-Guard View 2.0 supports a direct serial connection to a short-range radio link, e.g.
FreeWave from FreeWave Technologies. Four items are required to configure a direct-toradio connection:
The COM port to which the cable is attached.
The number of the COM port on the local computer.
The unit address of the slave radio.
This value is a configuration parameter of the FreeWave.
58 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Telephone Modem with radio (FreeWave)

GAS-Guard View 2.0 supports a modem connection to a short-range radio link, e.g.
FreeWave from FreeWave Technologies. Six items are required to configure a modem-toradio connection:
The phone number, also called the dial string.
The dial string may include commas to introduce delays into the dialing sequence. It
may also include codes to temporarily disable PBX functionality; in the example, the
code *71 represents a typical command to disable the Call Waiting feature.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 also supports a send/expect protocol for arbitrarily complex
interactions with the modem. This protocol is enabled by the caret (^) character,
which can only be entered after checking the Allow advanced dial string checkbox.
The send/expect protocol is described in the section Advanced Dialing Strings.
The modem setup string.
This string contains modem initialization commands that should be in effect at all
times. The default modem setup string is also described in the section Configuring
Modems, below.
The COM port to which the modem is attached (TrueGas monitors only).
The number of the COM port on the local computer. This value does not apply to
Siemens model GAS-Guard 3 and GAS-Guard 8 monitors and is not displayed for
them. To select the modem used to communicate with your model GAS-Guard 3 or
GAS-Guard 8 monitors, please click Select Modem in the Action menu.
The unit address of the slave radio.
This value is a configuration parameter of the FreeWave.
59 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Configuring Modems
Modem Initialization
Before sending any dial string to the modem, GAS-Guard View 2.0 will transmit the modem
setup string. The default modem setup string is at v1 e0 q0 &d2 x4. This setup string is
needed to configure the modem in your PC for proper communication with GAS-Guard
View 2.0.
at indicates the start of a modem command string.
v1 tells the modem to send responses that contain alphabetical codes rather than numeric
codes.
e0 turns echo off.
q0 quiets or suppresses response codes from your modem.
&d2 sets the modem to do the following when Data Terminal Ready (DTR) is lost:
hang up
turn off auto answer
return to command mode
x4 sets the modem to display at least these response codes:
extended response set
dial tone
busy signal detection
Below are general definitions of the Hayes-compatible commands being used in the
example. Your specific modem may require commands in addition to or instead of those
shown in this example. Refer to the documentation that came with your modem for more
information.
vN - Displays result codes in short form (numbers) or long form (test).
N = 0: send numeric responses
N = 1: send word responses (default).
eN - Turns the command echo feature on or off.
N = 0: command echo off
N = 1: command echo on (default).
qN - Displays or suppresses (quiets) result codes
N = 0: displays codes (default).
N = 1: suppresses codes.
&dN - Controls data terminal ready (DTR) transition
0 = ignore DTR signal
60 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
1 = return to command mode when after losing DTR

2 = hang up, turn off auto answer, and return to command mode after losing
DTR (default)
3 = reset after losing DTR
xN - Determines which result codes will be displayed following modem operations
N = 0: Basic response set, blind dialing
N = 1: extended response set, blind dialing
N = 2: extended response set, dial tone detection
N = 3: extended response set, blind dialing, and busy signal detection
N = 4: extended response set, dial tone, and busy signal detection (default).
Advanced Dialing Strings

Overview
Occasionally, nonstandard communications configurations may require that you exercise
direct control over interaction between the host computer running GAS-Guard View 2.0 and
the modem (or modem-compatible) device.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 supports this unusual but important requirement through advanced
dial strings. An advanced dial string is any string containing the caret (^, usually shift-6 on
U.S. English keyboards).
Since the presence of caret characters significantly changes the behavior of the dial string,
GAS-Guard View 2.0 prevents you from entering them by default. To enter an advanced
dial string containing carets, you must first check the Allow advanced dial string checkbox.
The box is found just below the Phone Number on the Configure Modem Connection page
of the New File Creation (or Update Communications) wizard. After checking the box,
you may type the advanced dial string in the Phone Number text box.
Send/Expect Protocol
The caret character is used to define a send/expect protocol between the computer running
GAS-Guard View 2.0 and the modem (or modem-like device) attached to the selected COM
port. Carets in properly-formed advanced dial strings always come in pairs. The first
member of the pair defines a block of text that GAS-Guard View 2.0 will send to the modem.
The second caret defines the response to expect from the modem-like device. Further
interactions may be specified by entering a third caret with a send sequence, a matching
fourth caret defining an expected response, etc. In principle there is no limit to the length of
the send/expect sequence that may be defined.
Example: the advanced dial string
ÂTÔKÂTDT5551212^CONNECTEDÂTÔKÂTDT7^CHANNEL 7
Would be executed as follows:
61 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
1. GAS-Guard View 2.0 opens the COM port and then transmits the string AT to the
port.
2. GAS-Guard View 2.0 collects response lines from the port until the pattern OK is
found.
3. GAS-Guard View 2.0 sends the string ATDT5551212 to the port.
4. GAS-Guard View 2.0 collects response lines until the pattern CONNECTED is
found.
5. GAS-Guard View 2.0 transmits the string AT to the port.
6. GAS-Guard View 2.0 collects response lines until the pattern OK is found.
7. GAS-Guard View 2.0 transmits the string ATDT7 to the port.
8. GAS-Guard View 2.0 collects response lines until the pattern CHANNEL 7 is found.
At this point, GAS-Guard View 2.0 assumes it is connected to the Siemens transformer
monitor and begins communication with the monitor.
Each time GAS-Guard View 2.0 transmits a character sequence to the port, it begins
interpreting response lines. It continues to collect response lines until the expected response
is found or a timeout occurs. The timeout is relatively long (3 minutes). If the timeout
occurs, GAS-Guard View 2.0 reports that it was unable to connect to the monitor.
Configuring TAPI Modems

GAS-Guard View 2.0 uses TAPI, a feature of Microsoft Windows, to access the modem
when communicating with Siemens Model GAS-Guard 8 and GAS-Guard 3 (TMx)
monitors. Use of TAPI requires that your analog modem be properly installed as a TAPI
modem. If you plan to communicate with GAS-Guard monitors using analog modem(s),
you must ensure your modem is properly installed and configured for use by TAPI.
Note: if you do not use modem(s) to communicate with Siemens GAS-Guard
monitors, this section does not apply to your installation.
To select the TAPI modem, click Select Modem in the Action menu to display the Select
Modem dialog box. The dialog box contains a dropdown list containing all properlyconfigured TAPI modems. If your modem does not appear in the list, click Configure TAPI
Modem to display the Add/Remove Hardware wizard. Follow the prompts in the wizard
to configure your modem.
If your modem does not appear in the dropdown list after you complete the Add/Remove
Hardware wizard, the following information may be helpful.
To determine whether your analog modem is properly installed for use by TAPI, click
Settings in your Start menu, open the Control Panel, and then double-click Phone and
Modem Options. In the Phone and Modem Options applet, select the Modems tab. Verify
that your modem (example: MultiTech MT5600ZDX Play & Play) is shown in the list. If it
62 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
is not, click the Add... button and use the wizard to properly install and configure your
modem for use by TAPI.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 will automatically create a phonebook entry named Siemens to
manage your modem. If you system does not have a properly configured TAPI modem,
GAS-Guard View 2.0 may fail to bind or may logically bind to a nonfunctional device such
as the printer port. If your modem is configured for TAPI but you are unable to connect to
your GAS-Guard monitor using it, click Settings in your Start menu and then click
Network Connections. Right-click and delete the Siemens entry in the list. Ensure your
modem is properly installed for use by TAPI as described above and then restart your
computer.
When your computer is ready, start GAS-Guard View 2.0 and try the connection again. You
may then view your Network Connections and verify that the Siemens entry has been
recreated.
Troubleshooting
Corrupt or Invalid Files
Overview
GAS-Guard View 2.0 stores data in structured textual files with the extension .TGH. These
files are informally referred to as TGH files.1 Although they are textual, TGH files have an
internal structure that must be preserved to allow GAS-Guard View 2.0 to correctly process
of the file. If the internal structure of a TGH file is not correct, GAS-Guard View 2.0 will
report that the file is corrupt or invalid. This section describes steps that may be taken to
recover most or all of the data in this unusual case.
Note: Siemens recommends that you create a backup copy of any .TGH file
before attempting any of the actions described below. Siemens strongly
discourages the examination or modification of TGH files using programs
other than GAS-Guard View 2.0 except when absolutely required.
File Structure
TGH files consist of a series of sections. Each section consists of a single header line
followed by content lines. The header consists of the section name, e.g. Serial, enclosed in
angle brackets < and >.
TGH files may be examined and modified using any textual file editor, e.g. Microsoft
Notepad. Examination of a TGH file that has been populated with data will show that the
files sections fall into two loose groups, header sections and data sections.
The acronym TGH stands for Transformer Gas History.
63 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
Each header section contains a collection of key=value pairs. The keys are often but not
always numeric. The values include communications configuration, metadata (e.g.
company, site and asset names), and monitor configuration (alarm limits, schedules, etc.)
Each data section contains an ordered collection of date-time=value,value, lines. Each
line in a data section must begin with a date and time. The definition of the values within
the line varies from one section to another.
An example of a .TGH file is shown below.
64 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
<Comment>
DO NOT EDIT THIS MACHINE-GENERATED FILE
<Info>
2=TGE-D998201
20=Siemens Demo
21=Serveron Stories
22=#11 GSU (11-3-2003 for 1 week)
35=0
<Serial>
Address=ModBus,17
CommPort=
Command=
Modem=
Phone=
Settings=
<Setup>
Interval=
<Sensors>
PartitionType=UseCustom
StdTemp=60
TankWallSensor=0
<Tasks>
Alarms=
Clock=
Schedule=
<Sched>
1=
2=
3=
4=
5=
<Alarms>
00=133.0,200.0
01=380.0,400.0
02=0.0,0.0
03=468.0,524.0
04=323.0,498.0
05=3230.0,4980.0
06=443.0,480.0
07=150.0,222.0
08=6.0,8.0
09=0.0,0.0
10=-1.0,-1.0
11=-1.0,-1.0
12=-1.0,-1.0
13=0.0,0.0
14=0.0,0.0
15=0.0,0.0
16=0.0,0.0
17=0.0,0.0
18=0.0,0.0
19=0.0,0.0
20=0.0,0.0
21=0.0,0.0
22=0.0,0.0
23=0.0,0.0
24=0.0,0.0
25=0.0,0.0
26=0.0,0.0
27=0.0,0.0
28=0.0,0.0
29=0.0,0.0
30=0.0,0.0
<PPM Data>
2003/10/27 00:00=0,6.2,197.1,0.0,0.7,35.9,139.8,1.3,1.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0
2003/10/27 04:00=0,6.0,196.5,0.0,0.7,38.0,156.5,1.2,1.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0
2003/10/27 08:00=0,6.0,197.2,0.0,0.8,40.6,162.3,1.3,1.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0
<Sensors Data>
2003/10/27 00:00=0,0.0,0.0,16.4,30.0,5.7,0.0,23.9,26.0,37.4,60.0,35.0,8.2
2003/10/27 04:00=0,0.0,0.0,12.1,30.0,5.7,0.0,21.8,26.3,37.6,60.0,35.0,8.2
65 of 70

2003/10/27
<Retention
2003/10/27
2003/10/27
2003/10/27
<Extractor
2003/10/27
2003/10/27
2003/10/27
810-1735-01 Rev A
08:00=0,0.0,0.0,16.5,30.0,5.7,0.0,22.9,26.1,37.5,60.0,35.0,8.2
Data>
00:00=0,182.0,323.0,0.0,1171.0,2196.0,776.0,1153.0,976.0,0.0,0.0,0.0
04:00=0,182.0,323.0,0.0,1167.0,2193.0,776.0,1160.0,977.0,0.0,0.0,0.0
08:00=0,183.0,324.0,0.0,1171.0,2194.0,776.0,1157.0,977.0,0.0,0.0,0.0
Data>
00:00=0,31.2,1.9,14.8,15.5,27.3,0.0,35.0,28.7,29.1,25.9,0.0,0.0,0.0
04:00=0,28.7,1.9,15.9,16.5,27.3,0.0,32.9,26.4,29.4,26.1,0.0,0.0,0.0
08:00=0,30.7,2.0,15.3,16.2,26.5,0.0,33.2,27.2,29.8,26.1,0.0,0.0,0.0
TGH files are locale-invariant: the file contents do not change regardless of the current
locale. This allows files written on any locale (e.g. Asian or European Windows) to be read
and correctly interpreted on any other locale (e.g. U.S. English or Brazilian Portuguese
Windows). User-entered textual data, e.g. the company name, is stored in UTF-8, a variablelength encoding for the Unicode character set.
Causes of File Corruption
Common causes of file corruption include:
Missing or invalid serial number. The value of key 02 in the <Info> section must be a
valid serial number. If the <Info> section does not exist, or key 02 is not present, or the
value is not a valid Siemens serial number, the file will be reported as corrupt or invalid.
Broken or incomplete line(s). Each line in each data section must begin with a valid
date and time. GAS-Guard View 2.0 accepts a wide range of date and time formats.
The following conditions will not cause the file to be reported as corrupt or invalid, but may
result in unexpected behavior:
Nonstandard section names. File sections with unrecognized headers are preserved
when the file is modified but are otherwise ignored. They do not cause the file to be
reported as corrupt or invalid.
Nan or Inf values. Like almost all contemporary software, GAS-Guard View 2.0
represents floating-point data in conformance with IEEE standard 754. IEEE-754
includes representations for values that are Not a Number (NaN) as well as positive or
negative infinity (Inf). These values may appear in floating point value fields as the
literal strings Nan or Inf. These values are read and processed by GAS-Guard View 2.0
according to the normal rules of IEEE-754 arithmetic; they do not cause the file to be
reported as corrupt or invalid.
For more information, please consult the IEEE standard.
Repairing Damaged Files
Begin by checking for the serial number key (02) in the <Info> section. If the key is present
and valid, scan all data sections for data lines that do not begin with a date and time. You
may discover one or more lines with unexpected line breaks. If you find such line(s), use
Notepad or a similar text-editing program to merge the split line or delete the badly formed
lines completely. After making one or more corrections save the file and use File Open
in GAS-Guard View 2.0 to see if the file can now be read.
As noted above, customer textual data is encoded in UTF-8. UTF-8 is a variable-length
encoding of the 16-bit Unicode character set. If your TGH file contains characters with code
66 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
points that lie outside the ISO Latin-1 256 character subset, the editor program you select
must be capable of handling the variable-length UTF-8 encoding format.
If these steps do not correct the problem, please contact Siemens or your Siemens
representative.
Menu Items Unavailable (Grayed Out)

Menu items are unavailable (grayed out) if the operation they represent is not meaningful
or cannot be performed. For example, GAS-Guard View 2.0 makes the File Close menu
item unavailable when the navigation pane contains no files.
If numerous menu items are unavailable (grayed out), check the status information lower
right corner of the GAS-Guard View 2.0 window. Many menu items require interaction
with the GAS-Guard View 2.0 Poller component. If your GAS-Guard View 2.0 installation
configuration is Viewer Only, the status bar will display Poller: None and these menu
items are unavailable. They include File New, Help Licensing, and most of the
contents of the Action menu.
If your installation configuration is Standalone or Server, the indicator at the lower right
corner of the main GAS-Guard View 2.0 window should say Busy or Idle. If it says None,
the Viewer and Poller components of GAS-Guard View 2.0 are not communicating
correctly. For more information about GAS-Guard Views components, please see the
Theory of Operations section below.
Theory of Operations
Overview
Note: this section assumes general knowledge of Microsoft Windows system
administration. Understanding the concepts presented here is not required
to make successful use of the GAS-Guard View 2.0 software.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 is composed of two components, the Viewer and the Poller. These
components are separate programs.
The Viewer is the application you see and interact with. The Poller works behind the
scenes, communicating with your Siemens monitor(s) and saving the data they gather in
files. The Viewer is always installed and appears in your Start menu under Programs
Siemens GAS-Guard View 2.0
Installation of the Poller depends on the installation configuration you selected.
67 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
If the Installation
Configuration is
Then the Poller component is
Viewer Only
Not installed not present.
Standalone
Installed as an ordinary program with a shortcut in every

users Startup folder.
Server
Installed as a Windows Service requiring separate login

credentials that you must specify during installation.
For more information about installation configurations, see the section Choosing an
Installation Configuration near the beginning of this manual.
GAS-Guard View 2.0 stores company, site, and asset names, the communications
configuration, and information gathered from the monitor in structured text files with the
extension .TGH (TGH files). This file-based design provides data portability and serves to
segregate the data by monitor. GAS-Guard View 2.0 retains compatibility with files created
using GAS-Guard View version 1.6.2 or earlier.
Note: files created or modified by GAS-Guard View 2.0 are incompatible
with GAS-Guard View version 1.6.2 (or earlier) and TM MultiView. If your
site includes multiple installations of GAS-Guard View, all users should
upgrade earlier versions to GAS-Guard View 2.0.
In addition to information stored in TGH files, both the Viewer and the Poller store
information in the Registry. The Viewer saves the content of the Navigation pane so it can
be restored each time you reopen the Viewer. The Poller saves licensing information and
the contents of the Polling tab there.
Viewer Component
The Viewer provides the entire user interface to GAS-Guard View 2.0. The Viewer opens
TGH files in order to read and display their contents; it is incapable of updating or
modifying TGH file contents in any way. All operations that update or modify file data
involve the Poller This includes operations that do not involve Siemens monitors, such as
entering DGA data and creating annotations. Since these operations require the cooperation
of the Poller, they are not available to users with Viewer Only installation configurations.
Poller Component
The Poller is responsible for all monitor communication and updates to data files, but does
not offer a user interface. Since the Poller has no user interface of its own, it must rely on
the Viewer to provide one.
The Viewer and Poller often interact as client and server, although neither one requires the
presence of the other. The Viewer may be installed without the Poller (Viewer Only
68 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
installation configuration). The Poller runs whenever you are logged in (Standalone
configuration) or continuously (Server configuration).
The Viewer communicates with the Poller using TCP/IP. The Poller listens on port 8011.
The Poller accepts connections only from a single Viewer on the same computer (localhost).
This feature is hardwired in the code. Restricting incoming connections to localhost
addresses network security concerns associated with the use of TCP.
If you run firewall software locally on the PC, you may be required to configure the firewall
to allow the Poller to listen locally on port 8011. As noted above, this should not raise
security concerns because the Poller will only accept connections originating from the same
computer on which it is running. GAS-Guard View 2.0 does not offer any network service(s)
available from off-host.
69 of 70
Serveron Corporation
3305 NW Aloclek Drive
www.serveron.com
Corporate Office: (800) 880-2552
Technical Support: (866) 273-7763
All rights reserved.
70 of 70
810-1735-01 Rev A
POWEROHM RESISTOR, INC.

5713 13TH STREET
KATY, TX 77493
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTORS
IMPORTANT: READ INSTRUCTIONS

THROUGHLY BEFORE UNPACKING
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR

POWEROHM NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SHIPPING AND RECEIVING
INSTALLATION
INSPECTION
NEUTRAL CONNECTION
GROUND CONNECTION
ACCESSORIES
MAINTENANCE
STORAGE
SHIPPING
After the final inspection, Powerohm Neutral Grounding Resistors are securely
fastened, in an upright position, onto a wooden skid. In some cases, additional
bracing and/or banding is added to insure a safe shipment. The units are then
completely wrapped with plastic to protect the finish and keep the outer surface free
of dirt and moisture. Depending on certain criteria, units are shipped either "open" or
crated. All crates are constructed with 1" thick lumber. The finished package is easily
handled with a forklift or hand truck.
All crates are clearly marked with the correct shipping information and requested
customer marks. A copy of the packing list is securely fastened to the package in
clear view.
NOTE:
Each unit is provided with a copy of the certified test

report (the originals are kept on file at the factory).
Normally, all crates are loaded by forklift into the enclosed van of a common carrier.
At this point, it is the responsibility of the carrier to provide proper handling to the
destination.
RECEIVING
Upon receipt, the crated unit should be unloaded and inspected immediately to
insure that proper handling was practiced during transit. Report any apparent
damage to the crate that could have harmed the contents.
NOTE:
Great care is taken to properly package your resistor, therefore, it is

recommended that the unit remains crated until it reaches the job site.
All packaged neutral grounding resistors are suitable for prolonged storage. Always
store the unit in the upright position (as shipped). Setting the crate on its side or top
will likely cause damage to the resistor. Avoid stacking anything on top of the crate.
INSTALLATION
When ready for installation at the jobsite, uncrate the resistor using care not to
damage the enclosure finish and/or external bushings. Next, remove the bolts which
fasten the resistor enclosure to the skid.
It is recommended that a hoisting device be used to lift the unit with the aid of the
eyebolts on the top of the enclosure. When using the eyebolts provided with
Powerohm Resistors Inc. neutral grounding resistors located at the top of the
enclosure, lifting must incorporate use of a spreading device to ensure a safe lift. Not
utilizing a spreader while lifting the unit causes the eyebolts to be pulled at various
angles resulting in roof damage. See examples below:
CORRECT
NOT CORRECT
For units without eyebolts or if a hoisting device is not available, a forklift can be
used, provided the forks rest against the top of the mounting channels located on the
bottom of the enclosure. Avoid resting the forks against the screened center.
NOTE:
Do not remove the enclosure covers before lifting the resistor unit.
Powerohm Neutral Grounding Resistors can be mounted on a concrete pad, support

stand or directly on top of the transformer (if the units size and weight will permit).
Always mount the unit in the upright position. The unit should be bolted to the
mounting surface using the 5/8" diameter holes provided at each corner of the
mounting channels. Expansion type anchors are recommended for concrete pad
mounting.
If the enclosure has an elevating stand, secure the stand to it's mounting surface
before mounting the enclosure. Never lift the enclosure with the elevating stand
attached.
NOTE:
The enclosure should always be securely grounded to prevent a shock

hazard to personnel or wildlife.
3
INSPECTION
After the resistor has been securely mounted, remove the front cover (the front cover
can be identified by the Powerohm nameplate). Note: If the unit has external
bushings mounted on the front cover, remove the back cover only. When installing
the front or back cover, DO NOT EXCEED 20 IN.-LBS WHEN TIGHTENING THE
1/4-20 COVER HARDWARE (exceeding this torque value will damage the 1/4-20
threaded inserts).
After removing the cover, remove all packing material and banding, if any, used to
support the insulators and resistor banks during shipment.
NOTE:
Failure to remove packing material from the inside of the enclosure may
result in fire hazard and/or resistor failure.
With the packing material removed, carefully inspect the inside of the unit for broken
insulators, bushings and other parts that may have been damaged during shipment.
NOTE:
If any damaged parts are found, contact the factory immediately.

Energizing the unit may damage the resistor and create a shock hazard
to personnel.
Finally, check all electrical connections to ensure tightness.
NEUTRAL CONNECTION
The neutral lead from the transformer or generator may be connected one of three
ways depending upon the specific design (refer to the supplied drawing for terminal
location):
1.
The connection is made directly to a top or side mounted entrance bushing.

The bushing may have an eyebolt connector (accepts bare cable), a copper
stud connector (requires customer supplied lug) or a NEMA two or four hole
pad type connector (requires customer supplied lug).
2.
The connection is made directly to an internal terminal via rigid conduit

entering from the bottom through enclosure knockouts. The terminal consists
of a firmly supported stainless steel conductor (normally a Nema 2-hole pad).
Cable termination will require a customer supplied compression type lug (that
accepts up to 4/0 cable). The neutral terminal is tagged for easy identification.
Location and termination of the conduit is the customer's responsibility.
3.
The connection is made directly to the primary terminal of the current

transformer which is mounted inside the enclosure. This terminal will be
tagged "neutral" and requires a customer supplied lug and bolt. The other
primary terminal of the current transformer has been factory wired to the
resistive element. The neutral lead usually enters from the bottom through
conduit. Sometimes the current transformer is factory wired to a top mounted
entrance bushing in which case the connection is the same as the first
example above.
NOTE:
The factory supplied drawing identifies the neutral and ground

connection.
In all cases, the neutral terminal is tagged for easy identification and the proper
connection is shown schematically on the drawing.
Check all electrical connections to ensure tightness.
GROUND CONNECTION
The ground lead from the resistive element to ground may be connected one of two
ways:
1.
The connection is made directly to a top or side mounted entrance bushing.

The bushing may have an eyebolt connector (accepts bare cable), a copper
stud connector (requires customer supplied lug) or a NEMA two or four hole
pad type connector (also requires customer supplied lug).
2.
The connection is made directly to an internal terminal via rigid conduit

entering from the bottom through enclosure knockouts. The terminal consists
of a firmly supported stainless steel conductor (normally a Nema 2-hole pad).
Cable termination will require a customer supplied compression type lug (that
accepts up to 4/0 cable). The ground terminal is tagged for easy identification.
Location and termination of the conduit is the customer's responsibility. Please
note if a window type current transformer is present the ground cable must
pass through the window of the current transformer and connect to the ground
terminal (as identified above).
NOTE:
The factory supplied drawing identifies the neutral and ground

connection.
In all cases, the ground connection is tagged for easy identification and the proper
connection is shown schematically on the drawing.
ACCESSORIES
Neutral grounding resistors may come equipped with accessories such as ground
fault sensing devices. If applicable please follow the instructions below when
connecting this type of equipment.
1.
2.
If a sensing resistor is present both neutral and ground terminals come

pre-wired by the factory. However signal leads must be field wired to the
appropriate terminals on the ground fault monitoring device (see owners
manual).
If a current transformer is present the ground cable must pass through
the window of the current transformer and connect to the ground terminal (as
identified in step 2 of the ground connection section). In addition, the current
transformer secondaries (X1 and X2) must be field wired to the appropriate
terminals on the ground fault monitoring device (see owners manual).
NOTE:
The factory supplied drawing identifies these connections.
In all cases, both the neutral and ground connections are tagged for easy
identification and proper connection is shown schematically on the drawing.
MAINTENANCE
Normally, no maintenance is necessary on a neutral grounding resistor. However,
periodic inspections for damage are needed to ensure that the resistor is still capable
of protecting the system. Damage may occur from lightning, storms, earthquakes,
wildlife, overloads or extended service life. Basically, it is necessary to ensure that
the resistive element has not burned open and that the element (including the
incoming bushing) is still properly isolated from ground.
The following procedure is recommended for periodic field inspections.
1.
De-energize the system being grounded and break the connection between
the system neutral and the grounding resistor. An isolation switch is some
times available to break this connection. These precautions are recommended
to prevent a shock hazard to maintenance personnel and to prevent the
system from being operated without proper grounding.
2.
Remove the front cover (which is on the same side as the nameplate) and the
rear cover. This will allow for a visual inspection of all internal components.
3.
Carefully check for cracked insulators or bushings. A Meggar or Hi-Pot test is

the most reliable method of ensuring that the porcelain insulation is still
providing the necessary electrical isolation.
4.
Check the resistive element for continuity. An ohmmeter reading made

between the neutral and the ground side of the resistor should be within 10%
of the nameplate value. If the resistance of the element is more than 15% off
from the nameplate value, the resistors should be replaced.
5.
Check all internal connections for tightness. Check wiring for signs of damage
from heat or overloads.
6.
Check the enclosure for signs of damage from weather or rodents. Replace all
covers removed during inspection and check the mounting bolts for tightness.
STORAGE
1.
If the unit is to be unused or stored for any length of time indoors, cover the
unit to prevent buildup of dirt. If stored outdoors, do not cover with plastic that
may create condensation and enclosure corrosion or staining.
2.
There is no special preparation for the unit.
3.
Storage temperatures should remain -40C to 70C (-40F to 158F).
Discharge Manual
Covers VinBulk and RhinoBulk
Author
Date
Justin Smith
st
1 November 2013
2013 Trans Ocean/JF Hillebrand
www.transoceanbulk.com
www.jfhillebrand.com
This document remains the sole property of JF Hillebrand Group AG and is to be used by the employees of Trans Ocean
Bulk Logistics, JF Hillebrand, their appointed agents and customers. Issuance outside of these entities must first be
authorised by Trans Ocean Technical Department.
Any questions regarding any aspect of this manual or the

equipment required should be referred to the nearest Trans Ocean
Technical Representative.
Revision and Issue Listing
The final issue on the list will be considered as the current version of the document.
Revision
Date
Description
A
B
14th Aug 2012

1st Nov 2013
Original issue
New format and combined VinBulk and RhinoBulk versions
Checklist
A multilingual checklist is attached to the PDF version of this manual
Equipment requirements
The flexitank valve connection is a 3 (DN80) male Camlock. A female Camlock

connector will therefore be required.
A strap or stand will be required to support the hose during discharge to avoid
excessive stress on the valve/elbow assembly.
The flexitank cannot be pressurised to assist discharge and therefore a suitable pump
will be required.
It is recommended that advice always be sought from a Trans Ocean technical

representative before proceeding. This is important due to the potential variations in
discharge sites.
Discharge manual
Page 2 of 4
1. Container Positioning & Safety

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Park container/chassis in a stable position

Apply ALL vehicle and chassis parking brakes.
Turn off vehicle engine and remove keys from ignition.
Ground/Earth container via suitable conductive media.
Secure chassis wheels with front and back chocks.
A slope (<5) to the rear will assist
discharge of the flexitank although this
is not essential.
f)
NOTE: These safety procedures MUST be completed before discharge can commence.
These should be considered the minimum steps and any additional requirements for a
particular facility should be followed accordingly.
2. Discharge
a) Check container number corresponds with all relevant documentation.
b) Check customs seal is intact and that number corresponds to relevant documentation
c)
Check valve condition. Valve should be

locked in closed position with cap in
place.
d)
Remove cap and connect hose. Hose

should be supported to avoid excess
strain on valve/ elbow assembly.
e)
Open valve and ensure locking pin is

engaged when ready to begin
discharge.
Discharge manual
Page 3 of 4
Flexitank will collapse as discharge

continues.
f)
g)
Hose support may require adjustment

throughout discharge.
h)
After discharge is complete close

valves and replace cap.
Discharge manual
Page 4 of 4

10.4 List of Brochures

1)
Operating Instruction for OLTC MR GERMANY
Leaflet
2)
Installation and Maintenance Instructions of

Temperature Indicators (WTI/OTI) perfect control
make.
Leaflet
3)
Transformer Temperature Indicator (WTI/OTI)
Leaflet
4)
Tech. Specification on Temperature Detector (RTD

System) Perfect Control Make.
Leaflet
5)
Pressure Equalizing Between OLTC & tank
T005-0497
6)
Plate Valve Assembly
T010-0497
7)
Gas and Oil Actuated Relay
T016-0497
8)
Silica gel Breather
T020-0799
9)
Magnetic oil level gauge
T025-0497
10)
Gas Collecting Device
T029-0897
11)
Constant Oil Pressure System (COPS) Conservator
T034-0201
12)
Long Term Storage of Gas Filled Main Unit &

Accessories
T035-0998
On-load tap-changer VACUTAP VM

VR I HD
Operating Data
Technical
Instructions
All rights reserved by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen

Copying and distribution of this document and the utilization and communication of its contents are strictly prohibited
unless expressly authorized.
Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent,
utility model or ornamental design registration.
The product may have been modified after this document went to press.
We expressly reserve the right to make changes to the technical data, the design or the scope of delivery.
The information provided and the arrangements agreed during processing of the relevant quotations and orders are
generally binding.
The original operating instructions were drawn up in German.
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
General / Technical Data ............................................................ 11
1.1
On-load tap-changer designations..........................................................11
1.2
Technical data for VACUTAP VM ........................................................12
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
Technical data for VACUTAP VM I .................................................................. 12

Technical data for VACUTAP VM II ................................................................. 13
Technical data for VACUTAP VM III ................................................................ 14
Step capacity diagram VM.................................................................................. 15
1.3
Rated insulation level..............................................................................17
1.4
Rated withstand voltages........................................................................17
1.4.1
1.4.3
Rated withstand voltages of the internal on-load tap-changer insulation

(with the exception of VACUTAP VM 300) ...................................................... 19
Rated withstand voltages of the internal on-load tap-changer insulation for
VACUTAP VM 300........................................................................................... 20
VM rated withstand voltages multiple coarse change-over selector .............. 22
Special designs........................................................................... 23
2.1
Parallel bridges for parallel connections .................................................23
2.2
On-load tap-changer VACUTAP VM 650 Y...VM I 1503 with multiple

coarse change-over selector (up to maximum of 5 coarse tap
connections)............................................................................................24
2.3
Two-pole on-load tap-changer VACUTAP VM II 302/352/502/602 ......24
2.4
On-load tap-changer VACUTAP VM III 350 Y...VM I 1503 for linear

voltage adjustment, up to a maximum of 34 operating positions ............24
Appendix ..................................................................................... 25
3.1
Dimensional drawings/connection diagrams...........................................25
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
VACUTAP VM III 300 Y-0/W/G (898038) ........................................................ 25

VACUTAP VM II 302-0/W/G (898039)............................................................. 26
VACUTAP VM I 301-0/W/G (898040).............................................................. 27
VACUTAP VM III 350/500/650 Y-0/W/G (746219) .......................................... 28
VACUTAP VM II 352/502/652-0/W/G (746220)............................................... 29
1.4.2
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen 2010
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
Table of contents
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.1.10
3.1.11
3.1.12
3.1.13
3.1.14
3.1.15
3.1.16
3.1.17
3.1.18
3.1.19
3.1.20
3.1.21
3.1.22
3.1.23
3.1.24
3.1.25
3.1.26
3.1.27
3.1.28
3.1.29
3.1.30
3.1.31
3.1.32
3.1.33
3.1.34
3.1.35
3.1.36
3.1.37
3.1.38
3.1.39
VACUTAP VM II 351/501/651-0/W/G (746221)............................................... 30

VACUTAP VM I 802/1002-0/W/G (746222)..................................................... 31
VACUTAP VM I 1203/1503-0/W/G (746223)................................................... 32
VACUTAP VM III K-0/W/G (746224) ............................................................... 33
VACUTAP VM III 650 Y with multiple coarse change-over selector (746226) 34
VACUTAP VM I 601 with multiple coarse change-over selector (746227)...... 35
VACUTAP VM I 802/1002 with multiple coarse change-over selector
(746228) ............................................................................................................. 36
VACUTAP VM I 1203/1503 with multiple coarse change-over selector
(746229) ............................................................................................................. 37
VACUTAP VM III 300 tie-in resistors without potential switch (898695).......... 38
VACUTAP VM III Y tie-in resistors with/without potential switch (898692)...... 41
VACUTAP VM II tie-in resistors with/without potential switch (898691) .......... 42
VACUTAP VM I tie-in resistors with/without potential switch (898690) ........... 43
VACUTAP VM I 351...1503, tie-in resistor cylinder with potential switch
without tie-in resistors (898804) ......................................................................... 44
VACUTAP VM 300 installation drawing of centrical drive (765192) ............ 45
VACUTAP VM installation drawing of centrical drive (746230) ................... 46
VACUTAP VM on-load tap-changer head, centrical drive (893899) ........... 48
VACUTAP VM variants of on-load tap-changer head (720026) .................. 49
VACUTAP VM swivel range of gear unit (720027) ..................................... 50
VACUTAP VM screenings on oil compartment contacts (730336) ............. 51
VACUTAP VM 300 tap selector cross-sections (898041) ........................... 52
VACUTAP VM 300 arrangement of contacts on tap selector
(blanks, 891114)................................................................................................. 53
VACUTAP VM arrangement of contacts on tap selector, tap selector
division 10...22 (898013) .................................................................................... 54
VACUTAP VM installation position of tap selector connection contacts
(890477) ............................................................................................................. 55
VACUTAP VM connecting leads 3W, 1G, 3G (723590) ............................. 56
VACUTAP VM screenings on fine tap selector and change-over selector
(730335) ............................................................................................................. 57
VACUTAP VM 802/803/1203/1503 bridges to parallel connection of tap
selector connection contacts (899598)............................................................... 58
VACUTAP VM horizontal drive shaft, centrical drive (893896) ................... 59
VACUTAP VM III 350/500/650 Y arrangement of tap selectors (891107) .. 60
VACUTAP VM I 351/501/651 arrangement of tap selectors (891108) ........ 61
VACUTAP VM I 1503 arrangement of tap selectors (891109) .................... 62
VACUTAP VM I 802/1002 arrangement of tap selectors (891110) ............. 63
VACUTAP VM, supporting flange, special design for bell-type tank installation
for Um up to 300 kV (896762) ............................................................................ 64
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
Table of contents
3.1.40
3.1.41
3.1.42
3.1.43
VACUTAP VM flange for pressure relief valve (895168) ............................ 65

VACUTAP VM tap selector base with additional screening, reversing
change-over selector design (893934) ............................................................... 66
VACUTAP VM tap selector base with additional screening, coarse tap
connection design (893935) ............................................................................... 67
VACUTAP VM tap selector base with through hole D20 and D13
(725649) ............................................................................................................. 68
3.2
VACUTAP VM 300 overview of on-load tap-changer designs

(765835)..................................................................................................69
3.3
VACUTAP VM overview of on-load tap-changer designs (899740) 70
3.4
Overview of basic connection diagrams with tap selector connection

contacts designated in accordance with MR standard (890616) ............71
3.5
Connection diagram (contacts designated in accordance with MR

standard).................................................................................................74
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
VACUTAP VM III 300 Y, basic connection diagram 10 19 1 W (2414642) ..... 74

VACUTAP VM III 300 Y, basic connection diagram 10 19 3 W (2414644)...... 75
VACUTAP VM III 300 Y, basic connection diagram 14 27 1 G (2414648) ...... 76
VACUTAP VM III 300 Y, basic connection diagram 14 27 3 G (2414649) ...... 77
VACUTAP VM III 350/500/650 Y, basic connection diagram 10 19 1 W
(2414658) ........................................................................................................... 78
VACUTAP VM III 350/500/650 Y, basic connection diagram 10 19 3 W
(2414670) ........................................................................................................... 79
VACUTAP VM I 802/1002, basic connection diagram 14 27 1 G (2414631)... 80
VACUTAP VM I 1203/1503, basic connection diagram 18 35 1 W
(2414636) ........................................................................................................... 81
VACUTAP VM I 802/1002, basic connection diagram 16 79 1 G, multiple
coarse change-over selector design (2407535) ................................................. 82
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8
3.5.9
MR worldwide.............................................................................. 83
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
List of figures
List of figures
Figure 1
Step capacities (rated step voltage Ui, rated through-current Iu) .....15
Figure 2
Step capacities (rated step voltage Ui, rated through-current Iu) .....16
Figure 3
Rated withstand voltages ................................................................18
Figure 4
On-load tap-changer combination VM I 351/VM II 352

(a VM I 351, b VM II 352) for delta connection .......................23
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
List of tables
List of tables
Table 1
Technical data for VACUTAP VM I ......................................................12
Table 2
Technical data for VACUTAP VM II .....................................................13
Table 3
Technical data for VACUTAP VM III ....................................................14
Table 4
Rated insulation level..............................................................................17
Table 5

(with the exception of VACUTAP VM 300)...........................................19
Table 6

for VACUTAP VM 300..........................................................................20
Table 7
Available connections (also available as 3 W, 3 G) ................................21
Table 8
On-load tap-changer VACUTAP VM with multiple coarse change-over

selector, rated withstand voltages of the internal on-load tap-changer
insulation.................................................................................................22
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
1 General / Technical Data
General / Technical Data
1.1
On-load tap-changer designations

Example: VM III
650
Y - 72.5 / C - 10
19
1W
Basic connection diagram
Type
Number of phases
Ium (in A)
Number of parallel main

switching contacts
Applications
Um (in kV)
VACUTAP VM
VM
1 phase
2 phases
3 phases
VM I, VM II, VM III
VM I, VM II, VM III
VM I, VM II, VM III
VM I, VM II, VM III
VM I
VM I
VM I
VM I
1 (3-phase Y)
1 (1-phase)
2 (1-phase)
3 (1-phase)
For use with neutral point only
I
II
III
300
350
500
650
802
1002
1203
1503
0
1
2
3
Y
VM
VM
VM
VM
VM
72.5
123
170
245
300
B
C
D
DE
Tap selector size
Number of maximum operating positions without

change-over selector
Number of maximum operating positions with changeover selector (reversing

change-over selector or
coarse tap selector)1)
Number of maximum operating positions with multiple
coarse change-over selector
Mid-positions
Change-over selector
Tie-in measures
1)
not with multiple coarse changeover selector

10
12
14
16
18
22
10
12
14
16
18
10
12
14
16
18
0 mid-positions (without changeover selector)
1 mid-position
3 mid-positions
Reversing change-over selector
Coarse tap connection
Tie-in resistor
Potential switch
Potential switch with tie-in resistor
10
12
14
16
18
22
19
23
27
31
35
59
71
83
95
107
0
1
3
W
G
R
S
P
300 amp variants with a maximum of 27 operating positions available
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
11
1.2
Technical data for VACUTAP VM
1.2.1
Technical data for VACUTAP VM I
On-load tap-changer VM I
301
302
351
501
651
1002
1203
300
300
350
500
650
800
800
1000
1200
1500
Rated short-time current (in kA)
4.2
6.5
10
12
15
Rated duration of short-circuits (in s)
Rated peak withstand current (in kA)
10
10
10.5
12.5
16.25
20
20
25
30
37.5
3300
3300
3300
3300
3300
3300
3300
3300
3300
3300
990
990
1155
1625
1625
2640
2640
3300
3500
3500
Number of phases and application

Maximum rated through current Ium (in A)
Maximum rated step voltage Uim (in V)1)

Step capacity (PStN, in kVA)
Oil compartment
Temperature range
Dimensions
Table 1
803
1503
50...60
Rated frequency (in Hz)

Operating positions
802
Without change-over selector: maximum 18

With change-over selector: maximum 352)
With multiple coarse change-over selector: maximum 1072)
Pressure-tight up to 0.3 bar permanent differential pressure (test pressure
0.6 bar), head and cover of the diverter switch oil compartment are
vacuum-proof.
The on-load tap-changer VACUTAP VM can be operated in the rated load
range at surrounding oil temperatures of between -25 and +105 C and with
overload up to +115 C in accordance with IEC 60214-1. For details of
operation under Arctic conditions, please refer to the General Technical
Data TD 61.
Weight, displacement volume and oil content of the diverter switch oil
compartment are shown in the relevant dimension drawings.
Technical data for VACUTAP VM I
1)
The maximum rated step voltage may be exceeded by 10 % due to overexcitation of the transformer if the step
capacity is limited to its rated value.
2)
12
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
Technical data for VACUTAP VM II
1.2.2
On-load tap-changer VM II
302
352
502
652
300
350
500
650
4.2
6.5


1)
Maximum rated step voltage Uim (in V)

10
10.5
12.5
16.25
3300
3300
3300
3300
990
1155
1625
1625
50...60

Operating positions
Oil compartment
Temperature range
Dimensions
Table 2

vacuum-proof.
Data for TD 61.
Technical data for VACUTAP VM II
1)
2)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
13
Technical data for VACUTAP VM III
1.2.3
On-load tap-changer VM III
300 Y
350 Y
500 Y
650 Y
300
350
500
650
4.2
6.5


Maximum rated step voltage Uim (in V)
1)
10
10.5
12.5
16.25
3300
3300
3300
3300
990
1155
1625
1625
50...60

Operating positions
Oil compartment
Temperature range
Dimensions
Table 3

vacuum-proof.
Data for TD 61.
Technical data for VACUTAP VM III
1)
2)
14
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
Step capacity diagram VM
1.2.4.1
Step capacity diagram for network application
Rated step voltage Ui (V)i
1.2.4
Rated through current Iu (A)

u
Figure 1
Step capacities (rated step voltage Ui, rated through-current Iu)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
15
Step capacity diagram for autoclave application
Rated step voltage Ui (V)i
1.2.4.2
Rated through current Iu (A)

Figure 2
16
Step capacities (rated step voltage Ui, rated through-current Iu)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
1.3
Rated insulation level

For all on-load tap-changer

variants
Highest voltage for equipment Um (in kV)1
72.5
123
170
245
3002)
Highest operating voltage Ub (phase-phase) on

on-load tap-changer (kV)
55
79
145
170
245
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage

(in kV, 1.2/50 s)
350
550
750
1050 1050
140
230
325
Rated switching impulse voltage (in kV)

Rated short-duration power frequency withstand
voltage (in kV, 50 Hz, 1 min.)
Table 4
1.4
850
850
460
460
1)
In accordance with IEC 60214-1, chapter 3.57: highest effective value for phaseto-phase voltage in a three-phase system for which an on-load tap-changer is
designed with respect to its insulation.
2)
300 A variants with a maximum of 245 KV available.
Rated withstand voltages

Figure 3 shows diagrams of the voltage stress present on the tap winding of the
three primary basic connections of three-pole on-load tap-changers and singlepole on-load tap-changers.
When selecting the on-load tap-changer, you must check that the highest stress
on the tap selector does not exceed the related rated withstand voltages.
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
17
without change-over selector
with coarse change-over

selector in (+) position
with reversing change-over selector
with coarse change-over

selector in (-) position
CAUTION
Adhere to maximum rated lightning impulse withstand voltage
stress on a0 in mid-position.
Figure 3
Rated withstand voltages
a0
Between selected and preselected tap on the diverter switch and tap selector.
a1
Between tap selector contacts of the winding of one tap position (connected or not connected)
Between beginning and end of a tapped winding and, with respect to a coarse winding, between
beginning and end of a coarse winding.
Note for coarse tap selector connection (-) position of the change-over selector:
When stressed with impulse voltage, the permissible withstand voltage "a" must be adhered to between
the end of a coarse tap winding connected with the K fine tap selector contact and the fine tap selector
contact at the end of the tapped winding of the same phase.
Between the fine tap selector contacts of different phases and between change-over selector contacts
of different phases, which are connected with the beginning/end of a tapped winding or with a fine tap
selector contact.
Between diverter switch output terminal and ground
Additionally for coarse tapping arrangement in (+) position of the change-over selector:
18
c1
From one (-) change-over selector contact to take-off lead of the same phase.
c2
Between (-) change-over selector contacts of different phases.
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
1.4.1
Rated withstand voltages of the internal on-load tap-changer

insulation (with the exception of VACUTAP VM 300)
The tap selector size (ID letters B, C, D, DE, E) characterizes the internal
insulation of the tap selector, whose rated withstand voltages must be matched
to the requirements of the transformer winding.
Insulation
distances
Tap selector size

B
Tap selector size Tap selector size Tap selector size

C
D
DE
kV
kV
1.2/ 50 s 50 Hz
1 min
kV
kV
1.2/50 s 50 Hz
1 min
kV
kV
1.2/50 s 50 Hz
1 min
kV
kV
1.2/50 s 50 Hz
1 min
a0
Power-frequency voltage test (50 Hz/1 min): 20 kV 50 Hz 1 min;

Response voltage with 1 mA leakage current: 35 kV 1.2/50 s;
3 kA residual voltage (= lightning impulse protection level): 56 kV 1.2/50 s with ZnO
a1
150
30
150
30
150
30
150
30
265
50
350
82
490
105
550
120
1)
265
50
350
82
490
146
550
160
c1
485
143
545
178
590
208
660
230
c21)
495
150
550
182
590
225
660
250
Table 5
1)
Rated withstand voltages of the internal on-load tap-changer insulation (with the exception of
VACUTAP VM 300)
Insulation distance omitted for single-pole on-load tap-changers
The admissible maximum operating voltage on the individual tap selector

distances corresponds to half the value of the above mentioned rated shortduration power frequency withstand voltages.
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
19
1.4.2
Rated withstand voltages of the internal on-load tap-changer

insulation for VACUTAP VM 300
Insulation
distances
a0
VM III 300 Y
kV 1.2/ 50 s
VM I 301
kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
kV 1.2/ 50 s
kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
Power-frequency voltage test (50 Hz/1 min): 20 kV 50 Hz 1 min;

300
300
70
c1
400
120
400
120
c2
400
120
Table 6
70
300
70
Rated withstand voltages of the internal on-load tap-changer insulation for VACUTAP VM 300

20
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
without change-over
selector
with reversing change-over with coarse change-over

selector
selector
Connection
Tap selector
size
Connection
Tap selector
size
Connection
Tap selector
size
10050
B/C/D/DE
10071W
B/C/D/DE
10071G
B/C/D/DE
10060
B/C/D/DE
10081W
B/C/D/DE
10081G
B/C/D/DE
10070
B/C/D/DE
10091W
B/C/D/DE
10091G
B/C/D/DE
10080
B/C/D/DE
12101W
B/C/D/DE
12101G
B/C/D/DE
10090
B/C/D/DE
12111W
B/C
12111G
B/C
10100
B/C/D/DE
14111W
D/DE
14111G
D/DE
12110
B/C/D/DE
14121W
B/C
14121G
B/C
12120
B/C/D/DE
14131W
B/C
14131G
B/C
14130
B/C/D/DE
16121W
D/DE
16121G
D/DE
14140
B/C/D/DE
16131W
D/DE
16131G
D/DE
16150
B/C/D/DE
16141W
B/C/D/DE
16141G
B/C/D/DE
16160
B/C/D/DE
16151W
B/C
16151G
B/C
18170
B/C/D/DE
18151W
D/DE
18151G
D/DE
18180
B/C/D/DE
18161W
B/C
18161G
B/C
22190
B/C/D/DE
18171W
B/C
18171G
B/C
22200
B/C/D/DE
10191W
B/C/D/DE
10191G
B/C/D/DE
22210
B/C
12231W
B/C/D/DE
12231G
B/C/D/DE
22220
B/C
14271W
B/C/D/DE
14271G
B/C/D/DE
16311W
B/C/D/DE
16311G
B/C/D/DE
18351W
B/C/D/DE
18351G
B/C/D/DE
Table 7
Available connections (also available as 3 W, 3 G)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
21
1.4.3
VM rated withstand voltages multiple coarse change-over

selector
a0 = Between selected and preselected tap on the
diverter switch and tap selector
a1 = Between tap selector contacts of the winding of
one tap position (connected or not connected)
a
= Between beginning and end of a tapped winding

and also between the connected K contact and
any points of the tapped winding of the same
phase
= Between the tap selector contacts of different

phases and between the connected K contact of
one phase and any points of the tapped winding
of another phase
c1 = Between any coarse tappings of one phase to the

diverter switch terminal of the same phase
c2 = Between identically-named, unconnected coarse
tappings of different phases
d1 = Between connected and adjacent coarse tap
contacts in one phase
d2 = Between unconnected, adjacent coarse tap
contacts in one phase
d3 = Between beginning and end of all coarse tap
connections of one phase
f
Insulation
distances
a0
Tap selector size B

kV
1.2/ 50 s
= Between diverter switch output terminal and

ground
Tap selector size C
kV
kV
50 Hz, 1 min 1.2/50 s
Tap selector size D
kV
kV
50 Hz, 1 min 1.2/50 s
kV
50 Hz, 1 min
Power-frequency voltage test (50 Hz/60 s): 20 kV 50 Hz 1 min;

a1
150
30
150
30
150
30
265
50
350
82
450
105
1)
265
50
350
82
450
146
c1
455
127
525
165
590
210
c21)
455
127
525
165
590
215
d1
265
50
350
82
450
105
d2
350
82
450
105
450
105
d3
350
82
450
105
490
120
Table 8 On-load tap-changer VACUTAP VM with multiple coarse change-over selector, rated withstand
voltages of the internal on-load tap-changer insulation
1)
Insulation distance omitted for single-pole on-load tap-changers

22
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
2 Special designs
Special designs
2.1
Parallel bridges for parallel connections

Current division on the connection contacts of 2 tap selector planes only for onload tap-changers VACUTAP VM I 802 (803)/1002 and of 3 tap selector planes
only for on-load tap-changers VACUTAP VM I 1203/1503, see .Chapter 3.1.33
Parallel bridges on the tap selector terminals are mandatory if the tap winding
has been wound in two or more branches and each of these branch taps is connected to the terminals of the tap selector.
This measure reliably prevents the following:
a)
Introduction of circulating currents into the current paths of tap selector and
diverter switch
b)
Commutating arc on movable tap selector contact bridges
c)
Overvoltage between adjacent tap selector connection contacts connected in

parallel
On-load tap-changer combination for delta connection

The on-load tap-changers can also be used with the single-phase on-load tapchanger VM I 351 as a two column on-load tap-changer combination VM I 351/
VM II 352 for adjusting the voltage of transformer windings in a delta connection
(analogous to VM I 501/VM II 502 and VM I 651/VM II 652).
The tap windings should correspond to those in Figure 4.
Figure 4
On-load tap-changer combination VM I 351/VM II 352

(a VM I 351, b VM II 352) for delta connection
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
23
2 Special designs
2.2
On-load tap-changer VACUTAP VM 650 Y...VM I 1503 with

multiple coarse change-over selector (up to maximum of
5 coarse tap connections)
Extremely fine voltage adjustment requires a great number of operating positions which sometimes can only be achieved with a multiple coarse tapping
arrangement.
For instance, 107 operating positions can be obtained by using a 5-tap coarse
winding and a tapped winding with 18 taps.
The multiple coarse change-over selector is attached to both sides of the tap
selector.
The on-load tap-changers are available (on request) for Um = 72.5 up to max.
300 kV and for 2 to 5 coarse taps (tap selector sizes B and C) or 2 and 3 coarse
tap connections (tap selector size D).
2.3
Two-pole on-load tap-changer VACUTAP

VM II 302/352/502/602
On-load tap-changer VM II 302/352/502/602 can be supplied as a two-pole onload tap-changer for single-phase center point tap-change operations with the
same technical data as on-load tap-changers VM III 350 Y, VM III 500 Y and/or
VM III 650 Y (see dimensional drawings, Chapter 3).
2.4
On-load tap-changer VACUTAP VM III 350 Y...VM I 1503 for

linear voltage adjustment, up to a maximum of 34 operating
positions
The high number of operating positions without change-over selector is
achieved by doubling the tap selector contact planes compared with the standard design (requires a larger installation length).
The on-load tap-changers are available for Um = 72.5...300 kV and several tap
selector sizes (rated withstand voltages and dimensional drawings on request).
24
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
Appendix
3.1
Dimensional drawings/connection diagrams
3.1.1
VACUTAP VM III 300 Y-0/W/G (898038)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
25
3 Appendix
3.1.2
26
VACUTAP VM II 302-0/W/G (898039)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.3
VACUTAP VM I 301-0/W/G (898040)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
27
3 Appendix
3.1.4
28
VACUTAP VM III 350/500/650 Y-0/W/G (746219)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.5
VACUTAP VM II 352/502/652-0/W/G (746220)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
29
3 Appendix
3.1.6
30
VACUTAP VM II 351/501/651-0/W/G (746221)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.7
VACUTAP VM I 802/1002-0/W/G (746222)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
31
3 Appendix
3.1.8
32
VACUTAP VM I 1203/1503-0/W/G (746223)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.9
VACUTAP VM III K-0/W/G (746224)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
33
3 Appendix
3.1.10
34
VACUTAP VM III 650 Y with multiple coarse change-over selector (746226)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.11
VACUTAP VM I 601 with multiple coarse change-over selector (746227)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
35
3 Appendix
3.1.12
36
VACUTAP VM I 802/1002 with multiple coarse change-over selector (746228)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.13
VACUTAP VM I 1203/1503 with multiple coarse change-over selector (746229)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
37
3 Appendix
3.1.14
38
VACUTAP VM III 300 tie-in resistors without potential switch (898695)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.15
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
39
3 Appendix
3.1.16
40
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.17
VACUTAP VM III Y tie-in resistors with/without potential switch (898692)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
41
3 Appendix
3.1.18
42
VACUTAP VM II tie-in resistors with/without potential switch (898691)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.19
VACUTAP VM I tie-in resistors with/without potential switch (898690)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
43
3 Appendix
3.1.20
44
VACUTAP VM I 351...1503, tie-in resistor cylinder with potential switch without tie-in
resistors (898804)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.21
VACUTAP VM 300 installation drawing of centrical drive (765192)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
45
3 Appendix
3.1.22
46
VACUTAP VM installation drawing of centrical drive (746230)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
VACUTAP VM installation drawing of centrical drive (746230)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
47
3 Appendix
3.1.23
48
VACUTAP VM on-load tap-changer head, centrical drive (893899)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.24
VACUTAP VM variants of on-load tap-changer head (720026)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
49
3 Appendix
3.1.25
50
VACUTAP VM swivel range of gear unit (720027)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.26
VACUTAP VM screenings on oil compartment contacts (730336)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
51
3 Appendix
3.1.27
52
VACUTAP VM 300 tap selector cross-sections (898041)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.28
VACUTAP VM 300 arrangement of contacts on tap selector (blanks, 891114)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
53
3 Appendix
3.1.29
54
VACUTAP VM arrangement of contacts on tap selector, tap selector division 10...22

(898013)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.30
VACUTAP VM installation position of tap selector connection contacts (890477)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
55
3 Appendix
3.1.31
56
VACUTAP VM connecting leads 3W, 1G, 3G (723590)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.32
VACUTAP VM screenings on fine tap selector and change-over selector (730335)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
57
3 Appendix
3.1.33
58
VACUTAP VM 802/803/1203/1503 bridges to parallel connection of tap selector

connection contacts (899598)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.34
VACUTAP VM horizontal drive shaft, centrical drive (893896)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
59
3 Appendix
3.1.35
60
VACUTAP VM III 350/500/650 Y arrangement of tap selectors (891107)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.36
VACUTAP VM I 351/501/651 arrangement of tap selectors (891108)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
61
3 Appendix
3.1.37
62
VACUTAP VM I 1503 arrangement of tap selectors (891109)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.38
VACUTAP VM I 802/1002 arrangement of tap selectors (891110)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
63
3 Appendix
3.1.39
64
VACUTAP VM, supporting flange, special design for bell-type tank installation for
Um up to 300 kV (896762)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.40
VACUTAP VM flange for pressure relief valve (895168)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
65
3 Appendix
3.1.41
66
VACUTAP VM tap selector base with additional screening, reversing change-over

selector design (893934)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.1.42
VACUTAP VM tap selector base with additional screening, coarse tap connection
design (893935)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
67
3 Appendix
3.1.43
68
VACUTAP VM tap selector base with through hole D20 and D13 (725649)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.2
VACUTAP VM 300 overview of on-load tap-changer designs (765835)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
69
3 Appendix
3.3
70
VACUTAP VM overview of on-load tap-changer designs (899740)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.4
Overview of basic connection diagrams with tap selector connection contacts

designated in accordance with MR standard (890616)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
71
3 Appendix
Overview of basic connection diagrams with tap selector connection contacts designated
in accordance with MR standard (890616)
72
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
Overview of basic connection diagrams with tap selector connection contacts designated
in accordance with MR standard (890616)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
73
3 Appendix
3.5
Connection diagram (contacts designated in accordance with MR standard)
3.5.1
VACUTAP VM III 300 Y, basic connection diagram 10 19 1 W (2414642)
74
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.5.2
VACUTAP VM III 300 Y, basic connection diagram 10 19 3 W (2414644)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
75
3 Appendix
3.5.3
76
VACUTAP VM III 300 Y, basic connection diagram 14 27 1 G (2414648)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.5.4
VACUTAP VM III 300 Y, basic connection diagram 14 27 3 G (2414649)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
77
3 Appendix
3.5.5
78
VACUTAP VM III 350/500/650 Y, basic connection diagram 10 19 1 W (2414658)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.5.6
VACUTAP VM III 350/500/650 Y, basic connection diagram 10 19 3 W (2414670)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
79
3 Appendix
3.5.7
80
VACUTAP VM I 802/1002, basic connection diagram 14 27 1 G (2414631)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
3 Appendix
3.5.8
VACUTAP VM I 1203/1503, basic connection diagram 18 35 1 W (2414636)
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
81
3 Appendix
3.5.9
82
VACUTAP VM I 802/1002, basic connection diagram 16 79 1 G, multiple coarse

change-over selector design (2407535)
VACUTAP VM
2332907/00 EN
4 MR worldwide
MR worldwide
Australia
Reinhausen Australia Pty. Ltd.
Ground Floor
6-10 Geeves Avenue
Rockdale N. S. W. 2216
Phone: +61 2 9556 2133
Fax: +61 2 9597 1339
E-Mail: sales@au.reinhausen.com
Italy
Reinhausen Italia S.r.l.
Via Alserio, 16
20159 Milano
Phone: +39 02 6943471
Fax: +39 02 69434766
E-Mail: sales@it.reinhausen.com
Russian Federation
OOO MR
Naberezhnaya Akademika Tupoleva
15, Bld. 2 ("Tupolev Plaza")
105005 Moscow
Tel. +7 495 980 89 67
Fax. +7 495 980 89 67
E-Mail: mrr@reinhausen.ru
Brazil
MR do Brasil Indstria Mecnica Ltda.
Av. Elias Yazbek, 465
CEP: 06803-000
Embu - So Paulo
Phone: +55 11 4785 2150
Fax: +55 11 4785 2185
E-Mail: vendas@reinhausen.com.br
Japan
MR Japan Corporation
German Industry Park
1-18-2 Hakusan, Midori-ku
Yokohama 226-0006
Phone: +81 45 929 5728
Fax: +81 45 929 5741
South Africa
Reinhausen South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
No. 15, Third Street, Booysens Reserve
Johannesburg
Phone: +27 11 8352077
Fax: +27 11 8353806
E-Mail: support@reinhausen.co.za
Canada
Reinhausen Canada Inc.
1010 Sherbrooke West, Suite 1800
Montral, Qubec H3A 2R7, Canada
Phone: +1 514 286 1075
Fax: +1 514 286 0520
Mobile: +49 170 7807 696
E-Mail: m.foata@ca.reinhausen.com
Luxembourg
Reinhausen Luxembourg S.A.
72, Rue de Prs
L-7333 Steinsel
Phone: +352 27 3347 1
Fax: +352 27 3347 99
E-Mail: sales@lu.reinhausen.com
South Korea
Reinhausen Korea Ltd.
Baek Sang Bldg. Room No. 1500
197-28, Kwanhun-Dong, Chongro-Ku
Seoul 110-718, Korea
Phone: +82 2 767 4909
Fax: +82 2 736 0049
E-Mail: you-mi.jang@kr.reinhausen.com
India
Easun-MR Tap Changers Ltd.
612, CTH Road
Tiruninravur, Chennai 602 024
Phone: +91 44 26300883
Fax: +91 44 26390881
E-Mail: easunmr@vsnl.com
Malaysia
Reinhausen Asia-Pacific Sdn. Bhd
Level 11 Chulan Tower
No. 3 Jalan Conlay
50450 Kuala Lumpur
Phone: +60 3 2142 6481
Fax: +60 3 2142 6422
E-Mail: mr_rap@my.reinhausen.com
U.S.A.
Reinhausen Manufacturing Inc.
2549 North 9th Avenue
Humboldt, TN 38343
Phone: +1 731 784 7681
Fax: +1 731 784 7682
E-Mail: sales@reinhausen.com
Iran
Iran Transfo After Sales Services Co.
Zanjan, Industrial Township No. 1 (Aliabad)
Corner of Morad Str.
Postal Code 4533144551
E-Mail: itass@iran-transfo.com
P.R.C. (China)
MR China Ltd. (MRT)
United Arab Emirates

Reinhausen Middle East FZE
Dubai Airport Freezone
Building Phase 6, 3rd floor, Office No. 6EB
341 Dubai
Phone: +971 4 6091828
Fax: +971 4 6091829
E-Mail: service@ae.reinhausen.com
360
4E
200120
86 21 61634588
86 21 61634582
mr-sales@cn.reinhausen.com
mr-service@cn.reinhausen.com
2332907/00 EN
VACUTAP VM
83
2332907/00 EN 11/10 F0248500
TMDS Smart Monitor

Solutions for transformer life-cycle management
Answers for energy.
TMDS Smart Monitor
Selecting a transformer monitoring

solution is a critical step in achieving your
companys Smart Grid asset management
strategy. Siemens TMDS Smart Monitor
is a self-contained, expert system
combining multiple IEEE/ANSI-accepted
engineering models with advanced rulebased logic, far exceeding existing
monitoring concepts. TMDS Smart
Monitor turns transformer monitoring
data into actionable information by
translating combustible dissolved gas,
bushing capacitance deviation, moisture
and other sensor measured data into
diagnostic and prognostic messaging.
The TMDS Smart Monitor provides
alarming using models that work with
rule-based logic, derived from accepted
IEEE/ANSI guidelines. Alarm messaging
includes maintenance support and
suggested loading recommendations
should TMDS classify the observed
deviation as severe enough that it may
result in the damage or potential failure
of the transformer.
Additionally the TMDS Smart Monitor

can perform cooling system control
functions by initiating staged cooling to
optimize transformer operating
temperatures.
The Siemens TMDS Smart Monitor
advantages include the following:
Best-in-class transformer monitoring
and diagnostic system
Advanced detection of abnormal
conditions
Supports customer preferences in
transformer sensing technologies
Automatically detects bad sensor data
to avoid false diagnosis
Configurable for legacy transformers
PI Historian and SCADA system
interface
Can be integrated with Siemens TMDS
to support a centralized asset
management strategy.
Comprehensive data
requires powerful
analytical tools
Select from a suite of analysis

applications. The following Siemens
specialist models are provided with
TMDS Smart Monitor:
Bushing relative capacitance
deviation
Evaluation of bushing insulation
condition
Insulation moisture
Evaluation of oil moisture condition
and estimated moisture in paper
Thermal
Hot spot evaluation by ANSI, IEC and
Siemens proprietary methods
Ageing and life expectancy
Evaluation of relative loss of life and
relative ageing by ANSI, IEC or ABNT
methods
Cooling system monitoring
Evaluation of proper cooling system
operation by monitoring the load
current of the fan groups and oil or
water flow (depending on the cooling
system)
Conservator oil volume

Provides advanced notification of
conservator oil volume before
reaching lowest acceptable level
Cooling system control
Controls the cooling system by
calculating the future hot spot as a
function of the current loading,
executing periodical cooling groups
exercise
Dissolved gas-in-oil
Evaluation of limit values of gas
generation in oil (depending on
sensors installed, may include
methane, ethylene, acetylene, ethane,
carbon dioxide, hydrogen, oxygen and
carbon monoxide). Analysis and
indication of incipient faults using the
Duval triangle method
LTC monitoring
Evaluation of position indication,
contact wear calculation and torque
for comparison with learned values.
Duvals analysis was performed. In case gas

formation shows stability, no further action is
recommended. TMDS will re-assess Duvals
analysis within 24 hours. Region of Duvals
Triangle = T2 - Thermal Fault, 200(degrees) C <
T < 700 (degrees) C. Reduce load by 25 percent
and re-assess transformer behavior. In case it
persists, must undertake immediate internal
inspection to establish cause of fault.
TMDS Smart Monitor delivers decision support to

the right personnel in the context of actionable
information.
Siemens answers
for transformer
monitoring
Siemens provides a comprehensive
TMDS
suite of transformer life-cycle
TMDS supports a central diagnostic

strategy where responsibility for fleetwide asset analysis and budget
preparation is centralized. Field teams
are typically dispatched by central
maintenance or asset management
groups.
management solutions specifically

designed to meet your needs.
TMDS Smart Monitor
TMDS Smart Monitor supports a
distributed diagnostic strategy where
responsibility for responding to alarms
and providing diagnostic expertise is
regionally distributed. Field teams are
self-sufficient in assessing asset
condition, performing tests and arriving
at corrective actions to be taken.
Differences in functionality and architecture between TMDS and TMDS Smart Monitor
TMDS
TMDS Smart Monitor
Provides monitoring and diagnostics for

transformers in one or across multiple
substations
Stand alone monitor for single transformer
Provides advanced detection of abnormal

conditions
Supports customer preference in sensing

technologies
Automatically detects bad sensor data to avoid

false diagnosis
Provides maintenance support and loading

recommendations to address abnormal
operation
Provides overview of possible consequences

(prognostics) if current trend or parameter
deviation continues
Location of historical data and diagnostic

information
Central TMDS engineering server
Smart Monitor flash memory
Access to data and diagnostic information
Active monitoring remotely via customer

intranet
Active monitoring via Smart Monitor

touch screen or remotely via Smart
Monitor Web server
Cooling system control
Creates and monitors statistical definition for

multiple parameters
Performs correlation between multiple

parameters and across multiple transformers
The TMDS Smart

Monitor can easily be
installed on new or
legacy transformers
from any manufacturer
utilizing existing
sensors
Actionable information
Configurable for legacy transformers
Delivers statistically relevant abnormal

operating data and alarm conditions
Provides maintenance support to
address abnormal operation
Suggests loading recommendations
through the adaptation of models
using actual field condition assessment
data.
Sensing technology agnostic
Supports customer preference in

transformer sensing technologies
Historical and diagnostic information

that can be downloaded directly from
the TMDS Smart Monitor and is also
buffered up to 12 months
Allows customer to incorporate

appropriate sensing technology based
upon transformer importance.
DNP 3.0/Modbus communication

options are available for SCADA-type
communications.
Self diagnostic
TMDS Smart Monitor automatically
detects bad sensor data to avoid false
diagnosis.
9
9
9
1
10
2
5
6
3
Features include:
Active monitoring via TMDS Smart
Monitors local 12 touch screen or
laptop connection and passive
monitoring remotely via built-in Web
server
Due to the large availability of sensors in

the market, TMDS Smart Monitor is
designed to support data acquisition
from different manufacturers sensors.
11
Legacy transformers are unique in that

they each have a specific operational
history. Siemens TMDS Smart Monitor
allows condition assessment data to be
incorporated into the configuration of
alarms and recommended loading to take
into account the operational history of
the transformer.
Variables monitored, depending

on sensors installed, include:
1. Winding temperature
2. Top and bottom oil
temperatures
3. Ambient temperature
4. Load current
5. Fan motor current
6. Oil flow (pump motor)
7. Moisture in oil

Aquaoil

Vaisala
8. Dissolved gas in oil
Multi-gas

Serveron TM8

Siemens GAS-Guard 8

Kelman MULTITRANS
Single-gas

Calisto

Hydran
9. Bushing condition

Doble IDD

HSP
10. LTC monitoring
11. Oil level
Published by and copyright 2010:

Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Freyeslebenstrasse 1
91058 Erlangen, Germany
Siemens Energy, Inc.
7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
For more information, contact
+1 (800) 347-6659
www.usa.siemens.com/energy
Siemens Canada Limited
1550 Appleby Line
Burlington, Ontario, Canada
+1 (905) 315-6868
Order No. E50001-F730-A155-X-76US
Printed in USA
BU 20099151385997F 01101
Trademarks mentioned in this document
are the property of Siemens AG, its affiliates,
or their respective owners.
Subject to change without prior notice.
The information in this document contains
general descriptions of the technical options
available, which may not apply in all cases.
The required technical options should therefore
be specified in the contract.
GAS-Guard 8
Online dissolved gas analysis sensor
Answers for energy.
Dissolved gas analysis (DGA)
Dissolved gas analysis

is the single-most
comprehensive tool
for transformer
condition assessment
Throughout your system there are transformers that are vital to the reliability of your
grid - generator step-up transformers,
large transmission transformers and critical
substation transformers. Based on historical
installation rates, the average transformer
age is 40 years. However, age itself is not
a cause of failure. As transformers age,
they endure various stresses that can
contribute to a variety of failure mechanisms.
Appropriate online DGA monitoring and
diagnostic tools can help utilities lower
maintenance costs, extend transformer
useful life and avoid unplanned failures.
Gas chromatography (GC) has long been the
accepted standard for the measurement of
dissolved gas levels in transformer oil. The
GAS-Guard 8 brings the DGA laboratory to
your transformer with its rugged, closed-loop
gas chromatograph.
Key benefits include:

Field-based, fully automated DGA requires
no manual oil sampling or remote lab
testing
Use of the only measurement method
specified for all DGA standards worldwide
(IEE, IEC, ASTM)
Built-in self calibration system traceable
to NIST standards executes weekly tests
for performance confirmation
Accurate and timely DGA results improve
the ability to protect transformer against
fault damage
Time-date stamped test results allow
correlation between real events and
measured conditions
Data generated by the Gas-Guard 8
can be used to support condition-based
maintenance programs.
Many transformer failures can be prevented through analysis of

DGA data supporting the diagnosis of developing abnormal
conditions.
Comprehensive data requires

powerful analytical tools
The software package included with

the GAS-Guard 8 sensor allows the user
to graphically display continuous gas
evolution for each of the eight critical
fault gases and as well as moisture, load
and ambient temperature.
Online diagnostic tools

The software package also allows the user
to trace changes in fault severity over time
through dynamic plots created using the Duval
Triangle and Rogers Ratios analysis tools.
The Duval Triangle (IEC 60599-199-03)

provides a diagnostic outcome for
combinations of three fault gases.
Online DGA data populating diagnostic tools

deliver new insights. This displays Rogers
Ratios (IEEE PC57.104.D11d) and basic gas
ratios (IEC 60599-1999-03).
SITRAM GAS-Guard 8:
Facts and figures
Moisture-in-oil and oil temperature option
Environmental specifications
Parameter
Accuracy5
Range
Operating temperature
50 C to + 55 C
Moisture-in-oil
2%
0 100% RS6
Cold-start temperature
20 C
<10% of reading for oil

temperature >30 C
0 to 807 ppm
Operating humidity
5% to 95%, RH noncondensing
Oil inlet pressure
0 to 45 psi, to 3 bar
<18% of reading for oil

temperature <30 C
0 to 807 ppm
Storage temperature
40 C to +75 C
0.1 C (typ.)
-40 C to +180 C
Storage humidity
5% to 95%, RH noncondensing
Oil temperature
5
6
7
Includes nonlinearity and repeatability

Relative saturation
Upper range limited to saturation
Total dissolved gases

True total dissolved combustible gas (TDCG) output is available
(H2, CO, CH4, C2H2, C2H4, C2H6 in PPM).
Each gas is measured at 100% of detected level.
Total hydrocarbons (THC) output is available
(CH4, C2H2, C2H4, C2H6 in PPM).
Input power requirements

Voltage
115 VAC or 230 VAC 15%
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Current
6 A maximum at 115 V
3 A maximum at 230 V
Physical specifications and weights

Height
22.0 in (55.9 cm)
Width
20.0 in (50.8 cm)
Depth
11.2 in (28.4 cm)
Gas analysis
Weight
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Oil sampling is continuous and gas analysis intervals are user-selectable from
2 hours to 12 hours (Default: 4 hours).
Enclosure rating
IP 66, NEMA 4
Packaged dimensions
26.4 in x 26.4 in x 15.9 in (67 cm x 67

cm x 40.3 cm)
Up to two years of data stored in memory.
Shipping weight (monitor only)
70 lb (31.8 kg)
Automatic schedule acceleration when rate of change alarm limit exceeded

(Default: 1hour).
Certifications/standards
System performs periodic autocalibration to NIST8 traceable gas standard.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Each gas is measured at 100% of detected level.
All data is time-date stamped.
National Institute of Standards and Technology
Alarms
Specification
Test method
EN 61326 Class A: 2002
EN 61326:
2002 radiated emissions,

2002 conducted
emissions
EN 61000-3-2: 2000
EN 61000-3-2:
2000 current harmonics
EN 61000-3-3: 2001
EN 61000-3-3:
2001 voltage
fluctuations
EN 61326 Annex A: 2002
IEC 61000-4-2:
2001 ESD
IEC 61000-4-3:
2002 radiated immunity

against HF field
IEC 61000-4-4:
2004 EFT
IEC 61000-4-5:
2001 surge
IEC 61000-4-6:
2004 conducted RF
immunity
IEC 61000-4-8:
2001 magnetic field

immunity
IEC 61000-4-11:
2004 voltage dips and

interrupts
For each individual gas measured:

Two individually programmable caution and alarm settings for level (ppm) as
well as rate of change (ppm/day)
Freely programmable relay contact for gas alarm or service event
One relay contact for self-monitoring of power supply.
External sensors
Current sensor for load-dependent gas development
Ambient temperature
Moisture in oil and oil temperature
Communications options
Standard physical layer interfaces include RS-232, RS-485, Ethernet
(10/100Base-TX), V.92 internal POTS modem.
Optional physical layer interfaces include cellular modem, Ethernet
(100Base-FX), wireless radio.
Three 4-20 mA inputs and one RS-232 port available to connect to optional
devices.
Protocols supported: TCP/IP, DNP3, Modbus RTU and ASCII, OPC
Safety
IEC 61010-1, IEC 61010-2-81
UL 61010-1 (2nd Edition), UL 60950-1 Clause 6.4
CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1-04
The Siemens GAS-Guard 8 provides

accurate and repeatable measurement
of eight (8) critical fault gases
Graphical representation of GAS-Guard 8

connected to the transformer tank.
DGA tolerances of the GAS-Guard 8
Gas
Accuracy1
Repeatability2
Range3
Hydrogen
H2
+/- 5% or +/- 2 ppm
<2%
2-3,000 ppm
Oxygen
O2 +/- 5% or +30 / - 0 ppm
<1%
30-5,000 ppm
Methane
CH4
+/- 5% or +/- 10 ppm
<1%
10-5,000 ppm
Carbon Monoxide
CO
+/- 5% or +/- 3 ppm
<1%
3-10,000 ppm
CO2
+/- 5% or +/- 5 ppm
<1%
5-30,000 ppm
Ethylene
C2H4
+/- 5% or +/- 3 ppm
<1%
3-5,000 ppm
Ethane
C2H6
+/- 5% or +/- 5 ppm
<1%
5-5,000 ppm
Acetylene
C2H2
+/- 5% or +/- 1 ppm
<2%
1-3,000 ppm
Carbon Dioxide
Through chromatography, the GAS-Guard 8

generates individual measurements of eight
critical fault gases found in transformer oil.
Accuracy is commensurate with traditional
lab results. The sensor continually collects
oil samples as often as every two hours. The
GAS-Guard 8 can also measure moisture in
the oil, oil temperature and ambient temperature. DGA results and other measurement
data are time-date stamped and can thus be
correlated to transformer load.
NOTES: All specifications are independent of oil temperature and gas pressure level.
1 Percent of ppm - whichever is greater
2 At gas calibration level
3 Gas-in-oil
The Siemens GAS-Guard 8 sensor provides a complete

online dissolved gas analysis.
Published by and copyright 2010:

Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Freyeslebenstrasse 1
91058 Erlangen, Germany
Siemens Energy, Inc.
7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
For more information, please contact:
Telephone: +1 (919) 365-2200
Toll-free: +1 (800) 347-6659
Siemens Canada Limited
1550 Appleby Line
Burlington, Ontario, Canada
L7L 6X7
+1 (905) 315-6868
Order No. E50001-F730-A110-X-4A00
Printed in USA
TD 2009212142519480F BR 0110.5
Trademarks mentioned in this document
are the property of Siemens AG, its affiliates,
or their respective owners.
Subject to change without prior notice.
The information in this document contains
general descriptions of the technical options
available, which may not apply in all cases.
The required technical options should therefore
be specified in the contract.
Type NR Neutral Grounding Resistors

APPLICATION
Neutral Grounding Resistor
Powerohm Type NR Neutral Grounding Resistors are used

in industrial power systems for resistance grounding of wyeconnected generators and transformers. A neutral grounding resistor limits the fault current to a value which is
sufficient enough to operate protective relays, yet prevent
unwanted fault damage.
Neutral Grounding Resistor Schematic

Transformer or Generator
Secondary
N
To Protective
Relay
CT
R
Neutral Grounding
Resistor
G
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Neutral grounding resistors are rated in line-to-neutral
voltage (system voltage divided by 1.732), initial fault
current and maximum time on. Powerohm neutral grounding resistors are designed to dissipate the required amount
of energy and not exceed the temperature limitations of
IEEE Standard 32-1972. As defined in this publication,
the time and temperature ratings for neutral grounding
resistors are as follows:
Short time: Short time ratings are 10 and 60 seconds.
Since short time rated resistors can only withstand rated
current for short periods of time, they are usually used with
fault clearing relays. The short time temperature rise for
the resistive element is 760C.
Extended time: A time on rating greater than ten minutes
which permits temperature rise of resistive elements to
become constant, but limited to an average not more than
90 days per year. The extended temperature rise for the
resistive element is 610C.
Continuous: Capable of withstanding rated current for
an indefinite period of time. The continuous temperature
rise for the resistive element is 385C.
POWEROHM
RESISTORS, INC.
BASIC CONSTRUCTION
Resistor Assembly: The resistor coils consist of a stainless
steel edgewound element wound around a ceramic core
supported on a through-rod. Glazed insulators are attached
to each end of the coils and fastened to a heavy gage,
corrosion resistant frame. The unit is designed to permit the
expansion of supporting rods when submitted to high operating temperatures. Resistor elements are joined by stainless steel connectors, which are welded in place, to form a
positive electrical path.
Safety Enclosure: Our resistor assemblies are available
with grounded safety enclosures to protect personnel and
wildlife from harm. Screened and louvered enclosures are
available in a variety of finishes including painted, powder
coated, mill galvanized, hot-dipped galvanized, aluminum
and stainless steel.
Options: A number of additional options are available
including entrance bushings, current transformers, elevating stands and disconnect switches.
ELECTRICAL TESTS
All units are factory tested in accordance with IEEE Standard 32-1972, specifically Sections 10.1.4 and 10.3.2. The
procedure includes a resistance measurement test to verify
that the tolerance is within + 10%, and an applied potential
test. A copy of the test report is included with each shipped
unit.
5713 13th Street
Katy, Texas 77493
Phone: (281) 391-6800, Fax: (281) 391-6810
Please visit our website at www.powerohm.com
Ratings & Dimensions of Standard Size Units

RATINGS: The following table contains information on the most
common size units, other variations are available.
10 SECOND TIME RATINGS

CATALOG
NUMBER
INITIAL
AMPS
RESISTANCE
1390 VOLTS LINE-TO-NEUTRAL (2400 VOLT SYSTEM)

13.90
NR1390-100-10
100
38
38
6.95
NR1390-200-10
200
38
38
4.63
NR1390-300-10
300
38
38
3.48
NR1390-400-10
400
38
38
2.78
NR1390-500-10
500
38
38
2.32
NR1390-600-10
600
38
38
1.74
NR1390-800-10
800
38
38
1.39
NR1390-1000-10
1000
38
38
APPROX.
WEIGHT
DIMENSIONS: The dimensions listed in the

table are in inches. Information subject to
change without notice.
FRONT VIEW
Neutral Bushing
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
280
290
300
310
320
340
350
360
30
30
30
30
30
30
36
36
380
390
400
410
420
430
490
500
Ground
Terminal

NR2400-100-10
NR2400-200-10
NR2400-300-10
NR2400-400-10
NR2400-500-10
NR2400-600-10
NR2400-800-10
NR2400-1000-10
100
200
300
400
500
600
800
1000
24.00
12.00
8.00
6.00
4.80
4.00
3.00
2.40
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
RIGHT SIDE VIEW

NR4160-100-10
NR4160-200-10
NR4160-300-10
NR4160-400-10
NR4160-500-10
NR4160-600-10
NR4160-800-10
NR4160-1000-10
100
200
300
400
500
600
800
1000
41.60
20.80
13.87
10.40
8.32
6.93
5.20
4.16
38
38
38
38
38
38
44
44
38
38
38
38
38
38
54
54
36
36
36
36
36
36
54
54
550
560
570
580
590
600
680
700

NR8000-100-10
NR8000-200-10
NR8000-300-10
NR8000-400-10
NR8000-500-10
NR8000-600-10
NR8000-800-10
NR8000-1000-10
100
200
300
400
500
600
800
1000
80.00
40.00
26.70
20.00
16.00
13.30
10.00
8.00
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
84
84
820
830
840
850
870
880
950
990
30
30
36
320
370
420
36
36
54
450
550
850
54
54
54
900
950
1400
EXTENDED TIME RATINGS

NR1390-15-E
NR1390-25-E
NR1390-50-E
15
25
50
92.7
55.6
27.8
38
38
38
38
38
38

NR2400-15-E
NR2400-25-E
NR2400-50-E
15
25
50
160.0
96.0
48.0
38
38
44
38
38
54

NR4160-15-E
NR4160-25-E
NR4160-50-E
15
25
50
227.3
166.4
83.2
44
44
84
54
54
54
The above drawing details a typical neutral

grounding resistor with enclosure. Units are
available with screened or louvered covers
on front and back. All units normally have
solid tops and sides and a perforated bottom.
TO ORDER A NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTOR NOT LISTED IN THE TABLE,
SPECIFY THE FOLLOWING:
1. Line-to-neutral voltage.
2. Initial fault current.
3. Maximum time on.
4. Special requirements or options.
Generator Neutral Grounding Resistors

APPLICATION
Generator Neutral Grounding Resistor
Powerohm offers high resistance grounding equipment for

wye connected generators. Our equipment is normally
designed to limit the line-to-ground fault current to below 15
amps for generators rated up to 14,400 volts. These units will
provide a high resistance neutral during a fault condition,
while allowing the system to operate as an ungrounded
system during normal operating conditions. The configuration basically consists of a dry-type single-phase transformer with a resistor connected across the secondary. The
primary of the transformer is then connected between the
wye point of the generator and ground.
Powerohm generator grounding equipment is normally supplied with the transformer and resistor installed in a common
enclosure. Continuous rated units are usually compartmentalized to separate the resistor assembly from the transformer which is subject to overheating. Units do not normally
include any relaying or control circuitry, but do offer the
transformer secondary wired to a terminal block installed in
an external junction box.
WYE-CONNECTED
GENERATOR
N
R
TO PROTECTIVE
RELAY
GROUNDING
TRANSFORMER
G
BASIC CONSTRUCTION
Transformer: For continuous time ratings, the transformer
must be capable of withstanding rated current for an indefinite period of time; therefore, the KVA rating of the grounding
transformer is equal to the rated line-to-neutral voltage times
the desired neutral current. For a short-time rating, the KVA
rating of a grounding transformer will be smaller because the
unit is designed to carry its rated current for a limited time.
Resistor Assembly: The resistance value is calculated by
dividing the secondary voltage by the rated current necessary to obtain the desired fault current on the primary.
Resistor elements are selected to best meet the current and
voltage requirements of the system. A typical assembly
includes all stainless steel elements, bus bars and
terminals.
Safety Enclosure: Our grounding assemblies are available

in grounded NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R safety enclosures,
complete with nearly any finish including mill galvanized,
power coated, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication, aluminum or stainless steel.
Options: A number of additional options are available,
including entrance bushings, current transformers, elevating stands, and disconnect switches.
ELECTRICAL TESTS
unit.
Resistance Grounding with a Zigzag Transformer

Zigzag Grounding Transformer with Resistor
APPLICATION
The best way to resistance ground a power system is to
obtain the system neutral through a generator or transformer with a wye-connected winding. However, a system
neutral may not be available, particularly in many older low
voltage systems and a significant number of existing
medium voltage systems. To avoid the high cost of replacing
a source transformer, an existing delta-connected system
can be grounded using a zigzag transformer to form an
artificial neutral, then connecting a resistor between the
newly created wye-point and ground.
A zigzag transformer has no secondary winding, and is
designed to provide a low-impedance path for the zerosequence currents to flow. During a line-to-ground fault
condition, the zero sequence currents can flow into the
ground at the point of the fault, and back through the neutral
of the grounding transformer. The impedance of the zigzag
transformer to balanced three-phase voltages is relatively
high, therefore, when there is no fault on the system, only a
small magnetizing current flows in the windings. A zigzag
grounding transformer provides a stable neutral point which
makes possible its use for grounding an otherwise isolated
neutral system.
A zigzag transformer with a resistance ground is normally
designed for a short time rating of 10 to 60 seconds.
Consequently, the grounding transformer is much smaller in
size than an ordinary continuously rated transformer with
the same rating. For short time ratings, the short time
temperature rise for the resistive element is 760C.
TO UNGROUNDED
3-PHASE VOLTAGE
SOURCE
TO UNGROUNDED
3-PHASE LOAD
ZIGZAG
TRANSFORMER
BASIC CONSTRUCTION
Transformer: For a short time rating, the grounding
transformer is designed to carry its rated current for a limited
time, consequently the unit is ordinarily much smaller,
physically, than an ordinary three-phase transformer for the
same rated kVA.
Resistor Assembly: The resistance value is calculated by
dividing the line-to-neutral voltage by the rated neutral
current. Resistor elements are selected to best meet the
short time current rating and voltage requirements of the
system. A typical assembly includes all stainless steel
elements, bus bars and terminals.
Safety Enclosure: Our grounding assemblies are available
in grounded NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R safety enclosures,
complete with nearly any finish, including mill galvanized,
power coated, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication, aluminum, or stainless steel.
Options: A number of additional options are available
including entrance bushings, current transformers, elevating stands and disconnect switches.
ELECTRICAL TESTS
R
RESISTOR
unit.
24 HOUR EMERGENCY SERVICE
(800) 838-4694
Type ER and ERB Edgewound Resistors - 16 to 100 Amps

APPLICATION
Type ER Edgewound Resistor
Powerohm's Type ER and ERB Edgewound Resistors can

be used for any AC or DC power application. Units are most
commonly used for VFD braking, motor control, load banks
and neutral grounding applications.
The Type ER and ERB resistors are suitable for continuous
duty applications where low resistance and high current are
required. The high element mass allows these units to
withstand high current, intermittent duty applications. This
characteristic, combined with the high-temperature ceramic
insulation, makes the edgewound ideal for neutral grounding
applications, which reach temperatures as high as 800C.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
BASIC CONSTRUCTION
Powerohm's Type ER and ERB resistors are lightweight,
heavy-duty units consisting of a non-corrodible, high quality
stainless steel alloy. The ribbon-like element is wound on
edge in the form of a helix, and then spun onto a ceramic
core. Type ER resistors are supported by a threaded rod
passing through the center of the ceramic core. Type ERB
resistors are supported by a mounting bar which is slotted
at either end. Fixed terminations are made by welding
stainless steel tabs to either end of the element, or at various
points for multiple connections. This unit includes fixed
terminals, through-rods, through-bars, hardware and stainless steel element.
Our ceramic insulating cores are manufactured in-house to
maintain total control over production and quality standards.
Powerohm is the only domestic resistor manufacturer with
this added advantage.
OPTIONS
COIL SIZES: Type ER and ERB resistors are available in
(6) standard lengths, all having the same, approximate
diameter of 2 inches. Wattage values vary from 400 to 2300
watts per coil. These units are available in (15) different
current ratings ranging from 16 to 100 amps continuous, and
resistance values between 6.2 and .06 ohms, respectively.
ADJUSTABLE TERMINALS: Adjustable terminals, which
can be clamped to the element, are available for certain size
units; add "-A" to the part number.
ENCLOSURES: Powerohm Type ER resistors can be
packaged in our standard line of enclosures. See the
Enclosure Catalog Section for details.
POWEROHM
RESISTORS, INC.
VOLTAGE INSULATION: A standard Type ER and ERB

resistor is insulated for up to 1000 volts. Standard enclosures are insulated for up to 1000 volts and by adding further
stages of insulation, an assembly of units can be used for
applications exceeding 15 kV.
RESISTANCE TOLERANCE: + 10% for all units; as low as
+ 3% if required.
COEFFICIENT OF RESISTIVITY: Resistance values will
increase as the element temperature rises. Expect an
approximate increase of 5% in resistance after the unit
reaches an operating temperature of 375C above ambient.
Contact the factory for more specific information if needed.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: Standard ratings are based on
maximum ambient temperatures of 40C. Derate current
rating 95% for 50C ambient, 90% for 75C ambient, and
85% for 100C ambient.
EFFECTS OF ALTITUDE: The published electrical ratings
are applicable for altitudes of 6000 feet or less. Contact the
factory for deration factors above 6000 feet.
CUSTOM DESIGNS
Powerohm offers a complete selection of standard size coils
on the following page. These coils cover a wide range of
resistance and current values. Numerous variations are
available for special applications or replacement of other
manufacturers. Powerohm can match the electrical ratings
of any edgewound product available. Please contact the
factory for assistance.
5713 13th Street

Katy, Texas 77493
Phone: (281) 391-6800, Fax: (281) 391-6810
Please visit our website at www.powerohm.com
Type ER Electrical Ratings & Coils Dimensions

SPECIFY PART NUMBERS AS FOLLOWS: ER or ERB __ - __ .
For example, the part number of a Type ER, 50
Length
amp, 0.51 ohm coil is ER5-50.
Amp Rating
RATINGS: The continuous current ratings are based on a 375C temperature rise. The resistance values are measured
at 25C and have a + 10% tolerance.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS OF STANDARD SIZE COILS

CONTINUOUS
AMP RATING
RESISTANCE IN OHMS
LENGTH 2
LENGTH 3
LENGTH 4
LENGTH 5
LENGTH 6
LENGTH 7
15
1.90
3.00
4.10
5.10
6.20
7.20
16
1.70
2.60
3.50
4.40
5.30
6.20
18
1.30
2.0
2.7
3.5
4.2
4.90
20
1.20
1.80
2.4
3.1
3.7
4.3
23
.89
1.37
1.85
2.3
2.8
3.3
26
.69
1.06
1.44
1.81
2.2
2.6
29
.49
.75
1.02
1.29
1.55
1.82
32
.43
.66
.90
1.13
1.37
1.60
36
.35
.54
.73
.92
1.11
1.30
40
.27
.41
.56
.70
.85
.99
45
.25
.38
.52
.65
.78
.92
50
.19
.30
.40
.51
.62
.72
60
.15
.23
.32
.40
.48
.57
70
.12
.19
.26
.33
.39
.46
85
.07
.11
.15
.19
.23
.27
100
.06
.10
.13
.16
.20
.23
TYPE ER DIMENSIONS: The coil dimensions are for standard

size units. Coil and threaded rod length can be varied per
customer request. All units have the same approximate diameter of 2 inches. Units are furnished with 5/16"-18 through rods
and terminal hardware.
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
3/8 DIA.
3
C
B
A
STANDARD COIL DIMENSIONS

LENGTH
9-3/8
6-1/8
12-3/8
10
9-1/8
15-3/8
13
12-1/8
18-3/8
16
15-1/8
21-3/8
19
18-1/8
24-3/8
22
21-1/8
Type ERB Coil Dimensions & Tap Options

TYPE ERB (BAR-MOUNT) EDGEWOUND DIMENSIONS
TYPE ERB EDGEWOUND: Type ERB bar-mounted edgewounds are
available with the same electrical ratings as the Type ER edgewounds. All
units have the same approximate diameter of 2 inches. Units are furnished
with a through-bar and terminal hardware.
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
3/8 DIA.
(2) 17/32
SLOTS
1-1/4
B
A
STANDARD COIL DIMENSIONS

LENGTH
9-1/4
7-7/8
12-1/4
10-7/8
15-1/4
13-7/8
18-1/4
16-7/8
21-1/4
19-7/8
24-1/4
22-7/8
ADDITIONAL TAPS
Type ER resistors are furnished with two stainless steel terminals at either end of the ceramic core. Additional fixed
taps consist of a stainless steel terminal welded in place at various intervals. Numerous tap configurations are
available, but limited to a spacing no closer than 1-1/4 inches.
SPECIFY PART NUMBERS AS FOLLOWS:
Part Number
Number of Taps
For example, the part number of a Type

ER, 50 amp, 0.51 ohm coil with 2 taps at
1/3 spacing is ER5-50-2C. See below for
additional part number examples.
Spacing (See Table)
ADDITIONAL TAPS & SPACING CHART

FRACTIONAL
SPACING
SUFFIX
LETTER
1/2
1/3
1/4
1/5
B
C
D
E
1/6
1/7
1/8
1/9
F
G
H
J
1/10
1/11
1/12
1/13
K
L
M
N
1/14
1/15
1/16
1/17
P
R
S
T
Other examples of ER Edgewound Resistors

with additional taps.
ER3-50-1D
(1 TAP @ 1/4 SPACING)
ER3-50-5F
(5 TAP @ 1/6 SPACING)
Type ER Mounting Bracket Options & Dimensions

Type ER Edgewound Resistors are available fully assembled on open-style brackets. This open-style construction consist
of resistors installed on mill galvanized brackets complete with all hardware and stainless steel bus bars.
ER
SPECIFY PART NUMBERS AS FOLLOWS:
Number of Coils in Assembly

Part Number
Bracket Identification
For example, the part number of a Type ER, 50

amp, 0.51 ohm coil mounted on B1 Brackets is
1ER5-50-B1. Standard assemblies of 2 or more
coils include series jumpers. Add "-N" to eliminate
jumpers and "-P" for parallel jumpers.
STANDARD BRACKET DIMENSIONS

DIMENSION
SIZE 2
SIZE 3
SIZE 4
SIZE 5
SIZE 6
SIZE 7
12
15
18
21
24
11
14
17
20
23
B1 BRACKET ASSEMBLY OPTIONS & DIMENSIONS

FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
5/16 HARDWARE
7/16 DIA.
P11026
1.23 1500W
3-1/2
B
A

FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
7/16 DIA.
P0000
0.00 0000W
5/16 HARDWARE
3-1/4
B
A

FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
P0000
0.00 0000W
5/16 HARDWARE
9
7/16 DIA.
B
3-1/4
24 HOUR EMERGENCY SERVICE
(800) 838-4694

Et10412+o&m+manual+english 25.04.15

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Et10412+o&m+manual+english 25.04.15

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD.

TRANSFORMER (T1) DIVISION

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

: Black & Veatch on behalf of Minera Escondida Ltd.

SUBSTATION : BHPB Escondida Water Supply Project

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;

General Transformer Features

Packing, Transport, Handling & Storage

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;

Assembling & Installation

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;

Oil Sampling and Testing

Ratio, Polarity and Vector Group Test

Winding Resistance Measurement

Insulation Resistance (Meggar) test

Insulation Resistance Test

Measurement of Magnetising Current

Magnetic Balance Test

Power Factor Measurement (Tan-Delta) of Transformer Windings & Bushings

Tests on Auxiliary Instruments

5.4.10. Tests on Tap Changer

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;

End of life Disposal

Transformer Drawings and Catalogue

TMDS (SMART MONITOR)

Neutral Grounding resistor / transformer

Oil discharge Instruction

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;

Purpose of O & M Manual

Every product comes with a user manual

Instruction Guide Guide to

All the relevant drawings including Outline

General safety measures

Always be alert to emergencies. If an

Being a high voltage product, safety to life

DO NOT assume that someone else has

DO NOT walk under equipment that is

Basic safety practice

Every operator must have a safety

DO NOT work under equipment that is

DO NOT walk holding a ladder or any

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;

Transformer specific safety

must be taken to prevent objects from

DO NOT walk on a transformer or its parts

Anyone going inside a transformer must

DO NOT walk on a transformer under

Correct operation of all protective circuits

Customer Services Dept.

Extreme precautions are to be taken to

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;

Health, Safety & Environment

In view of the hazards associated

Categorization of Risk & Hazards

Prohibit entry where there

Documentation of preventive actions

Storage of accessories (including

12. Ensure personnel are not permitted

8. Documentation for Permit To Work.

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;

CROMPTON GREAVES LTD;